Monaco

Softing
Automotive Electronics GmbH

Richard-Reitzner-Allee 6
85540 Haar / Germany

T +49 89 45656 420

F +49 89 45656 399

[email protected]
www.softing.com
No part of this manual may be reproduced, photocopied, stored on a retrieval system, trans-
mitted, processed or translated without the express prior written consent.

Request for support by email

c 2017 Automotive Electronics GmbH
Contents

1 Overview 9
1.1 License Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

2 Starting Monaco 13

3 The Monaco Menu and Tool Bar 17

3.1 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.2 Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.3 View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.4 Execution Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.5 Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.6 Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.7 Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.8 Customizable Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.9 The Monaco Toolbar in Execution Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.10 The Monaco Toolbar in Configuration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.11 Clamp Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

4 Working in Execution Mode 40

4.1 The User Interface in Execution Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
4.1.1 Service Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4.1.1.1 User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.1.1.2 Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.1.1.3 Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4.1.1.4 Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4.1.2 Status Message Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.2 Opening a workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.3 Starting and Stopping the Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
4.4 Starting and Stopping the Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4.5 Global Protocol Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4.6 Using a Temporary Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
4.7 Connecting DoIP ECUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

5 Working in Configuration Mode 61

5.1 The User Interface in Configuration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
5.1.1 Configuration Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
5.1.2 Property Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
5.2 Creating a new Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
5.3 Creating a new Workspace Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
5.4 Setting Up Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
5.5 Setting up HMI Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

3
 5.5.1 Adding an HMI Control to a Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
5.5.2 Selecting an HMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
5.5.3 Configuration of HMI Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
5.5.3.1 Property [Show LongNames] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
5.5.4 Arranging HMI Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
5.5.5 Duplicating and Moving HMI Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
5.5.6 Changing the HMI Control Sequence Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
5.5.7 Deleting an HMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

6 Working with HMI Controls 85

6.1 Configuration of HMI Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
6.1.1 Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
6.1.2 Using Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
6.1.3 Designing Sequences of Services, ComPrimitives and OTX Scripts . . 95
6.1.3.1 Configuration of Services and ComPrimitives . . . . . . . . . 98
6.1.3.2 Configuration of OTX Scripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
6.2 Setting the ECU Sequence Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
6.3 Setting Common Properties for all HMI Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
6.4 ComPrimitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6.5 Logical Link States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
6.6 HexServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
6.6.1 Creating HexServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
6.6.2 Using HexServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
6.6.3 Deleting HexServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
6.7 Setting Protocol Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
6.7.1 Modifying Protocol Parameter Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
6.7.2 Saving Protocol Parameter Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
6.7.3 Applying Protocol Parameter Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
6.7.4 Deleting the ProtocolParameterSets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
6.8 Using OTX Scripts in Monaco . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
6.9 Using Application Guidelines (AGLs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
6.10 Using Pre- and Post Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
6.10.1 Pre and Post Action Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
6.10.2 Pre and Post Actions in Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

7 Exchanging Layouts and HMI Controls 128

7.1 Exporting Layouts and HMI Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
7.1.1 Exporting Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
7.1.2 Exporting HMI Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
7.2 Importing Layouts and HMI Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
7.2.1 Importing Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
7.2.1.1 Import Wizard - Step1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
7.2.1.2 Import Wizard - Step2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
 7.2.1.3 Import Wizard - Step3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
7.2.1.4 Handling of Imported Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
7.2.2 Importing an HMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
7.2.2.1 Import HMI Control Wizard - Step1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
7.2.2.2 Import HMI Control Wizard - Step2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
7.2.2.3 Import HMI Control Wizard - Step3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
7.2.2.4 Handling of Imported HMI Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
7.2.3 Importing HMI Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
7.2.4 Workspace Consistency Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
7.2.5 Impact of an Import on the Importing Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

8 The Monaco HMI Controls 151

8.1 HMI Control Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
8.1.1 Using the HMI Control Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
8.1.2 Configuration of the HMI Control Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
8.2 HMI Control Bus Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
8.2.1 Using the HMI Control Bus Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
8.2.2 Configuration of the HMI Control BusTrace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
8.3 HMI Control Communication Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
8.3.1 Using the HMI Control Communication Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
8.3.2 Configuration of the HMI Control Communication Control . . . . . . . 170
8.4 HMI Control Data Display (Discontinued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
8.4.1 Using the HMI Control Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
8.4.2 Configuration of the HMI Control Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
8.4.2.1 Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
8.4.2.2 Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
8.4.2.3 Display Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
8.5 HMI Control Diagnostic Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
8.5.1 Using the HMI Control Diagnostic Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
8.5.2 Configuration of the HMI Control Diagnostic Services . . . . . . . . . 189
8.5.2.1 Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
8.6 HMI Control DTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
8.6.1 Using the HMI Control DTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
8.6.1.1 Configuration and Execution Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
8.6.1.2 DTC Display Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
8.6.1.3 Supplementary DTC Information Area . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
8.6.2 Configuration of the HMI Control DTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
8.6.2.1 Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
8.6.2.2 Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
8.6.2.3 DTC Code Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
8.7 HMI Control ECU Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
8.7.1 Using the HMI Control ECU Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
8.7.2 Configuration of the HMI Control ECU Identification . . . . . . . . . . 216
 8.7.2.1 Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
8.7.2.2 Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
8.8 HMI Control Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
8.8.1 Using the HMI Control Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
8.8.2 Configuration of the HMI Control Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
8.8.2.1 Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
8.8.2.2 Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
8.9 HMI Control Graphical Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
8.9.1 Using Graphical Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
8.9.2 Configuration of the Data Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
8.9.2.1 Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
8.9.2.2 Server Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
8.9.3 Configuration of the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
8.9.3.1 Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
8.9.3.2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
8.9.3.3 Graphical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
8.9.4 The Instrument Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
8.9.4.1 Angular Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
8.9.4.2 Slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
8.9.4.3 Bar Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
8.9.4.4 7-Segment Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
8.9.4.5 Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
8.9.4.6 Oscilloscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
8.9.4.7 Toggle Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
8.9.4.8 Toggle Group Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
8.9.4.9 Input Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
8.9.4.10 Output Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
8.9.4.11 LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
8.9.4.12 Thermometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
8.9.4.13 Level Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
8.10 HMI Control IO Control (Discontinued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
8.10.1 Using the HMI Control IO Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
8.10.2 Configuration of the HMI Control IO Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
8.10.2.1 Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
8.10.2.2 IO Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
8.11 HMI Control Logical Link List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
8.11.1 Using the HMI Control Logical Link List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
8.11.2 Configuration of the HMI Control Logical Link List . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
8.11.2.1 Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
8.11.2.2 Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
8.12 HMI Control OBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
8.12.1 Using the HMI Control OBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
8.12.1.1 Mode 1 requestCurrentPowertrainDiagnosticData . . . . . . 296
 8.12.1.2 Mode 2 requestPowertrainFreezeFrameData . . . . . . . . . 297
8.12.1.3 Mode 3 requestEmissionRelatedPowertrainDTC . . . . . . . 297
8.12.1.4 Mode 4 clearResetEmissionRelatedDiagnosticInformation . 298
8.12.1.5 Mode 5 requestOxygenSensorMonitoringTestResults . . . . 298
8.12.1.6 Mode 6 requestOnBoardMonitTestResForNonContinMonit-
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
8.12.1.7 Mode 7 requestEmissionRelatedDTCsDetectedDuringDriv-
ingCycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
8.12.1.8 Mode 8 controlOfOnBoardDevice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
8.12.1.9 Mode 9 requestVehicleInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
8.12.1.10Mode A requestEmissionRelatedDTCsWithPermanentStatus 300
8.12.2 Configuration of the HMI Control OBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
8.13 HMI Control OTX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
8.13.1 Using the HMI Control OTX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
8.13.2 Configuration of the HMI Control OTX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
8.14 HMI Control Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
8.14.1 Using the HMI Control Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
8.14.1.1 Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
8.14.1.2 Scope View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
8.14.1.3 Chart View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
8.14.1.4 Gauge View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
8.14.1.5 Actuator View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
8.14.1.6 Service Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
8.14.1.7 Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
8.14.1.8 Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
8.14.1.9 Analyzing the data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
8.14.2 Configuration of the HMI Control Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
8.15 HMI Control Service Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
8.15.1 Using the HMI Control Service Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
8.15.1.1 Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
8.15.1.2 Parameter Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
8.15.1.3 Execution States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
8.15.2 Configuration of the HMI Control Service Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
8.15.2.1 Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
8.16 HMI Control Soft Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
8.16.1 Using the HMI Control SoftKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
8.16.2 Configuration of the HMI Control SoftKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
8.17 HMI Control Symbolic Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
8.17.1 Using the HMI Control Symbolic Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
8.17.2 Configuration of the HMI Control Symbolic Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
8.18 HMI Control Toggle Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
8.18.1 Using the HMI Control Toggle Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
8.18.2 Configuration of the HMI Control Toggle Sequences . . . . . . . . . . 373
Contents

8.19 HMI Control Tool Quick Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

8.19.1 Using the HMI Control Tool Quick Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
8.19.1.1 Execution and Configuration of a Tool Quick Test . . . . . . . 380
8.19.1.2 ECUs Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
8.19.1.3 ECU Identification Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
8.19.1.4 Errors and Environment Data Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
8.19.2 Configuration of the HMI Control Tool Quick Test . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
8.19.2.1 Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
8.19.2.2 Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
8.19.2.3 Tool Quick Test Sequence Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
8.20 HMI Control Variant Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
8.20.1 Coding Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
8.20.2 ODX Data Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
8.20.3 Using the HMI Control Variant Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
8.20.3.1 Coding Service Selection Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
8.20.3.2 Coding Sets Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
8.20.3.3 Coding Service Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
8.20.3.4 Execution Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
8.20.4 Configuration of the HMI Control Variant Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
8.20.4.1 Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
8.20.4.2 Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
8.20.4.3 Sequence Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422

9 Reports 423
9.1 Report Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
9.2 Report File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

10 General Monaco Application Settings 428

10.1 Application Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
10.2 Column Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

11 Tracing Options 430

12 Keyboard Support 430

13 Support 431

8
1 Overview
DTS Monaco is part of the Softing Diagnostic Tool Set product family and uses the DTS
Base System with the D-Server.

DTS Monaco is a universal Engineering Tester for diagnostic and control functions of vehicle
ECUs. It is based on ISO standards such as ODX, OTX and UDS.

The name Monaco is derived from Modular analyzer for vehicle communication.

DTS Monaco covers the entire range of vehicle diagnostics in the area of engineering, testing
and preparation of manufacturing tests. It can be customized easily to cover a great variety
of different tasks for different user groups.

• Diagnostics

• Testing ECU communication

• Monitoring and analyzing data on bus

• Testing OBD functionality

• Reading/deleting error memory

• Flash Programming

• Reading and displaying measuring values

• Coding variants

• Parameterizing ECUs

• Executing ECU routines

• Creating/executing test sequences

• OTX

Areas of Application

• Development of diagnostic and control functions for ECU

• Function test and validation

• Integration and system test

• Preparation of test sequences for Manufacturing and After-Sales Service

9
 • Analysis of results and Quality Assurance

Getting Started - Example Project

For getting started with DTS Monaco it provides an Example Project. It allows testing the
features without a valid license. It may be used as a template for creating an own workspace.
The Example Project contains a well featured workspace and a fully documented ODX
database with three ECUs.
To learn more about the Example Project open the DTS help in the Program Group Diag-
nostic Tool Set 8 in the Windows Start Menu. In the help open the chapter Example Project
Tutorial.

Supported User Interface Languages

The Monaco User Interface supports English and German language.

To change the language of the Monaco User Interface open the DTS System Configura-
tor, select the entry Language in the tab System settings and double-click the option GUI
language.

Monaco License

To run Monaco a valid license is required. You may view and manage your license in the
DTS System Configurator.

Monaco can be used with different license levels offering an increasing amount of features.

Supported Database Formats

Monaco supports ODX 2.2.0 databases .

DTS Projects

Monaco requires a DTS project. To create a DTS project from different database types use
the DTS System Configurator. You also may add a database file to an existing project there.

Monaco Framework

DTS Monaco provides a framework that can be configured and modified by the user. Di-
agnostic functionality is realized by using several HMI Controls (Human Machine Interface
Control) that are independent of the application itself. HMI Controls provide specialized in-
terfaces for each user task (e.g. DTC access, coding of an ECU variant, flashing, reading
measurement values, etc.).

The Monaco HMI Controls build an application library. For more information on individual
HMI Controls, please see chapter The Monaco HMI Controls.

An overview of this structure is given in the figure below.

10
Monaco Operation Modes

Monaco provides two operation modes:

• Configuration Mode

In Configuration Mode the layout and the HMI Controls for the User Interface can be
arranged and configured freely. This is done by the Interface Designer, a person that
owns a special license and has the skills to configure the Monaco Toolbox elements.
The Monaco workspace created by the Interface Designer is used by other people, the
Operators, to execute their tasks. Operators only work in Execution Mode.
To operate Monaco in Configuration Mode a Monaco Interface Designer (MIND) li-
cense option is required.
• Execution Mode

When Monaco is in Execution Mode, the user interface cannot be changed. Monaco
only allows working with the HMI Controls the Interface Designer has applied to the
workspace currently loaded.
In some cases the Interface Designer may have placed a Configure button in an HMI
Control giving access to some configuration elements during Execution Mode.

Only the owner of the Monaco Interface Designer License is allowed to freely switch between
Configuration Mode and Execution Mode.
When Configuration Mode is active, Execution Mode is disabled and vice versa. This helps
to keep data consistent and is in general a convenient way of creating working configurations
and preventing operators from changing a working configuration.

11
1.1. License Options

1.1 License Options

Monaco offers three license levels:

Monaco Base License

This is the license for the engineering tester DTS 8 Monaco for testing of diagnostic commu-
nication, data and sequences.

The Monaco Base license is limited to execute ready-to-use Workspaces.

It is not supported to modify, configure or save Workspaces, Layouts and HMI Controls. The
Configure button, allowing to modify configuration settings of an HMI Control in Execution
Mode is always hidden.

As a result a user with a Monaco Base license is not able to damage a Monaco Workspace
file.

At least one optional license DTS8L+MON-MIND is recommended per user group to allow
maintaining and modifying Workspaces.

License shown in the System Configurator: DTS8L+MONACO

The diagnostic functionality is limited to the controls of the library Communication. An addi-
tional HMI-LIBS license is required to execute the full scope of Monaco HMI Controls.

Monaco Configurator License Extension

The Monaco Configurator license extension DTS8L-MON-CONF allows the configuration of

HMI Controls in Execution Mode. The license allows changing into Configuration Mode, but
the user is not allowed to add or arrange Layouts and HMI Controls. The import and export
of Layouts and HMI Controls is supported, but the imported Layouts cannot be converted in
permanent Layouts. All modifications can be saved in the Monaco Workspace file.

License shown in the System Configurator: DTS8L+MONACO, DTS8L-MON-CONF.

An additional HMI-LIBS license is required to execute and configure the full scope of Monaco
HMI Controls.

Monaco Interface Designer License Extension

This license extends the Monaco Base License with the features Creation and Configuration
of workspaces in DTS 8 Monaco.

The Monaco Interface Designer license additionally offers the following features:

• Creating, deleting or renaming Layouts in workspaces.

• Creating workspace templates

12
 • Unrestricted configuration of layouts and controls as well as the possibility to save
workspaces (DTS8L-MON-CONF)
• HMI Controls in Layouts can be inserted, moved or deleted.
• Imported Layouts can be converted to permanent Layouts.
• Creating workspace templates

License shown in the System Configurator: DTS8L+MONACO, DTS8L+MON-MIND.

An additional HMI-LIBS license is required to manage the full scope of Monaco HMI Controls.

Monaco HMI Control Library Extension (DTS8L-HMI-LIBS)

This license extension covers all other diagnostic functions of DTS 8 Monaco, which are not
included in the basic scope of functionality.

2 Starting Monaco
To start DTS Monaco open the Windows Start Menu, go to All Programs and open the
program group Diagnostic Tool Set 8. Select the shortcut DTS Monaco.
Immediately after start a warning will pop up that the software may influence and control
electronic systems in a way that may lead to physical injury or damage.

Select Yes, I am to go on or No if you do not agree. If you do not agree DTS Monaco will be
closed.

The DTS Monaco Start Page will appear.

13
 To display correctly, the Start Page requires Internet Explorer version 11 to be
installed on the system.

On the Start Page the following options are available:

• Edit (Configuration Mode)

– Create a new workspace

This option creates a completely new Monaco workspace.

Monaco will open in Configuration Mode allowing adding new Layouts and HMI
Controls.
– Open a workspace

This option opens an existing Monaco workspace in Configuration Mode.

Select an existing workspace from the All workspaces tab or one of the recently
used workspaces in the Recent workspaces tab. The tab Templates offers prede-
fined workspaces that may be customized to your needs when you have a license
to use Monaco in Configuration Mode.
– Recently used workspaces

This option offers a selection of recently used Workspaces and starts Monaco in
Configuration Mode.
Hold down the <Shift> key to open the the most recently used workspace imme-
diately.

• Start (Execution mode)

14
– Open a workspace

This option opens an existing Monaco workspace in Execution Mode.

Select an existing workspace from the All workspaces tab or one of the recently
used workspaces in the Recent workspaces tab.

To start a Monaco workspace from the command line, enter

”...\Softing\Diagnostic Tool Set 8\8.02\bin\Monaco.exe”
”...\ProgramData\Softing\Diagnostic Tool
Set\DTSProjects\<YourProjectName>\hmi\<WorkspaceName>.mnc”

– Recently used workspaces

This option offers a selection of recently used Workspaces and starts Monaco in
Execution Mode.
Hold down the <Shift> key to open the the most recently used workspace imme-
diately.
– Temporary workspace

This option starts Monaco in Execution Mode using a Temporary Workspace.

A Temporary Workspace will be created from database files and a workspace
template. The Temporary Workspace cannot be saved and will be deleted when
the workspace or Monaco is closed.

15
 When a workspace is opened by Monaco either in Execution or Configura-
tion mode, Monaco has to access the diagnostic interface hardware.
When the diagnostic interface is not available, Monaco offers to temporar-
ily switch to the Simulated Interface instead. This allows opening the
workspace and do some modifications without having an interface hard-
ware at the moment. Of cause only a simulated communication with the
simulated ECUs defined in the simulation file is supported in this case.

Click Yes to load the project with the Simulated Interface.

If you do not want to open the project with a Simulated Interface, click
No. The loading of the project will abort with an error message that the
connection to the hardware resource failed.

When you close the project, the former interface configuration will be re-
stored.

• Administrate and manage DTS projects

Selecting this option opens the System Configurator.

• Enter demonstration mode and open the example workspace

This option opens Monaco in Demonstration Mode. The Example Project is loaded.
Saving changes to the demonstration workspace file is not supported.

In Demonstration Mode the Interface is automatically switched to Simulation. The hard-

ware interfaces set in the System Configurator are disabled while Demonstration Mode
is active. No physical bus communication is supported.

When Demonstration Mode is left, the original hardware interface configuration is re-

16
 stored. To leave Demonstration Mode close the workspace or Monaco.

If you want to test Monaco with the Example Project and real bus commu-
nication, a license is required. Please ask the Softing Sales department
for a time-limited evaluation license.

You have to import the Example Project from

C:\Program Files\Softing\Diagnostic Tool Set
8\<Version>\Examples\DTSProjects\Example Project using the Project
Wizard of the System Configurator. Import the Example Project as DTS 8
Project.

3 The Monaco Menu and Tool Bar

The menu bar provides access to all the features of DTS8 Monaco.
It contains the following sub menus:

• File Menu

• Edit Menu

• View Menu

• Execution Menu

• Configuration Menu

• Tools Menu

• Customizable Menu (not visible by default)

• Help Menu

The DTS8 Monaco toolbar allows quick access to common features (open, save, etc.).
The elements of the toolbar change when Monaco is in Configuration Mode or Execution
Mode:

The Monaco Toolbar in Execution Mode

The Monaco Toolbar in Configuration Mode

The Clamp Status bar shows the battery and ignition status.

17
3.1. File Menu

3.1 File Menu

The following table provides an overview of the File menu.

Item [Shortcut] Remarks

New... [CTRL+N] Creates a new workspace. For more information
about a Monaco Workspace see chapter Creat-
ing a new workspace.
This item is only available in Configuration
Mode. An Interface Designer License is re-
quired.
Open (edit)... Opens an existing workspace in Configuration
Mode. See chapter Opening a Workspace
This item is only available when Monaco has no
workspace loaded and the Start Page is visible.
Open (start)... [CTRL+O] Opens an existing workspace from the current
DTS project or from another DTS project. See
chapter Opening a Workspace
Temporary (start)... Creates a Temporary Workspace. See chapter
Temporary Workspace for details.
This item is only available when Monaco has no
workspace loaded and the Start Page is visible.
Close Closes the current workspace and returns to the
Monaco Start Page.
When the current workspace has been modified,
the user is asked to save the workspace before
closing.
Switch workspace... Opens an existing Workspace which belongs to
the currently selected DTS project.
This option reduces switching time between dif-
ferent Monaco Workspaces in a DTS project as
the database has not to be reloaded.
Export -> Layout(s)... Allows exporting Layouts and their HMI Con-
Export -> HMI Control... trols respectively an individual HMI Control to a
file and importing this configuration to another
workspace.
This item is only available in Configuration
Mode. An Interface Designer License is re-
quired.

18
3.1. File Menu

Import -> Layout(s)... Allows importing Layouts and their HMI Controls
Import -> HMI Control... or an individual HMI Control or only its settings
Import -> HMI Control Settings... from a file.
This item is available in Configuration Mode and
Execution Mode when the Execution is stopped.
Save [CTRL+S] Saves the current Workspace.
Save As... Saves the current Workspace to a new
Workspace file within the current DTS project.
The Save workspace as dialog window will
open, allowing the user to enter a file name for
the new workspace configuration file.

Click New... to create a new subfolder.

Click Open to open the selected subfolder
Click OK to save the new configuration
Click Cancel to close the dialog without saving
the workspace to a new file.

If you right-click in the configuration box a con-

text menu pops up:
New: creates a subfolder
Delete: deletes a subfolder
Rename: renames an existing subfolder

19
3.2. Edit Menu

Save as template ... Saves the current workspace configuration to a

new or existing Monaco Workspace Template.
For more information about Templates see chap-
ter Creating a Workspace Template.
This item is only available in Configuration
Mode. An Interface Designer License is re-
quired.
Recent Files Opens a Workspace from the list of recently
used workspaces.
Project administration Opens the System Configurator.
This option opens Monaco in Demonstration
Mode. The Example Project is loaded.
Demonstration mode Opens Monaco in Demonstration Mode. The Ex-
ample Project is loaded.
This item is only available when Monaco has no
workspace loaded and the Start Page is visible.
Exit [Alt+F4]) Closes DTS Monaco.

3.2 Edit Menu

The following table provides an overview of the Edit menu.
It is used to duplicate, move and delete Layouts and HMI Controls in Configuration Mode.

Item [Shortcut] Remarks

Cut [CTRL+X] The selected HMI Control is removed from the
layout and copied to the Monaco clipboard.
The content of the clipboard may be inserted in
another layout using the Paste command.
This item is only available in Configuration
Mode. An Interface Designer License is re-
quired.

20
3.3. View Menu

Copy [CTRL+C] The selected HMI Control is copied to the

Monaco clipboard. It is not removed from the
layout.
The content of the clipboard may be inserted in
another layout using the Paste command.
This item is only available in Configuration
Mode. An Interface Designer License is re-
quired.
Paste [CTRL+V] The content of the Monaco clipboard is inserted
in the currently selected layout.
This item is only available in Configuration
Mode. An Interface Designer License is re-
quired.
Delete [CTRL+Del] The selected Layout or a selected HMI Control
is removed from the user interface.
This item is only available in Configuration
Mode. An Interface Designer License is re-
quired.

3.3 View Menu

The following table provides an overview of the View menu.

Item [Shortcut] Remarks

Constant layout [Crtl+1] If selected, the Windows input focus will be set
on the Constant Layout area.
If the Constant Layout is not visible it will be
brought to front.
Status message area [Crtl+2] If selected, the Windows input focus will be set
on the Status Message area.
Layout area [Crtl+3] If selected, the Windows input focus will be set
on the Layout area.
The first Layout is selected. To switch to another
Layout use the (left and right) arrow keys of your
keyboard.

21
3.3. View Menu

Configuration bar [Crtl+4] If selected, the Windows input focus will be set
on the Configuration Bar.
If the Configuration Bar is not visible it will be
brought to front.
This item is only available in Configuration
Mode. An Interface Designer License is re-
quired.
Property sheet [Crtl+5] If selected, the Windows input focus will be set
on the Property Sheet.
If the Property Sheet is not visible it will be
brought to front.
This item is only available in Configuration
Mode.
Retrieve external windows Collects all Monaco windows (as Constant Bar,
Service Tree, Configuration Area) that were ar-
ranged outside of the main application window
and places them back in the main window.
This might be useful when these windows were
placed on a second screen that is now unavail-
able.
Show tool bar If checked, the Monaco Toolbar will be dis-
played.
The status is shown by a check mark in front of
the item.
For more information see chapter Tool Bar.
Show status bar If checked, the Monaco Status Bar will be dis-
played.
The status is shown by a check mark in front of
the item.
For more information see chapter Status Bar.
Show status message area If checked, the Monaco Status Message Area
will be displayed.
The status is shown by a check mark in front of
the item.
For more information see chapter Status Mes-
sage Area.

22
3.4. Execution Menu

Show clamp status If checked, the Monaco Clamp Status bar will be
displayed.
The status is shown by a check mark in front of
the item.
For more information see chapter Clamp Status
bar.
Show configuration bar If checked, the Monaco Configuration Bar will be
displayed.
The status is shown by a check mark in front of
the item.
For more information see chapter Configuration
Bar.
This item is only available in Configuration
Mode. An Interface Designer License is re-
quired.
Show property sheet If checked, the Monaco Property Sheet will be
displayed.
The status is shown by a check mark in front
of the item. For more information see chapter
Property Sheet.
This item is only available in Configuration
Mode. An Interface Designer License is re-
quired.
Clear output windows If selected, the content of all output windows will
be cleared.

3.4 Execution Menu

The following table provides an overview of the Execution menu.

Item [Shortcut] Remarks

Configuration Mode [CTRL+F4]) Switches Monaco to Configuration Mode.
An Interface Designer License is required.
Show constant layout Displays the Constant Layout area
The status is shown by a check mark in front of
the item. For more information about the Con-
stant Layout see chapter Elements of the User
Interface.

23
3.4. Execution Menu

Show service tree Displays the Service Tree.

The status is shown by a check mark in front of
the item.
More information about the Service Tree you will
find in the chapter Service Tree.
Start [F5] Start activates all HMI Controls in the selected
workspace of the DTS project.
If the configuration is already started this item is
disabled. Depending on the Workspace Options
either all HMI Controls of all Layouts are started
or only the HMI Controls of the visible (selected)
Layout are started.
Monaco can be configured to start automatically
after loading a workspace.
The HMI Controls of the Constant Layout will al-
ways be started regardless of the configuration
options. The Constant Layout is always the first
Layout to be started. After that the Layouts of
the Layout area are started using the Layout se-
quence order. Within a Layout, the HMI Controls
are activated in the order defined by the HMI
Control sequence order. (For more details see
chapter Starting and Stopping the Execution).
Stop [Shift+F5] Stop stops the execution of all running HMI Con-
trols.
Before stopping the HMI Controls, the Monaco
Framework checks whether all started HMI Con-
trols are ready to terminate their actions. If one
or more HMI Controls are not ready, no HMI
Control is stopped, an error message is dis-
played and the configuration remains active.
If the execution is not started, this item is dis-
abled. (For more details see chapter Starting
and Stopping the Execution).
Reset [CTRL+Shift+F5] If Reset is selected, a Reset of the Communica-
tion and the HMI Controls is performed. This will
be necessary when the connection to the inter-
face was lost.
Save report for selected control see chapter Reports
[Shift+F8]
Save report [F8] see chapter Reports

24
3.4. Execution Menu

Start Instruments) Start Instruments triggers the execution of all

HMI Controls of type Instrument. (see chapter
Starting and Stopping the Instruments for de-
tails).

For more information about the HMI Control

Graphical Instrument see chapter HMI Control
Graphical Instrument.
Stop Instruments If Stop Instruments is selected, the execution of
all HMI Controls of type Instrument stops (see
chapter Starting and Stopping the Instruments
for details).

For more information about the HMI Control

Graphical Instrument see chapter HMI Control
Graphical Instrument.
Ethernet activation If Ethernet Activation is selected, the Eth-
ernet activation pin of all activated D-PDU
API interface (configured in the System
Configurator) that supports the IO control
PDU IOCTL SET ETH SWITCH STATE is set
to 6 volt.
After selecting Ethernet Activation again, the pin
will be switched off, i.e. set to 0 Volt.

25
3.5. Configuration Menu

Execute broadcast If Execute broadcast is selected, Monaco tries

to set up the DoIP channel. A broadcast request
is sent on the Ethernet port.
If a DoIP ECU is detected every HMI Control
will be updated and will show the new Logical
Links detected. The status pane at the status
bar shows DoIP ECU available, and changes
the color to green. In case there is no answer
to the broadcast request, the status bar shows
No DoIP-ECU available. For further information
about the Status Bar please have a look at chap-
ter The User Interface in Execution Mode.

If there is no activated D-PDU API interface

(configured in the System Configurator) avail-
able supporting the broadcast a warning window
will pop up informing that the Broadcast might
not be supported by the currently activated in-
terfaces.

3.5 Configuration Menu

The following table provides an overview of the Configuration menu.

Item [Shortcut] Remarks

Execution Mode [CTRL+F4] Switches Monaco to Execution Mode
Show constant layout If checked, the Constant Layout will be dis-
played.
The status is shown by a check mark in front of
the item.
For more information see chapter The User In-
terface In Configuration Mode.
Show service tree Displays the Service Tree.
The status is shown by a check mark in front of
the item.
More information about the Service Tree you will
find in the chapter Service Tree.

26
3.5. Configuration Menu

Add layout... Adds a new layout to the workspace.

For more information see chapter Setting Up
Layouts.
Sequence order: The sequence order of the Monaco Layouts de-
Move Up [CTRL+Up] fines the order in which the Layouts are shown
Move Down [CTRL+Down] in the tab control of the Layout area.
The sequence order for HMI Controls defines
the order in which the HMI Controls are acti-
vated.

The place of a selected Layout or HMI Control

in the sequence can be changed using the Se-
quence Order item and its subitems Move up
and Move down.
This option is disabled if neither a Layout nor an
HMI Control is currently selected.
The current Sequence Order is displayed in the
Configuration Bar.
Configure layout properties... Displays the Layout properties dialog of the cur-
rent Layout.

In the field Title the name of the Layout can be

edited.

27
3.5. Configuration Menu

Add HMI Control... Adds an HMI Control to the current Layout.

The Add HMI Control dialog will open. Select an
HMI Control from the list.
Press OK to insert the HMI Control.

The selected HMI Control is inserted at the end

of the HMI Control sequence of the currently se-
lected Layout.
The size, position, name and other properties of
the HMI Control can be changed later using the
HMI Control Properties dialog. This dialog can
be accessed using the Configure HMI Control
item of the Configuration menu. See also chap-
ter Property Sheet and Arranging HMI Controls.

28
3.5. Configuration Menu

Configure HMI Control... Displays the HMI Control Properties dialog of

the selected HMI Control.

For more information see chapter Property

Sheet.
Configure HMI Control execution mode Opens the Configurator of the selected HMI
behavior... Control.

29
3.5. Configuration Menu

Configure workspace... Displays the Workspace Options dialog.

Tab Start Options

The tab Start Options defines how Monaco

starts the Layouts with their HMI Controls and
the Graphical Instruments of a workspace in Ex-
ecution Mode, see chapter Starting and Stop-
ping the Execution and Starting and Stopping
the Instruments for details.

Tab Layout

The tab Layout defines how the Layouts are

selected in the user interface.

There are two options available

Show Tabs: The Layouts are shown as tabs
and the title of each Layout is shown as the tab
header.
Show Menu: Only the selected (active) Layout
will be shown in the Layout Area. Each Layout
has an entry in the Menu Bar that is labeled with
the title of the appropriate Layout.
If only one Layout exists in the
Monaco configuration and option
Show Menu is set, the single Layout
is not listed in the Menu Bar.

30
3.6. Tools Menu

Configure common properties... Displays the Common Properties Configura-

tor dialog which allows modifying the common
properties of all HMI Control instances of a
Workspace. For more information see chapter
Setting Common HMI Control Properties
Configure data server... Displays the Data Server Configurator dialog.
The Data Server provides request and response
data for the HMI Controls from type Instrument.
For more details about the data server and its
configuration please refer to chapter Configura-
tion of the Data Server.

3.6 Tools Menu

The following table provides an overview of the Tools menu.

Item [Shortcut] Remarks

Configure column handling... Opens a dialog to configure the Column Han-
dling in Execution Mode.

The setting defines the presentation of columns

in all HMI Controls that are using lists (except the
Bus Trace and Symbolic Trace HMI Controls).
See chapter ColumnHandling for details.

Configure ECU sequence order... Opens the ECU Sequence Order Configurator.
This Configurator is able to determine the order
of the ECUs in which they are handled in se-
quences. This order is used by HMI Controls
that have a Sequence Editor, e.g. Complete Ve-
hicle Coding. See Setting the ECU Sequence
Order.

This item is only available in Configuration

Mode.

31
3.6. Tools Menu

Configure protocol parameter glob- This option enables the user to set the Proto-
ally... col Parameter globally for each protocol which is
part of the project.
It is only available when the Execution Mode is
in state stopped.
For more information see Global Protocol Pa-
rameter Settings.
Traces When you select Open with Analytics... the
Analytics application is launched. Analytics is
a tool to display and analyze DTS trace files.
Please wait until the file dialog opens, showing
the trace folder of the current DTS Project. Se-
lect a trace file and click Open to view it in An-
alytics. Analytics supports Bytes and Timings
traces (*.trc) and Process Values Traces (*xpvt).

In case Open with Windows Explorer... is se-

lected the trace folder of the current DTS project
is opened in Windows Explorer. This folder con-
tains the recorded trace files.
Database Differ Starts the DTS Database Differ, a tool to com-
pare two Venice databases.
OTX Studio Starts the OTX Editor, a tool to develop OTX
scripts.

Check workspace Execute a consistency check of the currently

loaded Monaco workspace.
The consistency check is only available in Ex-
ecution Mode when execution is stopped or in
Configuration Mode.
Open last consistency check result Shows a dialog with the results of the last con-
sistency check.
The results of the last Workspace consis-
tency check have been saved to the Monaco
workspace, so a consistency check has not
necessarily to be executed in the current ses-
sion. The results are also available in Execution
Mode.
Options... Opens the Options dialog that provides settings
for the Monaco application chapter (see Applica-
tion Options).

32
3.8. Customizable Menu

3.7 Help Menu

The following table provides an overview of the Help menu.

Item Remarks
[Short-
cut]
DTS Opens the DTS Monaco integrated help system.
Monaco
help
[F1]
Tutorial Opens the DTS Monaco Tutorial chapter in the Example Project de-
scription.
Support Provides information required by Softing support.
Please copy and paste the content of this dialog to your problem de-
scription, when you contact Softing Support by email.
About Opens the About dialog containing information about DTS Monaco,
DTS such as details of the version and supplier.
Monaco

3.8 Customizable Menu

This Menu is a customizable menu entry in the Monaco menu bar.
It is available in Execution and Configuration Mode as well as in the Monaco Start Page.
It is not visible by default.
When it is configured it is located immediately before the Help menu in the Monaco toolbar.
It can be used to launch user-defined applications.

The name and the structure of the custom menu are defined in a configuration file,
which is located in the folder \ProgramData\Softing\Diagnostic Tool Set\<DTS Minor
Version>\<Standard>.
The configuration file has to have the name Monaco.mnu.

This is an example file from the above displayed menu:

[Menu]
Menuname=MyMenu
NoOfMenuItems=5
001=Editor:::$SYSTEM_DIR$\notepad.exe:::$TEMP_PATH$\test.txt
002=Separator
003=IExplorer:::C:\Program Files\Internet Explorer\iexplore.exe:::http://www.softing.com
004=Separator

33
3.8. Customizable Menu

005=Calculator:::C:\WINDOWS\System32\calc.exe

The file is has the format of an INI file with one section named [Menu].
This Section must contain an entry called Menuname, which defines the name of the custom
menu in the Monaco menu bar.

The entry NoOfMenuItems must define the number of submenu entries. The maximum
number of submenu entries is limited to 100.

The following lines define the menu items and must always start with a serially numbered 3
digit number.
The line has the following format:
Number of the Menu entry=Name of the menu item:::command:::argument
Every section is separated with ::: .

A menu item name and the corresponding command are required. The argument is option-
ally.

There may be a entry called Separator. This entry will create a menu separator in the
sequence of menu items at the defined count.

The example above will result in a menu entry like in the following image:

The customizable menu supports placeholders for arguments and commands, which are
dynamically replaced during runtime of the application.

34
3.9. The Monaco Toolbar in Execution Mode

The predefined values are always start and end with a ”$” character.

Placeholder Remarks
$MONACO PATH$ Replaced by the path where the current running
monaco.exe is located
$PROJECT PATH$ Replaced by the DTS Project Path
$TRACE FILE NAME$ Replaced by the currently set trace file name
$PROJECT NAME$ Replaced by the Short Name of the current used DTS
Project
$COMPUTER NAME$ Replaced by the system computer name
$USER NAME$ Replaced by the system user name
$SYSTEM DIR$ Replaced by the system directory (e.g.
C:\Windows\System32)
$WINDOWS DIR$ Replaced by the Windows directory
$TEMP PATH$ Replaced by the system TEMP directory

3.9 The Monaco Toolbar in Execution Mode

The toolbar in Execution Mode provides the following buttons.

Sym- Action Remarks

bol

New FileMenu - New

Open project FileMenu - Open

Close DTS Project File Menu - Close

Open workspace File Menu - Open workspace

Save File Menu - Save

35
3.9. The Monaco Toolbar in Execution Mode

Cut Edit Menu - Cut

Copy Edit Menu - Copy

Paste Edit Menu - Paste

Delete Edit Menu - Delete

Toggle Constant Layout View Menu - Constant Layout

Toggle Status Message Area View Menu - Status Message Area

Toggle Service Tree View Menu - Service Tree

Switch to Configuration Mode Configuration Menu - Configura-

tion Mode

Start Execution Execution Menu - Start

Stop Execution Execution Menu - Stop

Start Instruments Execution Menu - Start Instru-

ments

Stop Instruments Execution Menu - Stop Instru-

ments

Reset Communication and HMI Execution Menu - Reset Commu-

Controls nication and HMI Controls

Clear All View Menu - Clear All

36
3.10. The Monaco Toolbar in Configuration Mode

Ethernet Activation Execution Menu - Ethernet Activa-

tion

Execute Broadcast Execution Menu - Execute broad-

cast

OTX-Editor Tools Menu - OTX Editor

Report Save Report

Workspace Consistency Workspace Consistency

Help Help Menu

Clamp Status Bar showing the bat- See the chapter Clamp Status Bar
tery voltage and ignition state. for details.

3.10 The Monaco Toolbar in Configuration Mode

The toolbar in Configuration Mode provides the following buttons.

Sym- Action Remarks

bol

New FileMenu - New

Open project FileMenu - Open

Close DTS Project File Menu - Close

Open workspace File Menu - Open workspace

37
3.10. The Monaco Toolbar in Configuration Mode

Save File Menu - Save

Cut Edit Menu - Cut

Copy Edit Menu - Copy

Paste Edit Menu - Paste

Delete Edit Menu - Delete

Toggle Constant Layout View Menu - Constant Layout

If there are consistency errors in
the Constant Layout, the button
will get an overlay icon with an ex-
clamation mark in a red frame.

Toggle Status Message Area View Menu - Status Message Area

Toggle Service Tree View Menu - Service Tree

Switch to Execution Mode Execution Menu - Execution Mode

Activate Configuration Bar View Menu - Toggle Configuration

Bar

Activate Property Sheet View Menu - Toggle Property

Sheet

Common HMI Control Properties Configuration Menu - Common

Properties

Configure Data Server Configure data server

38
3.11. Clamp Status Bar

Clear All View Menu - Clear All

OTX-Editor Tools Menu - OTX Editor

Workspace Consistency Tools Menu - Check workspace

Help Help Menu

Clamp Status Bar showing the bat- See the chapter Clamp Status Bar
tery voltage and ignition state. for details.

3.11 Clamp Status Bar

The Clamp Status Bar displays the vehicle battery voltage and ignition state.

It is a separate toolbar that can be moved on the Monaco toolbar or dragged to an individual
small window.

The Clamp Status bar is visible by default.

To enable or disable it, use the menu item Show clamp status from the View Menu.

Some interfaces do not provide any battery voltage or ignition state. This will be indicated
like this:

Other interfaces do not provide an analogue value for the vehicle voltage but only indicate
if there is any vehicle voltage above a threshold value. In this case the indicator will show
exactly 12.00 V regardless of the real voltage value.

The Clamp Status Bar contains the following elements:

Sym- Action Remarks

bol

39
 Vehicle power voltage Shows the vehicle power voltage,
provided by the VCI (Vehicle Diag-
nosis Interface)

Ignition state of the vehicle - Igni- Indicates that the vehicle ignition is
tion On on. The state is provided by the
VCI (Vehicle Diagnosis Interface)

Ignition state of the vehicle - Igni- Indicates that the vehicle ignition is
tion Off off. The state is provided by the
VCI (Vehicle Diagnosis Interface)

Ignition state not available Indicates that no vehicle ignition

state is available. The state is pro-
vided by the VCI (Vehicle Diagno-
sis Interface)

Note: If more than one interface is connected, the first that is able to provide a battery
status will be used.

4 Working in Execution Mode

Execution Mode is used to work with the Layout and the HMI Controls of an existing
workspace.
The workspace file contains a Monaco configuration designed by a user that owns a Monaco
Interface Designer license.

User Interface

See chapter The User Interface In Execution Mode to get an overview of the Monaco user
interface in Execution Mode.

Loading an Existing Workspace

In order to execute the HMI Controls of a workspace configuration the workspace file has to
be loaded.
To load an existing workspace you have the following options:

• Select Open from the File menu

• Select Open a workspace from the Start Page

40
 • Select Switch workspace from the File menu to load a workspace file that is part of the
same DTS project

(For more details see chapter Opening a Workspace).

Start and Stop the Execution after Loading.

In Execution Mode the execution of the HMI Controls can be started or stopped.
When the execution is started, the HMI Controls of the loaded workspace are activated
(executed).
When the execution is stopped, the HMI Controls are deactivated.
(For more details see chapter Starting and Stopping the Execution).

Start and Stop the Instruments

If the Monaco configuration contains HMI Controls from type Graphical Instrument these
HMI Controls may be started separately.
For more details see chapter Starting and Stopping the Instruments.

Creating Reports

Reports are used to store and report the current state of one or a couple of HMI Controls.
For more details see chapter Reports.

Constant Layout

Select Show constant layout from the Execution menu to display or hide the Constant Layout.

Service Tree

Some HMI Controls require the Service Tree Control to allow services and ComPrimitives
been dragged and dropped while a Monaco workspace configuration is started.

Switching to Configuration Mode

Press CTRL+F4 or select Configuration mode from the Execution menu to switch to Config-
uration Mode.
In Configuration Mode you can configure all HMI Controls and the workspace configuration.
Note: You need a Monaco Interface Designer License to work in Configuration Mode

Global Protocol Parameter Configuration

Protocol Parameter Settings can be set globally for each protocol that is used in the current
project. See Global Protocol Parameter Settings.

41
4.1. The User Interface in Execution Mode

4.1 The User Interface in Execution Mode

The Figure below shows the user interface of the Monaco Framework in Execution Mode.

The window title displays the currently selected DTS edition in square brackets ([Standard]
or an OEM specific edition) followed by the currently loaded workspace and the DTS project
name in square brackets. For more about DTS editions see the Base System help, chapter
General, Switching the DTS Edition.

The user interface of DTS Monaco in Execution Mode contains the following elements:

• Menu Bar
Menu of DTS Monaco. Some items may be disabled because they are not supported in
Configuration Mode or Execution Mode or an HMI Control or Layout has to be selected
first.

• Toolbar
Provides icons for main features (open, save, etc.). The available buttons depend on
whether Configuration Mode or Execution Mode is activated (see chapter The Monaco
Toolbar in Execution Mode).

• Clamp Status Bar

The Clamp Status Bar shows the battery voltage and ignition state. Please see the
chapter Clamp Status Bar for details.

42
4.1. The User Interface in Execution Mode

• Constant Layout
The Constant Layout Area is a layout that is displayed when the button Toggle Constant
Bar from the Toolbar is pressed or the Menu item Show constant layout from the
Execution menu is selected.

When the Constant Layout is active it will be always visible. For this the Layout Area
is reduced. The size of the Constant Layout may be reduced or enlarged using the
separation bar between Constant Layout and Layout Area.

The Constant Layout area can only contain a single layout.

It may be undocked from the framework and moved to another position while Monaco
Execution Mode is running.

• Layout Area
Provides one or more layouts that contain the HMI Controls.
The layouts can be switched by clicking on the appropriate tab at the top of the Layout
Area.

• Status Bar
The status bar displays some status information of Monaco, e.g. if Configuration Mode
or Execution Mode is activated or if a DoIP ECU is available and if NUM lock key or
CAPS lock key is activated.

• Status Message Area

The Status Message Area shows error and status messages of Monaco and the DTS-
COS (MVCI Communication Server).
It will be displayed when Show status message area from the View menu is checked.
Take a look at chapter Status Message Area for more detailed information.

4.1.1 Service Tree

The Service Tree is part of the standard delivery of the Monaco Toolbox. It works similar to
a Monaco HMI Control.

It displays a tree of the diagnostic data (Services or OTX Scripts). In Execution Mode tree
items can be dragged and dropped into the following Monaco HMI controls:

• Data Display

• IO Control

43
4.1. The User Interface in Execution Mode

• Recorder

To open the Service Tree window select the menu item Service Tree in the Monaco View
menu or click on the corresponding button in the Monaco Toolbar.

The Service Tree offers the following items:

• Base Variants (Logical Links)

• Variants of a Base Variant.

• MCD 3D Data Primitives of a Base Variant or a Variant

• MCD 3D Control Primitives of a Protocol, a Functional Group, a Base Variant or a

Variant

• Hex Services of a Base Variant or a Variant

• Protocol Parameter Sets of a Base Variant or a Variant

• Display of MCD 3D Data Primitives in a Functional Class view.

4.1.1.1 User Interface

The pre-configured Service Tree Control is shown in the image below.

44
4.1. The User Interface in Execution Mode

The largest part of the Service Tree window is reserved for the tree of diagnostic services.
All items in the tree are sorted by name. The tree items can either display their long name
or their short name. This option may be set in the Configurator.

The root nodes of the tree can be a Base Variant of an ECU, a Functional Group or a
Protocol.

Each root node has the following structure:

• Services (All MCD Data Primitives)

In the Configurator the presentation of the Services can either be set to a Functional
Class view or to an alphanumeric ascending order. Another parameter, Show Service
Identifier, in the Configurator shows the service with a leading service identifier.

45
4.1. The User Interface in Execution Mode

• Hex and Raw Services (All user defined Hex Services)

• Protocol Parameter Sets (All user defined Protocol Parameter Sets)

• ComPrimitives (All MCD Control Primitives)

Nodes of Base Variants additionally contain all their Variants.

Searching the Service Tree

The Service Tree HMI Control features a Search option. To start a search choose a node you
want to search through. Click in the search field with the default text <Enter search pattern>
located above the service tree and enter a string you want to search for. A box will open with
all items that matched the search string. When you select an item, the box is closed and the
item is marked in the Service Tree.

When you enable the checkbox Global Search the whole database will be searched. In case
of a large database the search may take several minutes.

Entering Configuration Mode

On the right there may be a button named Configure. This button allows entering the Con-
figurator of the Service Tree during runtime. The visibility of this button has to be set in the
Configurator in tab Common Settings.

4.1.1.2 Configurator
The Configurator Settings control the behavior of the Service Tree in Execution Mode.

The figure below shows the dialog window Service Tree - Configurator.

46
4.1. The User Interface in Execution Mode

The Configurator features the following tabs:

• Common Settings
• Filters

The following buttons are available:

• OK: Saves the current configuration and closes the Configurator

• Cancel: Aborts all changes and closes the Configurator
• Help: Opens the appropriate chapter in the help file of Monaco

4.1.1.3 Common Settings

The following table gives an overview of all properties and their values in the tab Common
Settings. Default values are represented in bold letters.

47
4.1. The User Interface in Execution Mode

PROPERTY VALUES DESCRIPTION

General/Caption Service Tree/ Name of the Control that will be displayed in
any character string its surrounding frame.
General/Show Frame true/false Displays the control with or without frame and
caption
General/Show Long- true/false Displays the LongNames or ShortNames of
Names the tree items
General/Show Ser- true/false Shows the Service Identifier in front of the
vice Identifier service name
General/Show Func- true/false Displays the Functional Classes
tional Classes
General/ true/false Displays the Variants of a Base Variant
Show LogicalLinks on
Variants
General/Show Proto- true/false Displays the Protocol Locations
cols
General/Show Func- true/false Displays the Functional Group
tional Group
Configure But- true/false Enables or disables the Configure Button in
ton/Visible the Service Tree

4.1.1.4 Filters
The Filters tab controls which Logical Links will be displayed in the Logical Link list of the
Service Tree.
It has the following layout:

48
4.1. The User Interface in Execution Mode

The Filters tab lists all Logical Links of the DTS project.

The following table gives an overview of all properties and their values of the tab Filters.
Default values are represented in bold letters.

PROPERTY VALUES DESCRIPTION

LogicalLink filter off/on on: enables Logical Link filtering,
off: every Logical Link in the DTS project is
available in the Logical Link list of the Service
Tree
LogicalLink filter/Link pass/reject pass: this Logical Link is available in Logical
Name Link list of the Service Tree;
reject: this Logical Link will not be displayed
FunctionalClasses fil- off/on on: enables Functional Class filtering,
ter off: every Functional Class in the DTS project
is available in the Functional Class list of the
Service Tree

49
4.1. The User Interface in Execution Mode

FunctionalClasses pass/reject pass: this Functional Class is available in

filter/Functional Class Functional Class list of the Service Tree;
Name reject: this Functional Class will not be dis-
played

4.1.2 Status Message Area

The Status Message Area shows all global information of system and communication states
(e.g. error messages).

It is visible in Execution Mode as well as in Configuration Mode.

The Status Message Area will be displayed when Show status message area in the View
menu is checked.

Elements of the Status Message Area

(from left to right)

• Output Window
The output window shows error messages and the error history of Monaco and the
DTS-COS (MVCI-Server).
It consists of a combo box which is filled continuously with new entries added at the
lowest position.
The latest entry will always be displayed on top. A time stamp at the beginning of the
message shows exactly the time, the entry was added to the list. The format of the
timestamp is [hh:mm:ss:sss].

• Button Clear
A click on the Clear button hides the displayed line (it does not delete it from the combo
box).
A second click on this button deletes all entries from the combo box.

• Button Copy Messages to Clipboard

A click on the Copy to Clipboard button copies the content of the output window to the
Windows Clipboard.
This may be used for attaching error information to a support request.

50
4.2. Opening a workspace

• Display Window
The display box provides the name of the selected DTS project and the corresponding
selected Vehicle Information Table.
As long as no DTS project and no Vehicle Information Table (VIT) are selected the
corresponding display box remains empty.

4.2 Opening a workspace

Usually a user launches the Monaco Framework to work with an existing configuration (par-
ticularly in the case of a Base License user).

Monaco offers three options to open a workspace in the Open workspace dialog:
To open an existing Monaco Workspace select Open a workspace either from the Start or
the Edit section of the Monaco Start page.

The Open Workspace dialog appears.

On the left, the available DTS Projects are listed in the Projects area.
In order to get the DTS Projects and their workspaces displayed in this dialog, the project
must have been added to DTS. To add a project use Project Wizard of the System Configu-
rator.
Select the project you want to work with from the list.

51
4.2. Opening a workspace

On the right in the Workspaces box all available workspaces for this project are displayed.

When you are opening a workspace that was created or modified by a more up
to date version of DTS Monaco, a warning will pop up notifying you that using
this workspace may not behave as expected.

Opening the workspace is possible, but the workspace configuration may contain
settings and HMI Controls that are not supported by the former Monaco version.
The workspace or part of it might not be executable or may produce errors.

For this reason, saving the workspace is not supported.

Opening a Workspace

To open a workspace select it and press the OK button.

Managing Workspaces

Press the button Manage to manage the workspaces of a project:

Import
Add a workspace from another project to the selected project. Select an MNC file and click
Open.

Delete
Remove the selected workspace or folder (including its content) from the project.

Rename
Rename the selected workspace.

Save As...
Create a copy of the selected workspace using another name. You will be prompted to enter
a new name.

Create folder
Creates a new folder in the Workspaces folder of the current project. If a folder is selected,
a sub folder in this folder will be created.

Click Finish to end working in Management mode.

Note: A Monaco CONF or a Monaco Interface Designer license is required for managing

52
4.2. Opening a workspace

workspaces. When only a Monaco Basic license is present, the button will not be shown.

Selecting VCIs

Click the button on the top right of the Open workspace dialog to display the VCIs selec-
tion area to the view.

The box will show all configured Interfaces that can be used with the selected project.
The interface selected in the System Configurator is checked in the list.
You may check another interface that you want to use with the selected project.

Press Detect all to check what interfaces are available at the moment.

Detect selected will check if the selected interface is available.

An interface that is connected, presents the connected icon .

An interface which is not connected, presents the disconnected icon .
Interfaces that have not been checked yet, are marked with a question mark .

Note: Detecting an interface may take a long time. You can abort the detection process
using the Cancel button.

Click Cancel to return to the Monaco Start Page.

Click Help to open the integrated Monaco help system.

53
4.3. Starting and Stopping the Execution

4.3 Starting and Stopping the Execution

When Monaco is in Execution Mode, the execution of the HMI Controls can be started or
stopped.

Starting the Execution

To start the execution select Start from the Execution menu or press F5 on your keyboard.
This will activate the HMI Controls of all Layouts or only the ones from the currently visible
Layout, depending on the settings in the Workspace Options dialog.

Configuration of Start Options

The Start Options of Monaco can be set in the Workspace Options dialog, when Monaco is in
Configuration Mode. To enter Configuration Mode an Interface Designer License is required.
Select Configure workspace... from the Configuration menu to open the Workspace Options
dialog.

The tab Start Options offers the following settings:

If Start automatically after loading is checked, the execution of the Monaco workspace is
started automatically after loading. When the checkbox is disabled the Monaco workspace
has to be started manually after loading using the Start button from the Toolbar or the Start
menu item in the Execution menu.

There are three different start options for Layouts in the Layout area:
Start all Layouts: The execution of all Layouts is started at the same time.

54
4.4. Starting and Stopping the Instruments

Start only visible Layout: Only the HMI Controls of the Layout that is currently selected
(visible) will be started. When the Layout is switched, the execution of the HMI Controls in
the former, now invisible Layout is stopped while the HMI Controls in the new visible Layout
are started.
Start all selected Layouts: All Layouts that have been selected (e.g. by clicking on the tab
header) will be started. When changing from one Layout to another, the selected Layout will
be started, but the previous Layout will remain active and is not stopped.
Stopping the execution or switching to Configuration Mode will stop the execution of all Lay-
outs.

When a Layout is active (i.e. started) the icon in front of the tab name in the tab
header is green , whereas Layouts that are not executed show a gray icon .

If Start Instruments automatically is checked HMI Controls from type Instrument are
started automatically after loading (see chapter HMI Control Graphical Instrument for fur-
ther information).

The HMI Controls of the Constant Layout will always be started regardless of the settings in
the Workspace Options dialog.
The Constant Layout is always the first Layout to be started. After that the Layouts of the
Layout area are started using the Layout sequence order.
Within a Layout, the HMI Controls are activated in the order defined by the HMI Control
sequence order.

Stopping the Execution

To stop the execution of all running HMI Controls select Stop from the Execution menu or
press Shift+F5 on your keyboard.

Before stopping the HMI Controls, the Monaco Framework checks whether all started HMI
Controls are ready to terminate their actions.
If one or more HMI Controls are not ready, no HMI Control is stopped, an error message is
displayed and the configuration remains active.

4.4 Starting and Stopping the Instruments

The execution of HMI Controls from type Instrument can be started or stopped separately.
By default HMI Controls from type Instrument are not started when a Monaco configuration
is started. They have to be started manually.

Starting the Instruments

To start the execution all HMI Controls from type Instrument select Start instruments from

55
4.4. Starting and Stopping the Instruments

the Execution menu.

Single Instruments can also be started when Monaco enters Execution Mode using the Au-
tostart option in the Configurator. Use Start instruments from the Execution menu to start
the other Instruments.

For more information about the HMI Control Graphical Instrument see chapter The Monaco
Toolbox HMI Control Graphical Instrument.

Configuration of Start Behavior

The start behavior of the HMI Controls from type Instrument can be set in the Workspace
Options dialog, when Monaco is in Configuration Mode.
Select Configure workspace... from the Configuration menu to open the Workspace Options
dialog.

The tab Start Options offers the option Start Instruments automatically.
When this option is checked, the Instruments are started automatically as soon as the exe-
cution of the other HMI Controls (see Starting and Stopping the Execution) is started.

Stopping the Execution

To stop the execution all HMI Controls from type Instrument select Stop instruments from
the Execution menu. This will also affect the Instruments that were auto started.

56
4.5. Global Protocol Parameter Settings

4.5 Global Protocol Parameter Settings

Protocol Parameter Settings can be set globally for each protocol that is used in the current
project.
Global Protocol Parameter Settings can be accessed using the option Configure Protocol
Parameter Globally... from the Tools menu.

These settings will be saved specific to the project file (ProtocolParams.gpt). When Monaco
is restarted the settings are available again.
The communication parameters are set automatically when opening a Logical Link.

The function Set Protocol Parameter Globally... is only available when the
execution mode is stopped. To stop the execution mode use the Stop button
from the toolbar or select Stop from the Execution menu.

The left tab GlobalProtocolParameterSet shows all available protocols.

In the right tab Configuration the communication parameters may be set.

When the user has changed a communication parameter the value turns to green. It is
activated when the button Update Parameters is pressed.
In the figure below the value of the parameter CP TesterPresentHandling from the UDS
protocol has been changed to Disabled.

To reset a communication parameter to its default select Reset to inactive from the context
menu of the parameter.
In this case the communication parameter will not be changed when Execution Mode is
started and it will not be saved to the project file (ProtocolParams.gpt) anymore.

The settings are applied when you press the button Update Parameters.

57
4.6. Using a Temporary Workspace

Globally changed communication parameters are highlighted with orange letters in the Pro-
tocolParameterSet of the ComPrimitives branch of the associated Logical Link.
The figure below shows the changed parameter CP TesterPresentHandling in the Protocol-
ParameterSet ComPrimitive of the LogicalLink BV ECU.

4.6 Using a Temporary Workspace

In case you have some diagnostic database files but not a DTS project or workspace for
them, you can quickly set up a Temporary Workspace in order to work with the database
files.

Monaco will ask for the database files and a workspace template and create a project. You
do not have to configure project and workspace settings.

To create a Temporary Workspace select the item Temporary Workspace on the Manaco
Start Page or the menu entry Temporary in the File menu.

A file selection dialog will open allowing selecting the required database files. Choose the

58
4.7. Connecting DoIP ECUs

appropriate database format from the file filter next to the File name field.

The following database formats are supported:

• SOD Files (*.sod) - default setting

• SRD Files (*.srd)

• SMR Files (*.smr-d)

Make sure your diagnostic hardware is connected to your system. Click Open to continue.

In the next dialog please select the workspace template that you want to use for your Tem-
porary Workspace.

Click Finish to open the Temporary Workspace in Monaco.

The Temporary Workspace cannot be saved and will be deleted when the
workspace or Monaco is closed.

4.7 Connecting DoIP ECUs

DoIP is defined in the ISO Standard ISO 13400.

DTS Monaco is able to communicate with DoIP ECUs when a D-PDU API software is con-
figured in the DTS Base System that supports the required DoIP module type (please see

59
4.7. Connecting DoIP ECUs

Basesystem help -> General -> Vehicle Communication Interfaces).

Ethernet Activation

The DoIP standard ISO 13400-3 allows switching off the Ethernet chip in a DoIP ECU. In this
case the ECU is in power save mode and cannot be connected.

DoIP ECUs have a special Ethernet Activation pin allowing activating or deactivating the
internal Ethernet chip in the ECU by the test equipment. The chip is activated when a
voltage of 6 Volt is present at the Ethernet activation pin.

Note: Pin 8 of the Standard OBD J1962 connector is used for Ethernet Activation.

When a DoIP ECU uses the Ethernet Activation pin, a DoIP communication cannot be es-
tablished without the Ethernet Activation signal enabled (set to 6 Volt).

The standard Ethernet cable has not separate line for Ethernet Activation. You have to use a
VCI that supports Ethernet Activation or you have to switch manually the Ethernet Activation
line.

Monaco provides the Ethernet Activation button in the tool bar and the Ethernet
Activation item in the Execution menu to switch the Ethernet Activation line.

DTS sends the PDU-API IO control ”PDU IOCTL SET ETH SWITCH STATE” to all activated
D-PDU API interfaces (configured in the System Configurator). If one of the interfaces sup-
ports Ethernet Activation, the interface will set its Ethernet Activation output accordingly (i.e.
the output will be set to 6 volt.). The connected DoIP ECUs will now wake up and send out
a Vehicle Announcement Message (VAM).

When selecting Ethernet Activation again, the pin will be switched off, i.e. set to 0 Volt.

Detecting DoIP ECUs

After the DoIP ECUs have been activated press the Execute broadcast button or
select Execute broadcast in the Execution menu.
Monaco sends a broadcast on Ethernet to set up the DoIP channel.

When a DoIP ECU is discovered every HMI Control will be updated and will show the new
Logical Links detected.
When Monaco discovers DoIP ECUs it will highlight a notification DoIP ECU available in
the Monaco Status Bar. The number of detected DoIP ECUs is shown in brackets.

60
In case there is no answer to the broadcast request, the status bar shows No DoIP-ECU
available.

Double-Click the highlighted notification area to show a dialog with detailed information about
the detected DoIP ECUs. This overview also contains the vendor information for each DoIP
ECU.

If there is no activated D-PDU API interface (configured in the System Configurator) available
supporting the broadcast a warning window will pop up informing that the Broadcast might
not be supported by the currently activated interfaces.

5 Working in Configuration Mode

Configuration Mode provides a set of tool windows, dialog windows, tool bars and functions
to create, delete and edit the Layouts and HMI Controls of the configuration currently loaded.
Only users with an additional Monaco Interface Designer license have access to
Configuration Mode. Users that only have a basic Monaco license do not need
Configuration Mode, because they work with configurations that already exist.
Please note, if Simulated Interface is used for communication, UI configurations
cannot be saved in Configuration Mode.

User Interface

See chapter The User Interface In ConfigurationMode to get an overview of the Monaco user
interface in Configuration Mode.

Main Features

• Creating a new Workspace

Users with an Interface Designer License can create new Monaco Workspaces, see
chapter Creating a new Workspace.

• Opening an Existing Workspace

To open an existing workspace in Configuration Mode follow the steps described in the
chapter Opening a Workspace.

• Adding a Layout
For adding a Layout to a Workspace see chapter Setting Up Layouts.

61
5.1. The User Interface in Configuration Mode

• Inserting HMI Controls

For adding HMI Controls to a Layout see chapter Working with HMI Controls.

5.1 The User Interface in Configuration Mode

The Figure below shows the user interface of the Monaco Framework in Configuration Mode.

The window title displays the currently selected DTS edition in square brackets ([Standard]
or an OEM specific edition) followed by the currently loaded workspace and the DTS project
name in square brackets. For more about DTS editions see the Base System help, chapter
General, Switching the DTS edition.

The user interface of DTS Monaco in Configuration Mode contains the following elements:

• Menu Bar
Menu bar of DTS Monaco. Some items may be disabled as they require a special
mode or selected items to work.

• Toolbar
Provides icons for main features (open, save, etc.). The available buttons depend on
whether Configuration Mode or Execution Mode is activated (see chapter The Monaco
Toolbar in Configuration Mode).

62
5.1. The User Interface in Configuration Mode

• Clamp Status Bar

The Clamp Status Bar shows the battery voltage and ignition state. Please see the
chapter Clamp Status Bar for details.

• Constant Layout
The Constant Layout Area is a Layout that is displayed when the button Toggle Con-
stant Bar from the Toolbar is pressed or the Menu item Show constant layout from the
Execution menu is selected.

When the Constant Layout is active, it will be always visible. For this the Layout Area
is reduced. The size of the Constant Layout may be reduced or enlarged using the
separation bar between Constant Layout and Layout Area.

The Constant Layout area can only contain a single Layout.

• Layout Area
Provides one or more layouts that contain the HMI Controls.
The layouts can be switched by clicking on the appropriate tab at the top of the Layout
Area.

• Status Bar
The status bar displays some status information of Monaco, e.g. if Configuration Mode
or Execution Mode is activated or if a DoIP ECU is available and if NUM lock key or
CAPS lock key is activated.

• Status Message Area

The Status Message Area shows error messages of the DTS-COS (MVCI-Server).
It will be displayed when Show status message area from the View menu is checked.
Take a look at Status Message Area for detailed information about the Status View.

• Configuration Bar
The Configuration Bar shows the layouts and their HMI Controls in a tree structure
(see chapter Configuration Bar).

• Property Sheet
The Property Sheet shows the properties of the currently selected HMI Control or
Layout (see chapter Property Sheet).

63
5.1. The User Interface in Configuration Mode

5.1.1 Configuration Bar

The Configuration Bar shows the currently loaded Monaco workspace configuration as a tree
structure.
It can be used as a browser for selecting and manipulating configuration items (Views, Lay-
outs and HMI Controls).

To display the Configuration Bar select Show configuration bar from the View menu.
The Configuration Bar dialog will open.

The tree shows two main branches:

• Static Views

• Layouts

64
5.1. The User Interface in Configuration Mode

Static Views Branch

The Static Views contains the Status Message Area and the Constant Layout Area.
It is not supported to add Layouts in the Static Views branch.

The Status message area item in the Configuration Bar offers a context menu.
Select Configure... from the context menu to open the configuration dialog.

For the Constant Layout item a context menu is available:

• Add HMI Control...: Add an HMI Control to the selected Layout

• Configure layout properties...: Change the title name of the Layout

• Copy: Copy the selected Layout to the Clipboard

• Paste: Paste HMI Controls from the Clipboard to the selected Layout

Layouts Branch

The individual Layouts are displayed as branches of the Layout branch.

For the Layout branch the following context menu is available:

65
5.1. The User Interface in Configuration Mode

• Add layout...:Add a new Layout to the Layout branch

• Paste layout...: Paste a Layout from the Windows Clipboard to the Layout branch

• Export: Export all Layouts

• Import: Import one or more Layouts to the Layout branch

For each individual layout a context menu is available:

• Add HMI Control...: Add an HMI Control to the selected Layout

• Configure layout properties...: Change the title name of the Layout

• Export: Export the selected Layout

• Copy: Copy the selected Layout to the Clipboard

• Paste: Paste HMI Controls from the Clipboard to the selected Layout

• Delete: Remove the selected Layout from the workspace

• Help: Opens the help

The HMI Controls of a Layout are displayed as branches of the individual Layout.

For each HMI Control a context menu is available:

• Configure HMI Control execution mode behavior...: Open the Configurator of the HMI
Control

• Configure HMI Control...: Open the property Sheet with the HMI Control Properties

• View order : Allows arranging the HMI Controls in layers.

– Bring to background: Moves the HMI Control to the background.

– Layer up: Moves the HMI Control one layer up.
– Layer down: Moves the HMI Control one layer down.
– Bring to front: Moves the HMI Control to the foreground

• Cut: Cut the selected HMI Control from the Layout to the Clipboard

• Copy: Copy the selected HMI Control to the Clipboard

• Paste: Paste HMI Controls from the Clipboard to the selected Layout

• Delete: Remove the selected HMI Control from the Layout

66
5.1. The User Interface in Configuration Mode

• Help: Opens the help chapter of the corresponding HMI Control

Layouts or HMI Controls can be freely moved and reordered in the Configuration Bar using
Drag and Drop or the CTRL+Arrow keys.

The order of HMI Controls in the Configuration Bar determines their startup or-
der. An error may occur if one HMI Control needs to start after e.g. an initializa-
tion from another HMI Control.

Layouts can also be copied from one workspace to another using Copy. Monaco must not
be closed in between.

5.1.2 Property Sheet

The Property Sheet is a configuration dialog of a Layout or an HMI Control.

Depending on the current selection the property pages of a Layout or of an HMI Control are
displayed.

To open the Property Sheet check Show property sheet in the View menu.

Layout Properties

When a Layout is selected, the property pages of the Layout are displayed in the Property
Sheet dialog.

67
5.1. The User Interface in Configuration Mode

As Layout Properties only the Layout title is available.

HMI Control Properties

When an HMI Control is selected, the property pages of the HMI Control are displayed in the
Property Sheet dialog.

The Position and Size tab shows the position and size of the HMI Control relative to the
Layout.

68
5.2. Creating a new Workspace

The third tab shows configuration options specific to the selected HMI Control.
The options available are a subset of the options available in the HMI Control Configurator.
The tab allows easy access to frequently used configuration items.

5.2 Creating a new Workspace

To create a completely new Monaco Workspace and add HMI Controls you must
have an Interface Designer license option (MIND), because you have to open
Monaco in Configuration Mode. When you have a Monaco Configurator license
(CONF) you can use the Monaco templates and create a new workspace.

Select New... from the File menu or select Create a new workspace on the Start Page.
The Create New Workspace From Template dialog will open.

Template Selection

69
5.2. Creating a new Workspace

Start with a completely empty workspace or select one of the provided templates.

Select <empty workspace> when you want to create a completely empty workspace with
no HMI Controls contained.

The following templates are available:

• Communication and Analysis

This will open a workspace with a Constant Layout containing two Bus Trace HMI Con-
trols configured for CAN1 and K-line. There will be three Layouts, one with a Diagnostic
Services HMI Control, one with a OTX HMI Control and one with two Symbolic Trace
HMI Controls configured for CAN1 and K-line.

• Error Memory
This will open a workspace with a Constant Layout containing a Bus Trace HMI Control
configured for CAN1. There will be three Layouts, one with a DTC HMI Control, one
with a OTX HMI Control and one with a Symbolic Trace HMI Control configured for
CAN1.

• Measuring and Parameterizing

This will open a workspace with a Constant Layout containing a Logical Link List and a
Bus Trace HMI Control. There will be four Layouts, one with an Recorder HMI Control,
the second with a Service Table HMI Control, the third with a Diagnostic Services HMI
control and the last with a Symbolic Trace HMI Control.

• Onboard Diagnostics
This will open a workspace with a Constant Layout containing two Bus Trace HMI
Controls configured for CAN1 and K-line. There will be two Layouts, one with an OBD
HMI Control and the other with two Symbolic Trace HMI Controls configured for CAN1
and K-line.

• Programming
This will open a workspace with a Constant Layout containing a Bus Trace HMI Control
configured for CAN1. There will be two Layouts, one with a Toggle Sequences and a
Flash HMI Control and the last with a Symbolic Trace HMI Control configured for CAN1.

• Quick test
This will open a workspace with a Constant Layout containing a Bus Trace HMI Control.
There will be two Layouts, one with an Quick Test HMI Control and one with a Symbolic
Trace HMI Control.

70
5.2. Creating a new Workspace

• Test Sequences
This will open a workspace with a Constant Layout containing a Logical Link List and
a Bus Trace HMI Control. There will be three Layouts, one with an OTX HMI Control,
one with Diagnostic Services HMI Control and the last with a Soft Key and a Symbolic
Trace HMI Control.

• Variant coding
This will open a workspace with a Constant Layout containing a Bus Trace HMI Control.
There will be two Layouts, one with an Variant Coding HMI Control and one with a
Symbolic Trace HMI Control.

In Configuration Mode you will be able to extend or adapt these templates to your needs.

Click Ok> to create the new Workspace.

When the project offers more than one VIT, a dialog will be shown prompting you to select
the appropriate VIT.

71
5.2. Creating a new Workspace

Select the VIT an click OK to create the new Workspace.

Managing Templates

Press the button Manage to manage the templates:

Delete
Remove the selected template from Monaco.

Import
Import an external workspace template to the folder that contains the templates that are
offered by Monaco.

Click Finish to terminate the Manage mode.

Selecting VCIs

Click the button on the top right of the Create New Workspace From template dialog to
add the VCIs box to the view.

The box will show all configured Interfaces.

The interface selected in the System Configurator is checked in the list.
You may check another interface that you want to use with the new Workspace.

Press Detect all to check what interfaces are available at the moment.

Detect selected will check if the selected interface is available.

An interface that is connected, presents the connected icon .

An interface which is not connected, presents the disconnected icon .
Interfaces that have not been checked yet, are marked with a question mark .

Note: Detecting an interface may take a long time. You can abort the detection process
using the Cancel button.

72
5.3. Creating a new Workspace Template

Click Cancel to return to the Monaco Start Page.

Click Help to open the integrated Monaco help system.

5.3 Creating a new Workspace Template

For quick and easy access to the diagnostic functionality of the HMI Controls, Monaco sup-
ports predefined configurations, that can be used with any DTS Project.

A template is a predefined workspace that may be used as a base workspace configuration

for other DTS projects.

Unlike Workspace files, Workspace Templates are independent of a DTS project.

Creating a Workspace Template File

In Configuration Mode, the currently opened Workspace configuration can also be stored as
a Workspace Template file using Save As Template... in the File menu (see chapter Save As
Template...).

This only makes sense if the current configuration is not depending on the selected DTS
Project and Vehicle Information. Monaco does not check whether such dependencies exist
and stores the configuration as a Workspace Template even if the configuration does not

73
5.4. Setting Up Layouts

work with other DTS Projects or Vehicle Information. It is the responsibility of the template
author to avoid such dependencies.

To create an empty Workspace Template or to select an existing one choose New from the
File menu (see chapter New).

Storing a Workspace Template File

The Workspace Templates are not associated to a special DTS Project and are therefore not
stored within a DTS Project subdirectory.

The configuration templates are stored in the directory ProgramData\Softing\Diagnostic

Tool Set\Version\hmt.

Monaco Workspace Template files have the extension mnt.

There are some Workspace Template files delivered with DTS Monaco that contain Layouts
and HMI Controls of different types.
Take a look at chapter The Monaco HMI Controls for detailed information about these HMI
Controls.

5.4 Setting Up Layouts

A Layout in Monaco is an area where HMI Controls can be placed.
In Configuration Mode these HMI Controls can be arranged freely in this area.

Different Layouts can be active at the same time. The user can easily change the Layout by
clicking on another tab.
So a user may perform the first step of a task in the first Layout and the switch to the next
Layout in order to perform the next steps that may require different HMI Controls.
Switching to other Layouts does not affect communication with an ECU in Execution Mode.

There are two types of Monaco Layouts:

• Constant Layout
The Constant Layout Area is a layout that is displayed or hidden as required by the
user.
When the Constant Layout is active it will be always visible.

It is not supported to add Layouts to the Constant Layout area. Only one Layout is
supported.

• Layout in the Layout Area

The Layout Area can host one or more Layouts that may be switched by tabs.

74
5.4. Setting Up Layouts

The following operations are supported by Monaco Layouts:

Adding a Layout to the Workspace

A new Layout is added to the workspace using Add layout... from the Configuration menu.
Please note, a new Layout can only be added to the Layout Area. The Constant Layout does
not support adding additional Layouts.

The Add Layout dialog will open.

Enter a name for your new Layout. This name will be shown on the tab of the Layout.
The characters ?, ! and +are not allowed in Layout names.
The name of the Layout may be changed later using Configure layout properties... from the
Configuration menu.
Press OK to insert the Layout.

The new Layout is inserted at the end of the Layout sequence. It is empty showing a grid,
visible and already selected.

Selecting a Layout

A Layout can either be selected by clicking on the corresponding tab of the Layout Area or
by using the Configuration Bar (see chapter Configuration Bar).

Selecting a Layout results in the following:

• The selected Layout becomes visible in the Layout Area, which means that the selected
Layout is displayed in the foreground.

• The Property Sheet dialog provides the property pages of the selected Layout.

• The Layout menu is made available, i.e. its functions are enabled.

• The corresponding Layout tree item of the Configuration Bar is also selected.

75
5.4. Setting Up Layouts

• An HMI Control currently selected is deselected.

It is not possible to select multiple Layouts.

Deleting a Layout

A Layout can only be deleted if it is selected.

To delete a Layout use one of the following options:

• Press CTRL+Del on the keyboard.

• Select Delete from the Edit menu.

• Select Delete from the context menu of the selected layout in the Configuration Bar

All HMI Controls that are contained in the Layout will be deleted too.
The Layout is deleted irrevocably, there is no Undo function. For this reason the user is
asked to confirm deleting the Layout.

Duplicating Layouts

A Layout can be duplicated inside the Layout Area or even between Constant Layout and
Layout area.

• The Copy command will copy a selected Layout and all its HMI Controls to the Clip-
board.

• The Paste command will insert a Layout and all its HMI Controls from the Clipboard to
the currently selected Layout Area.

To Copy or Paste a Layout use one of the following options:

• Select Copy or Paste from the Edit menu.

• Press CTRL+C for Copy or CTRL+V for Paste on the keyboard.

• Select the Copy or Paste button from the Monaco Tool Bar.

• Select the Layout by clicking on a free area (where the grid is visible) and open the
context menu. Select Copy or Paste from the context menu.

• Select the Layout in the Configuration Bar and open the context menu. Select Copy or
Paste from the context menu.

76
5.5. Setting up HMI Controls

Changing the Layout Sequence Order

The order for Layouts defines the order in which the Layouts are shown in the tab control of
the Layout area.

This order will also be used for activation of Layout and their HMI Controls.
The order can be changed by selecting Sequence Order from the Configuration menu. This
is used to move the Layout currently selected up or down within the order.
The order can also be changed with help of the Configuration Bar (see chapter Configuration
Bar) using Drag and Drop or the CTRL+Arrow keys.
After loading a configuration, the first Layout in the Layout sequence order is always shown.

5.5 Setting up HMI Controls

HMI Controls are the elements of the Monaco user interface that provide the functionality for
the communication with vehicle systems.

The following operations are supported by Monaco HMI Controls:

• Adding an HMI Control to a Layout

• Selecting an HMI Control

• Configuration of HMI Controls

• Arranging HMI Controls

• Duplicating and Moving HMI Controls

• Changing the HMI Control Sequence Order

• Deleting an HMI Control

5.5.1 Adding an HMI Control to a Layout

Use one of the following options to add an HMI Control to the current Layout:

• Select a Layout in the Layout area where you want to add the HMI Control. Click Add
HMI Control... in the Configuration menu.

• Right-click into the free area of a Layout to open the context menu of the Layout. Select
Add HMI Control....

77
5.5. Setting up HMI Controls

• Select Add HMI Control... from the context menu of the selected layout in the Config-
uration Bar.

The Add HMI Control dialog will open. Select an HMI Control from the list.
Press OK to insert the HMI Control.

When an HMI Control is added, Monaco performs the following actions:

• The HMI Control is initialized with a default configuration.

• The HMI Control is added to the selected Layout or to the constant Layout with a default
position and size.

The selected HMI Control is inserted at the end of the HMI Control sequence of the currently
selected Layout.

78
5.5. Setting up HMI Controls

The new HMI Control is visible and selected.

The size, position, name and other properties of the HMI Control can be changed later using
the Property sheet HMI Control Properties.

This dialog can be accessed using the Configure HMI Control item of the Configuration
menu. See also chapter Property Sheet.

5.5.2 Selecting an HMI Control

An HMI Control can either be selected by clicking on the HMI Control itself or by using the
Configuration Bar.

Selecting an HMI Control results in the following:

• The selected HMI Control becomes visible. If the HMI Control is part of a Layout in
the Layout Area, the Layout will be brought to the foreground. If an HMI Control of the
Constant Layout is selected, this Layout will be displayed).

• The selected HMI Control will be surrounded with a tracker rectangle.

• The Property Sheet HMI Control Properties of the selected HMI Control will be avail-
able. (Select Configure HMI Control item of the Configuration menu to show the Prop-
erty Sheet)

• The corresponding HMI Control in the tree of the Configuration Bar is selected.
• A Layout currently selected will be deselected.

Selecting multiple HMI Controls is not supported.

79
5.5. Setting up HMI Controls

5.5.3 Configuration of HMI Controls

For configuration of an HMI Control the following options are available:

• Configuration of HMI Control Properties:

When an HMI Control is selected, the property pages of the HMI Control are displayed
in the Property Sheet dialog.
To open the Property Sheet of an HMI Control select it and choose Configure HMI
Control... from the Configuration menu or from the context menu of the HMI Control.
For more information see chapter Property Sheet

• HMI Control Configurator:

The HMI Control Configurator offers options to control the behavior of the HMI Control
in Execution Mode.

To open the HMI Control select it and choose Configure HMI Control execution mode
behavior... from the Configuration menu or from the context menu of the HMI Control.

The HMI Control Configurator offers one or more tabs with grouped configuration op-
tions.

At least a Configurator offers the Common Settings tab. Other tabs may provide Filter
settings or the configuration of Sequences and Services.

80
5.5. Setting up HMI Controls

5.5.3.1 Property [Show LongNames]

The Property Show LongNames controls the presentation of the names of database objects
like Logical Links, services or parameters.

When Show LongNames is set to true, all items used in the HMI Control show the Long
Names defined in the diagnostic database. If it is set to false, the Short Names from the
database are shown.

As not in every condition a short or long name from a diagnostic database is available the
following rules apply:

DTS Standard

Show LongNames true

Show LongNames false

Vehicle Information in the database Protocols: <LongName of Logical Link in the
is used database>

Functional Group: <LongName of Logical Link

in the database>

Base Variant: <LongName of Logical Link in

the database>

Variant: <LongName of Logical Link in the

database>.<LongName of ECU Variant>

Protocols: <ShortName of Logical

Link in the database>

Functional Group: <ShortName of

Logical Link in the database>

Base Variant: <ShortName of Logical

Link in the database>

Variant: <ShortName of Logical Link

in the database>.<ShortName of ECU
Variant>

81
5.5. Setting up HMI Controls

Default VIT is used Protocols: <ShortName of Protocol>

Functional Group: <ShortName of Functional

Group> (<ShortName of Protocol>)

Base Variant: <ShortName of BaseVariant>

(<ShortName of Protocol>)

Variant: <ShortName of BaseVariant>

(<ShortName of Protocol>).<ShortName
of ECU Variant>

Protocols: <ShortName of Logical

Link created by D-Server>

Functional Group: <ShortName of

Logical Link created by D-Server>

Base Variant: <ShortName of Logical

Link created by D-Server>

Variant: <ShortName of Logical Link

created by D-Server>.<ShortName of
ECU Variant>

The setting refers to the tabs in the Configurator (i.e. items in the Common Settings, Filters,
Sequences, Services, ComPrimitives, Configuration tabs) and in the user interface shown in
Execution Mode (i.e. items in a database service tree, in the Property area, in the tables, ...).

This property can also act as a Common Property.

5.5.4 Arranging HMI Controls

Use the mouse to change the arrangement of HMI Controls within a Layout.

Resizing HMI Controls

The selected HMI Control will be surrounded by a tracker rectangle.

82
5.5. Setting up HMI Controls

The tracker rectangle has eight resize handles for controlling the shape and size of the HMI
Control.

Move the mouse pointer over a tracker rectangle and press the left mouse button to resize
the HMI Control.

The position of the selected HMI Control can be changed by moving the mouse while keeping
the left mouse button pressed down.

By default the position of an HMI Control is changed according to the grid. To change the
position independently of the grid press the ALT key during this action.

The position and size of the HMI Controls are limited by the size of the Layout.
An HMI Control cannot be moved outside this area and the size of an HMI Control cannot
exceed these limits.

Overlapping of HMI Controls

Monaco supports arranging HMI Controls so that they are overlapping other HMI Controls.

To change the order the HMI Controls are overlapping, select an HMI Control and use one
of the following options from the context menu entry View order:

• Bring to background

83
5.5. Setting up HMI Controls

Positions the selected HMI Control on the lowest layer (background).

• Layer down
Moves the selected HMI Control one layer down.

• Layer up
Moves the selected HMI Control one layer up.

• Bring to front
Positions the selected HMI Control on the top layer (in front of all HMI Controls of the
Layout).

Each HMI Control represents one layer.

It is the responsibility of the configuration author to create overlapping HMI Con-

trols that do not interfere.

5.5.5 Duplicating and Moving HMI Controls

An HMI Control can be duplicated or moved inside a Layout or between different Layouts
(even between Constant Layout and Layout area).

• The Copy command will copy a selected HMI Control to the Clipboard.

• The Cut command will remove a selected HMI Control from the Layout and copy it to
the Clipboard.

• The Paste command will insert an HMI Control from the Clipboard to the currently
selected Layout.

Copying HMI Controls or Layouts between different workspaces or different DTS

projects may result in Workspace inconsistencies.
Please check Workspace Consistency first.

To Copy, Cut or Paste an HMI Control use one of the following options:

• Select Copy, Cut or Paste from the Edit menu.

• Press CTRL+C for Copy, CTRL+X for Cut or CTRL+V for Paste on the keyboard.

• Select the Copy, Cut or Paste button from the Monaco Tool Bar.

84
 • Select the HMI Control and open the context menu. Select Copy, Cut or Paste from
the context menu.

• Select the HMI Control in the Configuration Bar and open the context menu. Select
Copy, Cut or Paste from the context menu.

5.5.6 Changing the HMI Control Sequence Order

The order for HMI Controls defines the order in which the HMI Controls are activated when
Monaco execution is started.

The order is displayed in the Configuration Bar and can be changed by selecting Sequence
Order from the Configuration menu. This will move the HMI Control currently selected up or
down within the order.

The order can also be changed with help of the Configuration Bar using Drag and Drop.

5.5.7 Deleting an HMI Control

An HMI Control can only be deleted if it is currently selected.

To delete an HMI Control use one of the following options:

• Press CTRL+DEL on the keyboard.

• Select Delete from the Edit menu.

• Select Delete from the context menu of the selected HMI Control in the Configuration
Bar.

The HMI Control is deleted irrevocably. There is no Undo function.

6 Working with HMI Controls

HMI Controls are the elements of the Monaco user interface that provide the functionality for
the communication with vehicle systems.

For a list of all HMI Controls see chapter The Monaco HMI Controls.

Setting Up Layouts and HMI Controls

Setting Up Layouts
Setting up HMI Controls

85
6.1. Configuration of HMI Controls

Many HMI Controls use similar methods and dialogs in their Configurator. Please see chap-
ter Configuration of HMI Controls.

To set common properties for all HMI Controls in a Workspace use the Common Properties
Configurator.

Working with HMI Controls in Execution Mode

Many HMI Controls offer a tree with Logical Links. The icon in front of a Logical Link shows
its State.

6.1 Configuration of HMI Controls

The behavior and the user interface of an HMI Control can be modified by its Configurator.

The configuration of an HMI Control is usually made when Monaco is in Configuration Mode.
The designer of the workspace may allow the users to modify configuration settings when
Monaco is in Execution Mode by enabling the Configure button in the user interface of the
HMI Control. In this case there may be some settings that are disabled because they must
not be changed in Execution Mode.

Most of the Configurator dialogs offer common settings and functionality that work the same
way in these HMI Controls, for example to change a value of a property of an HMI Control or
elements that can be found in a couple of configurations of different HMI Controls.

Opening the Configurator

To open the Configurator of an HMI Control switch Monaco in Configuration Mode and
choose one of the following actions:

• Double-click on an HMI Control or

• Right-click on an HMI Control and select Configure HMI Control execution mode be-
havior... from the context menu.

• Right-click the entry of the HMI Control in the Configuration Bar and select Configure
HMI Control execution mode behavior... from the context menu.

Configuration Area

The dialog window of an HMI Control Configurator is similar for most HMI Controls. It allows
the configuration of the appropriate HMI Control and also of some elements of the Configu-
rator dialog window itself.

An HMI Control Configurator dialog usually offers one or more tabs that contain the con-

86
6.1. Configuration of HMI Controls

figuration items, as for example shown in the dialog of the DTC HMI Control Configurator
below.

Some HMI Controls offer a split configuration area: There are tabs on the left and tabs on
the right (see the following dialog of the Diagnostic Services HMI Control Configurator). In
between arrow buttons allow taking over elements from one side to the other.

87
6.1. Configuration of HMI Controls

There are some tabs that are common for the Configurators of most HMI Controls:

• Common Settings tab

• Filters tab

• Sequences tab

Some tabs are common for several HMI Control Configurators. These tabs and their handling
are described in the following chapters.

Buttons

The table below shows the buttons that are usually provided by an HMI Control Configurator.

Button Remarks
OK Modified and new entries (e.g. Sequences) in the Configurator are ap-
plied and the Configurator dialog is closed.
Cancel Closes the Configurator dialog without applying changes.
Help Opens the appropriate chapter in the help file of Monaco.

Status Message Bar

The HMI Control Configurator shows error messages (e.g. caused by wrong entries) in the

88
6.1. Configuration of HMI Controls

status message bar at the bottom of the dialog.

Use the Clear button next to the Status Message Bar to clear the content of the Status
Message Bar. A click on this button hides the visible line (it does not delete it from the Status
Message Bar). A second click on this button deletes all entries from the Status Message
Bar.

6.1.1 Common Settings

The tab Common Settings lists the settings of the HMI Control. The settings determine the
look and behavior of the HMI Control in Execution Mode.
Some Properties also affect the Configurator itself, e.g. when it provides a tab for Services
and ComPrimitives. A setting consists of a Property and its Value.

Property Groups

The Settings are grouped according to their function (e.g. General settings, buttons, ...). The
number of groups depends on the particular HMI Control.
Group names are displayed in blue color.

A group contains one or more settings. Properties and Values are printed in black letters
if they can be modified. If they currently cannot be modified, e.g. when the Configurator is
started in Execution Mode, this will be indicated by a gray color.
A Property item can be modified in the Value column.

The figure below shows the tab Common Settings of the Configurator and the user interface
of the HMI Control DiagnosticServices.

For example the Property Show LogicalLinks on Variants causes also the Variants being
displayed in the Filters tab of the Configurator or in the Diagnostic tree and ECU selection

89
6.1. Configuration of HMI Controls

lists in Execution Mode.

Other Property groups refer to the user interface of the corresponding HMI Control. For
example the Property group Transmit Button contains settings for the button Transmit shown
in the user interface.

Modifying the value of a Property

To modify the value of a Property follow these steps:

1. Select the appropriate Property by a double left mouse click.

2. If the value of the Property is a text field, the value cell will change to an edit field
allowing modifying the text.
If the value has to be selected from a number of options, the value cell will become a
drop down list allowing selecting the appropriate value from the list.

Modifying all HMI Controls in a Workspace using the Common Properties dialog

Some settings in the General section of the CommonSettings tab, eg. Show Frame, Show
LongNames are used by almost all HMI Controls.
In order to allow managing these settings centrally, Monaco provides the Common Properties
dialog.
When a setting can be managed by the Common Properties dialog this will be indicated by
an icon in front of the setting in the Common Settings tab of the HMI Control.
The icon indicates if the setting from the Common Properties Configurator is used or if it is
overwritten by the value of the current HMI Control Configurator.

Icon Description

The setting from the Common Properties - Configurator is used for this
property.

The setting from the Common Properties - Configurator is overwritten

inside this HMI Control.

To overwrite a value double click the appropriate cell and modify it. In this case the setting
from the Configurator of the Common Properties is not used for this HMI Control. An over-
written property will not change when the setting in the Common Properties Configurator is

90
6.1. Configuration of HMI Controls

modified.

To reset an overwritten property to the value from the Configurator of the Common Prop-
erties right-click the value and choose the entry Reset to common from the context menu.
Now the setting in the HMI Control will change when the setting in the Common Properties
Configurator is modified.

6.1.2 Using Filters

Filters are provided for nearly every HMI Control, which can be inserted into the Monaco
Framework. They avoid presenting more information than required in dialogs used in Con-
figuration or Execution Mode.

Filters for Logical Links and Functional Classes can be set in the tab Filters of the corre-
sponding HMI Control Configurator.

The filters apply as well in Configuration as in Execution Mode.

Filters in Configuration Mode

In configuration mode filters affect the user interface of the HMI Control Configurator.

Some HMI Controls (as for example Diagnostic Services, Soft Key, Toggle Sequences) sup-
port the use of Sequences that have to be set up in the HMI Control Configurator. These
HMI Controls have a Configurator window that is split in a configuration area on the left and

91
6.1. Configuration of HMI Controls

a selection area on the right. The selection area on the right offers the tabs Services and
ComPrimitives.

The settings in the filter tab on the left determine the Logical Links and Functional Classes
that are shown in the tree of the Services and ComPrimitives tabs.

The image above shows the Logical Link LL RCM UDS set to reject in the Filters tab. It
will not be displayed in the selection area on the right side. ComPrimitives do not belong to
Functional Classes. Consequently the tree of the tab ComPrimitives does not show them.

Filters in Execution Mode

The filter settings also affect the Logical Links respectively ECUs shown in user interface of
the HMI Control when Execution Mode has been started.

Managing Filters

The tab Filters lists the filter settings of the HMI Control.

Filter items are grouped according to their function (e.g. Logical Link filter, Functional
Classes filter). The number of groups depends on the particular HMI Control.
Group names are displayed in blue color.

A group contains one or more filter items. Filter items are printed in black letters if they are
active. If they are currently not activated this will be indicated by a gray color.
The available filter items (e.g. the Logical Links and Functional Class names) are taken from
the project database.

All filter items of a group may be activated by changing the value of the filter group from off
to on.

The current setting of a filter item can be modified in the Value column.

The value of a filter item may be set to pass or reject.

pass: The filter item is processed by the HMI Control, i.e. it is available for selection in the
HMI Control.
reject: The filter item is rejected by the HMI Control, i.e. it is not visible in the HMI Control.

Please note, the filter does not affect Services and ComPrimitives that are already used e.g.
in Sequences. It only prevents new items being selected or added from the dialog windows.

To enable filtering activate the filter group by double-clicking the row with the filter group
name. In the Value field a drop down menu will appear allowing changing the value to on.
This will cause all filter items to be activated and set to reject.
By double-clicking on a filter item a drop down menu will appear allowing changing individual
values to pass. You also may use Switch Value from the context menu to change the selected
value.

92
6.1. Configuration of HMI Controls

When you select more than one filter item by holding down the Shift key while selecting
multiple items you may set the selected items to pass or reject using the associated context
menu.

Filters are used by almost all HMI Controls.

In order to allow managing the filter settings centrally, Monaco provides a filter tab in the
Common Properties dialog.
When a setting can be managed by the Common Properties dialog this will be indicated by
an icon in front of the Filter setting in the Filters tab of the HMI Control.
The icon indicates if the filter setting from the Common Properties Configurator is used or if
it is overwritten by the filter setting of the current HMI Control Configurator.

Icon Description

The filter setting from the Common Properties - Configurator is used for
this filter property.

The filter setting from the Common Properties - Configurator is over-

written inside this HMI Control.

To overwrite a value double click the appropriate cell and modify it. In this case the filter
setting from the Configurator of the Common Properties is not used for this HMI Control.
An overwritten filter setting will not change when the filter setting in the Common Properties
Configurator is modified.

To reset an overwritten property to the value from the Configurator of the Common Properties
right-click the value and choose the entry Reset to common from the context menu. Now the
filter setting in the HMI Control will change when the filter setting in the Common Properties
Configurator is modified.

Filters Types

Filtering is provided for Logical Links and Functional Classes.

• Logical Link filter

A Logical Link filter determines the Logical Links from the database that will be visible.

To activate Logical Link filtering set the property LogicalLink filter to on.

There is an item for every Logical Links in the database. If the option Show Logical
Links on Variants is enabled in the Common Settings tab, additionally all Variants will

93
6.1. Configuration of HMI Controls

be available for filtering. The filter value of Variants will be set to the same filter value
as the Base Variant has when the option Show Logical Links on Variants gets enabled.

You may set each item individually to pass or to reject. If a Logical Link is set to reject
it will be suppressed in the HMI Control, i.e. it cannot be selected in its dialogs.

When the Logical Link is set to pass it will be available in the dialogs of the HMI Control.

Individual filter items can only be changed if Logical Link filtering is set to on.

Setting all filter items to pass will make all Logical Links be available. This has the
same effect as if Logical Link filtering is disabled.
If Logical Link filtering is disabled, all Logical Links will be available.

• Functional Classes filter

A Functional Classes filter determines the Functional Classes from the database that
will be visible.

To activate Functional Class filtering set the property FunctionalClass filter to on.

There is an item for every Functional Class in the database.

You may set each item individually to pass to reject. If a Functional Class is set to
reject it will be suppressed in the HMI Control, i.e. it will not be visible in its dialogs.
When the Functional Class is set to pass it will be available in the dialogs of the HMI
Control.

Individual filter items can only be changed if Functional Class filtering is set to on.

Setting all filter items to pass will make all Functional Classes be available.
If Functional Class filtering is disabled, all Functional Classes will be available.

As ComPrimitives do not belong to Functional Classes the Functional Class filter does
not affect the tab ComPrimitives.

94
6.1. Configuration of HMI Controls

6.1.3 Designing Sequences of Services, ComPrimitives and OTX

Scripts
Some HMI Controls support starting sequences of Services, ComPrimitives and OTX
Scripts.

A sequence is a series of Services, ComPrimitives or OTX Scripts which are automatically

executed one after the other when the user presses a button on the user interface of the HMI
Control during runtime.

For designing these Sequences the Configurator of the HMI Control has additional tabs for
selection and configuration of Services and ComPrimitives:

• Services tab: contains the Services from all ECUs in the database

• ComPrimitives tab: contains ComPrimitives

• Configuration tab: used for the configuration of Services and ComPrimitives

• Otx tab: contains Otx Scripts available in the project

• Otx Configuration tab: used for the configuration of OTX scripts

These tabs are arranged on the right side of the configurator window.

Services tab

The tab Services is activated if one of the Sequence tabs on the left (i.e. Sequence 1 to
Sequence 4) is selected.

It displays a tree consisting of Logical Links, Functional Classes and Diagnostic Services.
The content of the tree may be reduced using the Filter options and some Common Setting
properties (e.g. Show Services, Sorting, Show Logical Links on Variants, ...).

ComPrimitives tab

The tab ComPrimitives is activated if one of the Sequence tabs on the left (i.e. Sequence 1
to Sequence 4) is selected.

It displays a tree consisting of Logical Links, Hex and Raw Services, Protocol Parameters
Sets and ComPrimitives. The content of the tree may be reduced using the Logical Link filter

95
6.1. Configuration of HMI Controls

options.

ComPrimitives provide general functionalities. They do not belong to any database, but are
hard coded in DTS (see chapter ComPrimitives for detailed information).

Otx tab

Some HMI Controls permit using OTX Scripts and OTX Projects in Sequences.
HMI Controls that provide this feature are:

• HMI Control Soft Key

• Data Server of HMI Control Graphical Instrument

• HMI Control Toggle Sequences

The tab Otx is activated if one of the Sequence tabs on the left (i.e. Sequence 1 to Sequence
4) is selected.
It displays a tree of the OTX projects in the current DTS project (see Using OTX Scripts in
Monaco for details).
The tree presents OTX Scripts, OTX Binary Scripts and OTX projects. Only executable OTX
scripts (including binary scripts) that contain a main procedure are shown.

The Library folder additionally contains scripts that are provided in the OTX script library
(located in /DTSProjects/Globals/OTX folder). This library contains scripts that can be used
commonly by multiple DTS projects.

Otx Configuration

The tab Otx Configuration shows information about the currently selected OTX Script or OTX
Project.

Creating a Sequence

An HMI Control that supports sequences provides a configuration dialog with up to 4 se-
quence tabs on the left side and associated selection and configuration tabs on the right
side.

Select one of the Sequence tabs on the left, e.g. the tab Sequence 1. The Sequence tab
shows a list with two columns: Service/Command and LogicalLink.
The Service/Command column contains the services and commands in the order they will
be executed during runtime.
To add services or commands select the tab Services or ComPrimitives on the right. To add
an OTX Script or OTX Project select the tab Otx on the right.
Select an item (Service, ComPrimitive, OTX Script, OTX Project) from the tree and press the
Arrow to the left button in the middle of the dialog.

96
6.1. Configuration of HMI Controls

The item will be appended to the sequence on the left.

To change the order of the sequence items select an item and use the Arrow up and down
buttons in the middle of the dialog to move it up and down in the list.

A selected item will be removed when the Arrow to the right button is pressed.

The tab Sequence 1 see figure above consists of a list with two columns. The first column
shows the ShortName and the second one the corresponding LogicalLink of the added
Services/ComPrimitives.

In this chapter the creation of a Sequence is described.

• Step 1:
Select the tabs Sequence 1

• Step 2:
Select the appropriate Diagnostic Services and ComPrimitives in the tabs Services
and ComPrimitives and add them using the button with the left arrow to the list of the
tab Sequence 1.

• Step 3:
If necessary change the order of the Services/ComPrimitives using the buttons with
the up and down arrow or remove Services/ComPrimitives by the button with the right
arrow.

The table explains the buttons used for creating a Sequence.

Button Function

97
6.1. Configuration of HMI Controls

Deletes the content of the currently selected Sequence tab (i.e. Sequence
1 to Sequence 4)

Adds a Diagnostic Service or ComPrimitive to the Sequence

Removes a DiagnosticService or ComPrimitive from the Sequence

Moves a selected Diagnostic Service or ComPrimitive up in the Sequence

(i.e. the selected Service or ComPrimitive changes its position with the one
above)

Moves a selected Diagnostic Service or ComPrimitive down in the Sequence

(i.e. the selected Service or ComPrimitive changes its position with the be-
low one)

6.1.3.1 Configuration of Services and ComPrimitives

Services and ComPrimitives used in a Sequence require in many cases the configuration of
parameters.

The Configurator of an HMI Control that supports Sequences offers a third tab Configuration
to configure these elements.

The tab Configuration is only activated when a Service or ComPrimitive in one of the tabs
Sequence 1...4 is selected.
In this case the tab Configuration displays the Properties of the selected item.
The content of the tab refers to the selected entry.

The figure below shows the tab Sequence 1 with the service readDataByCommonID se-
lected on the left and the tab Configuration on the right. The tab Configuration displays the
parameters of the selected service.

98
6.1. Configuration of HMI Controls

The tab Configuration lists the settings of the Service or ComPrimitive. The settings deter-
mine the parameters of a Service or a ComPrimitive and other options.
A setting consists of a Parameter or Response and the associated Value with its Unit when
available.
The settings for Services are grouped according to their type (Params, Symbolic Responses,
Response Classes, Execution). The number of parameters depends on the particular Ser-
vice.
Group names are displayed in blue color.

A group contains one or more settings. Properties and Values are printed in black letters if
they can be modified. If they currently cannot be modified this will be indicated by a gray
color.
A Property item can be modified in the Value column.

Modifying the value of a Property

To modify the value of a Property follow these steps:

1. Select the appropriate Property by a double left mouse click.

2. If the value of the Property is a text field, the value cell will change to an edit field
allowing modifying the text.
If the value has to be selected from a number of options, the value cell will become a
drop down list allowing selecting the appropriate value from the list.
3. Confirm your entry by ENTER

To change the visibility of a Property from the group Symbolic Responses in the user inter-
face:

99
6.1. Configuration of HMI Controls

• Uncheck the individual Properties of the Property group Symbolic Responses or

• Uncheck the Property All Symbolic Responses of the Property group Response
Classes. This will uncheck all Properties of the group Symbolic Responses automat-
ically. Now activate the visibility of each Property of this group individually by check-
marking it.

Property Groups

• Params

The Property group Params lists all available Request Parameters of the selected Ser-
vice in the Sequence tab. The values of some Parameters may be modified except it
is a ConstantParameter. These Parameters are grayed.

• Symbolic Responses

The Property group Symbolic Responses contains all Service Parameters required to
interpret the Response of the selected DiagnosticService in a symbolic way.
If a check box in front of a Property is activated (i.e. has a check mark) the Property is
visible in the user interface of the HMI Control (e.g. in the Process Values area of the
HMI Control DiagnosticServices).
By default all Properties of the Symbolic Responses are activated (visible).

• Response Classes

The Property group Response Classes has two Properties: PDUs and All symbolic
Responses.
When the first Property PDUs is checked (default) the PDU of the Request and the
Response is shown e.g. in the Process Values area of the HMI Control DiagnosticSer-
vices.
If the Property All symbolic Responses is checked all Properties of this Property Group
are visible e.g. in the list box Process Values of the user interface of the HMI Control
DiagnosticServices.
The Properties of this group have no corresponding value.

• Execution

The Property group Execution provides the folowing properties:

executeOnActiveVariant

100
6.1. Configuration of HMI Controls

When executeOnActiveVariant is checked, the execution of the associated Service is

not bound to a specific Variant. The service will be executed on the Variant which is
identified at runtime.
If it is unchecked, it will only be executed for the Variant defined in the Logical Link
column in the Sequence tab. An error will occur when another Variant was identified.

generic
When generic is checked, the execution of the appropriate Service is not bound to
a specific Logical Link. It is marked as generic in the LogicalLink column of the se-
quence.
This allows executing the service for different Logical Links, i.e. for the currently se-
lected Logical Link in the HMI Control when the sequence is started.
To make this work, the Service must exist in the different Logical Links.
The Logical Link that will be used is the one that is selected in the user interface of the
HMI Control during execution mode .

skip
When skip is checked, the Service/Command in the sequence is skipped during exe-
cution. This will allow the user to disable elements of a sequence temporarily without
deleting it completely.

• Change name to create

This property group is provided for Hex Services and Protocol Parameter Sets. It is
used to change the name of the element in the Sequence tab.

6.1.3.2 Configuration of OTX Scripts

The Configurator of an HMI Control that supports OTX Scripts in Sequences offers a tab Otx
Configuration to configure these elements.

The tab Otx Configuration is only activated when an OTX scipt in one of the tabs Sequence
1...4 is selected.
In this case the tab Otx Configuration displays the description of the selected item.
The content of the tab refers to the selected entry.

The figure below shows the tab Sequence 1 with the OTX Script readSpeedDemo.otxb se-
lected on the left and the tab Otx Configuration on the right. The tab Otx Configuration
displays the description of the selected OTX Script.

101
6.2. Setting the ECU Sequence Order

6.2 Setting the ECU Sequence Order

Some HMI Controls that work with multiple ECUs, e.g. the Tool Quick Test require an ECU
sequence order that determines how the ECUs are processed. This order is defined in the
ECU Sequence Editor.

The sequence order is valid for the whole DTS project including all its
workspaces. It is connected to the Vehicle Information Table (VIT). For each
VIT in the project a separate ECU Sequence Order has to be defined.

The ECU Sequence Editor defines the order of the ECUs in which they are handled in mul-
tiple ECU sequences.

102
6.2. Setting the ECU Sequence Order

Open the ECU Sequence Order Configurator by selecting Configure ECU sequence order...
from the Tools menu. This item is only available in Configuration Mode.

103
6.2. Setting the ECU Sequence Order

The sequence is built of four main groups that are executed one after the other:

• PreSequence: ECUs in this group are handled serially.

• MainSequence: ECUs in this group are handled in parallel.
• PostSequence: ECUs in this group are handled serially.
• NotHandled: ECUs in this group are not handled.

The order of the ECUs in the Configurator may be changed by Drag and Drop of items in the
list.

• Serial Group:
Serial processing in this group is enforced.
A serial group may be useful when you want a set of ECUs to be processed one after
the other, while the rest is processed simultaneously.

To create a new serial group select an ECU and select create Serial group with se-
lected ECU from the context menu, alternatively you may use the shortcut CTRL+N.

104
6.2. Setting the ECU Sequence Order

Enter a name for the new Serial Group. You may change this name later by selecting
Rename Serial Group (F2) from the context menu.

To delete a Serial Group move all ECUs to another location using drag and drop. An
empty Serial Group may be removed using the context menu entry Delete Serial Group
(DEL).

• Alternative Group:
This is a special use case for a Serial Group. This group type may be used in all main
nodes. In this case the Serial Group is processed differently.

An Alternative Group typically contains ECUs of the same type (which typically have
the same CAN Identifier). Only one of these ECUs usually is present in a vehicle. For
example an Alternative group may contain different Motor ECUs. But only one of these
Motor ECUs is installed in the vehicle.

In the HMI Controls SWT Quicktest and Complete Vehicle Coding the ECUs from an
Alternative Group are handled as they appear in the sequence. For each ECU a Variant
Identification is performed. In case a Variant is identified successfully this Variant will
be processed and after that the processing of the Alternative Group will be finished
without handling the other ECUs. If no Variant was identified, the first ECU in this
group will be processed as Base Variant.

To create an Alternative Group create a Serial Group first and then tag it as Alternative
Group using the context menu of the group item.
An Alternative Group may be removed when Untag as Alternative Group is selected
from the context menu.

• Parallel Group:
The ECUs of a Parallel Group are processed in parallel.

How many ECUs are processed at the same time depends on the parameter Maximum
LogicalLinks, that may be set in the Configurator of the corresponding HMI Control.
The value 1 will result in a serial processing of the ECUs. A value of 2 allows to process
2 ECUs in parallel. If one ECU has been finished the next one will be processed
immediately. A Serial Group embedded in a Parallel group will be handled as a single
ECU.

The button Calculate Default Order calculates a sequence that always works:
All CAN ECUs are assigned to the Main Sequence allowing parallel handling, whereas all
LIN ECUs are assigned to the Post Sequence where they are treated serially.

105
6.3. Setting Common Properties for all HMI Controls

6.3 Setting Common Properties for all HMI Controls

Every HMI Control has a set of properties, which can be modified by the user to configure
the Layout and the behavior of the HMI Control.
A lot of these properties are specific to the certain HMI Control, but there are some common
properties that are used in almost all HMI Controls.

The properties of an HMI Control instance are set in the Configurator of the HMI Control. This
is a good way to configure different HMI Control instances with individual property values.
But it is quite inconvenient setting a property that is used by all HMI Control instances to
the same value because the configuration must be done for each HMI Control instance
individually.

To simplify the configuration of all HMI Controls simultaneously, Monaco provides a dialog
to modify Common Settings, Filters, Hex- and Raw Services and Protocol Parameters that
shall be applied to all HMI Control instances of the workspace.

The Common properties dialog is accessed via the Configuration Menu item Configure com-
mon properties....

The Settings from this dialog overwrite the settings of every single HMI Control.

The configuration of the different HMI Controls and their properties is explained in chapter
The Monaco HMI Controls.

The Common Properties Configurator has four different tabs providing settings that will be
valid for all HMI Controls that make use of them.

1. Tab Common Settings:

• Show Frame [true/false]:

If true a border frame will be shown with the HMI Control.

106
6.3. Setting Common Properties for all HMI Controls

• Show LongNames [true/false]:

If true the Longs Names defined in the ODX database are shown, if false, the
Short Names will be displayed.
• Show Services [true/false]:
If true Diagnostic Services defined in the ODX database are shown, if false, only
Functional Classes with the associated services will be displayed.
• Show FunctionalClasses [true/false]:
Switches visualization of Functional Classes (including Services) between on and
off.
• Show Service Identifier [true/false]:
Switches visualization of the Service Identifier. Also the order of services will
change between alphabetically and numerically.
• Auto Start Communication [false/true]:
The communication starts automatically, if the communication has not been
started already. If the service belongs to a Base Variant a VariantIdentificatio-
nAndSelection ComPrimitive will be executed.
• ByteField Separator [comma/space/no separator/semicolon/colon]:
This property defines how the bytes of a Byte Fields are separated when they are
displayed in the user interface.
Select a separator from the list.
This option allows selecting a format for displaying Byte Fields that can be copied
to the clipboard and easily pasted in other applications that require this format.
The setting also determines the format a Byte Field has to be entered into an
input field of Monaco. Separators that do not correspond to the setting will be
automatically converted to the configured separator.
• Show Library in Otx tree [true/false]:
If set to true, the folder Library containing the Global OTX scripts is displayed in
the OTX tree. If false, the folder Library and the contained Global OTX scripts are
hidden.
OTX scripts that shall be accessible not only for one project can be added to the
Library of Global OTX scripts using the tab Libraries in the System Configurator.
• Execute Pre- and PostActions[true/false]:
If set to true, the execution of the Pre- and PostActions is enabled. If false, Pre-
and PostActions are ignored.

107
6.4. ComPrimitives

2. Tab Filters:

On the second tab the settings for filters can be defined globally. For more details
about filters please see chapter Using Filters.

Beside the options on and off for a filter group the Common Properties Configurator
offers an additional filter option called SmartFilter :

This option allows filtering Logical Links according to special criteria.

To set the criteria right-click on the filter group and select Filter Logical Links... from
the context menu. Enter a string that should serve as criterion and add it to the list of
strings.
If all strings occur in the Logical Link name the Logical Link will be shown.
If several criteria exist, a Logical Link will be shown if any of these criterions is valid.

3. Tab Raw / Hex Services:

On this tab the configuration of HexServices and RawServices is centralized. Inside

the Monaco configuration different Raw- and HexServices can be defined. The con-
figuration of HexServices and RawServices is explained in chapter Configuration of
Services and ComPrimitives.

4. Tab ProtocolParameterSet Services:

On this tab the configuration of ProtocolParameterSet is centralized. One ProtocolPa-

rameterSet includes a defined set of ProtocolParameters.

6.4 ComPrimitives
A ComPrimitive is a command that goes directly to the firmware of the hardware interface. A
runtime ComPrimitive represents e.g. a state transition of a Logical Link (e.g. GotoOnline)
and real communication objects (e.g. StartCommunication).

The table below shows available ComPrimitives in the tab ComPrimitive of the HMI Control
Configurator.

ComPrimitive Description
GotoOnline Changes the state of a LogicalLink from offline
to online without communication

108
6.5. Logical Link States

GotoOffline Changes the state of a LogicalLink from online

to offline without communication
StartCommunication Performs protocol specific initialization
StopCommunication Performs protocol specific termination
Delay Inserts a delay between a previous and the
next ComPrimitive at the execution point of the
queue. The value of the delay can be set in the
tab Configuration of the Configurator
VariantIdentification Performs a Variant Identification
VariantIdentificationAndSelection Performs a Variant Identification and selects the
detected Variant automatically
ProtocolParameterSet Provides the set of ProtocolParameters defined
in the database for the location
HexService Allows creating a diagnostic message to be sent
to an ECU. The ServiceID is the first byte of the
PDU.
RawService Not supported by DTS 8.

6.5 Logical Link States

The Logical Links in an HMI Control are displayed with a status icon showing the current
state of the link.

The state of a Logical Link is visualized by the following icons.

Icon Remarks
The LogicalLink of type Protocol is in the state closed

The LogicalLink of type Protocol is in the state online

The LogicalLink of type Protocol is in the state communication

The LogicalLink of type Functional Group is in the state closed

The LogicalLink of type Functional Group is in the state online

109
6.5. Logical Link States

The LogicalLink of type Functional Group is in the state communication

The LogicalLink of type Base Variant is in the state closed

The LogicalLink of type Base Variant is in the state online

The LogicalLink of type Base Variant is in the state communication

The LogicalLink of type Variant is in the state closed

The LogicalLink of type Variant is in the state online

The LogicalLink of type Variant is in the state communication

The LogicalLink cannot be created (e.g. because the interface does not
support the physical link).

Logical Links in state offline are not displayed.

Changing the state of a Logical Link

Some HMI Controls (e.g. Logical Link List, Diagnostic Services, Flash) provide a context
menu when you right-click the Logical Link.

This menu offers the following items:

Menu Item Remarks

110
6.5. Logical Link States

Open Logical When a LogicalLink is opened, it will get into the state online. In this
Link state no diagnostic session is established, but some services may be
executed. No tester present messages will be sent to the ECU. There
is no Diagnostic Session entered in the ECU, the ECU is in the default
session.

In case of a K-LINE Protocol it is not possible to communicate with

several ECU in parallel. Therefore only one Logical Link can be opened.

A diagnostic hardware interface can only process a limited count of Log-

ical Links. If the limit is reached, a Logical Link has to be closed before
a new one can be opened.
Start Communi- When the Start Communication command is applied to a Logical Link
cation in the state closed or online, its state will change to communication.

In case of a Logical Link to a K-Line ECU the communication will be

established by performing a Bus Initialization (e.g. 5 Baud Init or Fast
init).

The communication to the ECU is started by executing the Start Com-

munication service that will enter a Diagnostic Session in the ECU. Ad-
ditionally a Variant Identification and Selection will be performed. After
that the TesterPresent Messages will be sent until the Logical Link state
changes back to online or closed.
Stop Communi- The command Stop Communication terminates the Diagnostic Ses-
cation sion with the ECU by sending out the Stop Communication Service.
The TesterPresent messages will be stopped. The Logical Link state
changes to online.
Also in all other HMI controls that are in communication with the same
ECU their Logical Link will also change to the state online.
Close Logical If the Logical Link gets closed the TesterPresent messages will be
Link stopped.
A Stop Communication service will not be sent.
The Logical Link state changes back to closed.

The HMI Control Logical Link List is designed to visualize Logical Links and their states as
well as to change these states.

111
6.6. HexServices

6.6 HexServices
HexServices are diagnostic services that can be created by a DTS Monaco user. Usually,
diagnostic services are saved in a diagnostic database. In certain cases a user wants to
create his own diagnostic services quickly and test them, without modifying the database
itself. This is supported by HexServices in DTS8 Monaco. The user can create and save
own diagnostic services independent of the existing diagnostic services of the database in
DTS8 Monaco.

HexServices consist of a PDU in the sense of a PDU of a diagnostic service. They are
usable for K-line and CAN.

Former releases of DTS (DTS V7) allowed to setup so called RawServices.

RawServices allow the user of the K-line to send any sequence of data bytes
to the control unit. Consequently, the Header-Bytes, the PDU and the check
sum of a diagnostic message can be determined as a whole.

DTS 8 Monaco does not support RawServices at the moment.

6.6.1 Creating HexServices

HexServices in DTS Monaco can be created using the HMI Control DiagnosticServices in
Execution Mode or with an HMI Control Configurator that allows creating Sequences.

Creating a HexService in Execution Mode

1. In the tree Diagnostic Services select the ECU you want to create a HexService for.
Open the branch ComPrimitives and highlight HexService.

112
6.6. HexServices

2. Enter the PDU in the column Value of the row PDU on the right in the Settings tab.
Enter the bytes separated by commas, e.g. 22,F1,90. Do not enter the 0x prefix
shown in the image as it is automatically created.

3. To use the new HexService in other HMI Controls and to save it permanently, enter a
name for the HexService in the column Value of the row Hex / Raw Service (name).

4. After having entered the name, right-click the row with the name and select add to tree.
(see image above).
The HexService is added to the Hex and Raw Services group in the Diagnostic tree.
The HexService is now also available in other HMI Controls that offers the selection of
ComPrimitives.

5. The menu item add to tree and Transmit saves the HexService and transmits it imme-
diately on the bus.

Creating a HexService using an HMI Control Configurator

1. Switch Monaco into Configuration Mode.

2. Double-click the appropriate HMI Control or select Configure HMI Control execution
mode behavior... from its context menu to open the Configurator.

3. Select a sequence tab from the left side.

4. Select the tab ComPrimitives on the right side.

113
6.6. HexServices

5. Open the ECU, for which you want to create the service. Expand the entry ComPrimi-
tives. Highlight HexService .

6. Add the HexService by pressing the green arrow pointing to the left or by double-
clicking it.

7. Highlight the HexService on the left and open the tab Configuration on the right. Enter
the PDU and a name for the HexService.

6.6.2 Using HexServices

Your HexServices will be provided in the Diagnostic tree views of Monaco, as shown in the
following images.

114
6.6. HexServices

The HexServices may be hidden by a Configurator Setting in some HMI Controls as for
example HMI Control Diagnostic Services.
In case the HexServices are not displayed, you have to set the Configurator option Show
Hex and Raw Services to true.

6.6.3 Deleting HexServices

Hex Services can only be removed in Configuration Mode. Entering Configuration Mode
requires an Interface Designer license.

1. Switch Monaco into Configuration Mode.

2. Select Configuration ⇒ Common Properties... from the menu bar.

3. The dialog Common Properties Configurator appears. Select the tab Raw / Hex Ser-
vices. On the left the Hex Services are listed.

4. Highlight an individual HexService and delete it by clicking onto the green arrow point-
ing to the right.

If HexServices are used in Sequences of other HMI Controls they will not be
removed there. Please remove them in the Sequence editors of the related HMI
Controls.

115
6.7. Setting Protocol Parameters

6.7 Setting Protocol Parameters

This chapter describes editing, saving and deleting of ProtocolParameterSets in DTS
Monaco.
Differentiation of terms:

• ProtocolParamSet: ComPrimitive to set the protocol parameters.

• ProtocolParamSets: Collection of templates with a ProtocolParamSet that

have a name and are saved in Monaco.

A ProtocolParameterSet contains all protocol parameters used for a specific Logical Link
(ECU). Protocol parameters are usually defined in the database and may be modified per-
manently by the database editor DTS Venice.

DTS Monaco allows modifying protocol parameters, applying them to a Logical Link and
overwriting the parameters defined in the database. The database remains unchanged.

A ProtocolParameterSet may be modified using the HMI Control Diagnostic Services.

There are two ways:

• Direct access to the ProtocolParameterSet (see chapter Modifying Protocol Parameter

Sets)

• Access via a Sequence button (see chapter Applying Protocol Parameter Sets)

6.7.1 Modifying Protocol Parameter Sets

A Protocol Parameter Set is modyfied by changing the value of one or more protocol param-
eters.
The HMI Control DiagnosticServices allows changing protocol parameters while Monaco is
in Execution Mode.

1. Open a Logical Link in the Diagnostic tree and expand ComPrimitives ⇒ ProtocolPa-
rameterSet in the tree view.

2. The list of all protocol parameters will be displayed in the Settings tab on the right (see
Figure below).

3. The column Property displays the name of the protocol parameter and the columns
Value and unit shows its value and unit as they are defined in the database.
By double-clicking the mouse in a row of this column, the value of the parameter may
be changed.
A modified parameter is indicated by a green text color.

116
6.7. Setting Protocol Parameters

4. To apply the whole Protocol Parameter Set for the associated Logical Link, press the
Transmit button.

The settings will only be changed for the current Monaco session (until the workspace is
closed). The Protocol Parameter Set may be saved and applied in another session again.

6.7.2 Saving Protocol Parameter Sets

To save the modified Protocol Parameter Set enter a name for it in the row Protocol Param-
eter Set (name) (see figure below). The row is located at the lower bottom of the parameter
list.

1. To use the new Protocol Parameter Set in other HMI Controls and to save it perma-
nently, enter a name for the Protocol Parameter Set in the column Value of the row
Protocol Parameter Set (name).

117
6.7. Setting Protocol Parameters

2. After having entered the name, right-click the row with the name and select add to tree.
(see image above).
The Protocol Parameter Set is added to the ProtocolParameterSets group in the Di-
agnostic tree. The Protocol Parameter Set is now also available in other HMI Controls
that offers the selection of ComPrimitives.

3. The menu item add to tree and Transmit saves the Protocol Parameter Set and acti-
vates it for the selected Logical Link.

6.7.3 Applying Protocol Parameter Sets

When a Protocol Parameter Set has been saved, it can be used by other HMI Controls too.
It will be shown in the Diagnostic tree in the branch Protocol Parameter Sets of the associ-
tated ECU.

To activate the Protocol Parameter Set double-click the item in the tree or select it and press
the Transmit button.

You also may enable a sequence button and add your Protocol Parameter Set to the se-
quence. By pressing the button the associated Protocol Parameter Set is activated und will
be used for all subsequent communication in this Monaco session.
See chapter Designing Sequences for details on how to create a sequence. To enable a
button in the user interface of the HMI Control, set the item visible of the Sequence Button
in the Common Settings tab of the Configurator to true.

118
6.8. Using OTX Scripts in Monaco

6.7.4 Deleting the ProtocolParameterSets

A Protocol Parameter Set can only be removed in Configuration Mode. Entering Configura-
tion Mode requires an Interface Designer license.

1. Switch Monaco into Configuration Mode.

2. Select Configuration ⇒ Common Properties... from the menu bar.

3. The dialog Common Properties Configurator appears. Select the tab ProtocolParam-
eterSet Services. On the left the Protocol Parameter Sets are listed.

4. Highlight an individual Protocol Parameter Set and delete it by clicking onto the green
arrow pointing to the right.

If Protocol Parameter Sets are used in Sequences of other HMI Controls they
will not be removed there. Please remove them in the Sequence editors of the
related HMI Controls.

6.8 Using OTX Scripts in Monaco

Monaco supports different ways to use OTX Scripts.

• Using the HMI Control OTX for immediate execution

119
6.8. Using OTX Scripts in Monaco

• Assigning OTX scripts to Sequences

• Using OTX Screen Variables in the Data Server of the HMI Control Graphical Instru-
ment

General Information

OTX Scripts have to be part of an OTX Project.

The use of OTX scripts that are not part of an OTX Project is not supported.

OTX Projects and the OTX Scripts included are stored in the otx folder in the DTS Project.
There is a folder for every OTX project. The project folder contain the project file (*.otxp).

The project folder contains the package directories. In these package directories the OTX
Scripts (*.otx and *.otxb) are located.
OTX-B Scripts are binary, encrypted OTX scripts that can be executed but hide their content.
They can be created using Softing OTX Studio.

OTX Script Selector

The OTX Script Selector displays the OTX elements (i.e. it presents OTX projects, OTX
scripts and OTX binary scripts) available in the current project and optionally in the OTX
library in a tree structure.

Usually only executable OTX scripts (including binary scripts) that contain a main procedure
are shown.

The Library folder additionally presents OTX scripts that are provided in the OTX script
library (located in /DTSProjects/Globals/OTX folder). This library contains scripts that can
be used commonly by multiple DTS projects. These OTX scripts can be added to the Library
of Global OTX scripts using the tab Libraries in the System Configurator.
The folder can be hidden using the Show Library in OTX tree property in the Configurator of
the HMI Control.
If set to true, the folder Library containing the Global OTX scripts is displayed in the OTX
tree. If false, the folder Library and the contained Global OTX scripts are hidden.

HMI Controls supporting OTX scripts

Currently the following HMI Controls support executing OTX scripts.

• HMI Control OTX
• HMI Control SoftKey
• HMI Control Toggle Sequences
• HMI Control Graphical Instrument

120
6.9. Using Application Guidelines (AGLs)

6.9 Using Application Guidelines (AGLs)

Users of Diagnostic Tools often want to interact with the according Software Products on
a High-Level functional view without having knowledge of the exact implementation in the
ECUs.

Areas where this functional view is relevant are e.g. ECU Identification, DTC handling and
Coding.

DTS Monaco provides special HMI Controls for each these use-cases, but the Monaco im-
plementation has to make many assumptions about the kind of services that shall be used
in order to fulfill the functionality, because the corresponding specifications (like ASAM MCD
3D or ODX) do not contain this functional view on Diagnostics. They only have the possibility
of attributing services or parameters with arbitrary values like naming, functional classes or
Semantics.
In consequence, each large OEM and some Tier-Ones have defined Authoring Guidelines
for their diagnostic data in order to have that functional view or they even defined some
abstract functions like Java Jobs.

The Application Guideline (AGL) feature provided by DTS allows creating a mapping be-
tween the functionalities supported by Softing tools and the customer specific Authoring
Guidelines.

Format and Location of the AGLs

AGLs are described as files in XML format. Please use an XML editor of your choice for
editing.

The files have the extension *.agl.

The global AGL files are located in the directory ”<ProgramData>\Softing\Diagnostic Tool
Set\Common”.

All files with extension *.agl will be loaded by Monaco.

The content of the files will be merged by Monaco. This may lead to conflicts.
It is recommended to remove AGL files that are not used.

As an example and template the AGL file ”@softing.agl” is provided.

The Example Project also provides an AGL file in its project directory.

HMI Controls supporting AGLs

• DTC

• ECU Identification

121
6.10. Using Pre- and Post Actions

• Tool Quick Test

• Variant Coding

Defining AGLs

Structure:

• A list of functional descriptions

– Scope of application: e.g. global, per protokoll, per ECU, ...

– Operation name: e.g. VariantCoding Read, VariantCoding Write, Read DTC, ...
– Identification option: e.g. Semantic, Functional Class, ...
– Value of identification option: value of the Semantic
∗ Parameter definition

6.10 Using Pre- and Post Actions

Pre- and Post Actions are used to execute services before and after the main actions of an
HMI Control (e.g. writing coding data in the Variant Coding HMI Control).

Services in this sense can be Diagnostic Services, ComPrimitives, Java Jobs and OTX
Scripts.

The Main Action is the basic function of the HMI Control, e.g. for the Variant Coding HMI
Control the services to write Coding Data or for the ECU Identification HMI Control the ser-
vices for reading identification data.

Pre- and PostActions are typically used to initialize or cleanup the ECU (e.g. unlocking) or to
document values (e.g. Software version).

The execution of the Pre- and Post Action sequence will not be aborted if a service in the Pre-
or Post Action sequence has an error. If a service in the Pre Action sequence is mandatory
for the execution of the Main Action (e.g. unlocking the ECU for flashing), the main action
itself (e.g. flashing) will fail.

Pre- and Post Actions are supported by the following HMI Controls:

• Service Table

122
6.10. Using Pre- and Post Actions

• ECU Identification

• Recorder

• Variant Coding

There is a separate Pre- and Post Action configuration for each of the HMI Control types
above. This configuration applies to all workspaces of the DTS Project.

The configuration files are stored in the folder <DtsProjectFolder>\Sequences\PrePostActions

with the file name PrePost <HMIControlType>.xml (e.g. PrePost ServiceTable.xml for the
Service Table HMI Control).

The Pre- and Post Actions can only be configured for Logical Links of Base Variants. All
ECU Variants will use the Pre- and Post Actions of their Base Variants.
Pre- and Post Actions cannot be configured for Logical Links of Functional Groups, Protocols
and ECU Variants.

The Pre- and Post Actions can be configured using the Pre and Post Action Editor.
The execution of Pre- and Post Actions can be enabled/disabled in the Configurator of the
HMI Control using the Property Execute Pre- and PostActions. By default the execution
of Pre- and Post Actions is enabled.

Pre- and Post Actions can be added to a Monaco Report. For details see chapter Pre- and
Post Actions in Reports.

6.10.1 Pre and Post Action Editor

To open the Pre and PostAction Editor, open the Configurator of the HMI Control and click
the Edit button. The Pre and PostAction Editor is also available in Execution Mode as long
as the Configure button is made visible in the HMI Control.

123
6.10. Using Pre- and Post Actions

The Pre and Post Action Editor has three main areas:

• Sequence Area
The Sequence Area shows the configured sequence in a tree, structured by nodes.
The tree contains all configured Logical Links and their Pre and Post Actions.
Logical Links that are configured but filtered out by the Logical Link filter of the current
HMI Control are shown grayed. This is only for presentation. The grayed Logical Links
can configured, edited and removed like the other Logical Links.

• Operation Area
The Operation Area offers a Services/ComPrimitives and an OTX tab.
The Services/ComPrimitives tab shows the services, Java jobs and ComPrimitives in
a tree.
The OTX tree in the OTX tab shows OTX Projects with the OTX scripts that have a
main procedure.

Items can be added to the sequence using Drag and Drop.

• Details Area
The Detail Area shows detailed information of the selected item in the Sequence Area
or Operation Area.
The Settings tab shows the name, request and response parameters and the De-
scription tab shows associated information about the service taken from the database
or the specifications of the OTX Project/Script.

124
6.10. Using Pre- and Post Actions

Changing Parameters in the Settings tab, like changing request parameter values, is
only supported when an item is selected in the Sequence Tree. Modified parameters
are highlighted in green color.

The names of services and parameters are shown with the Long or Short Name according
to the settings of the HMI Control Property Show LongNames.

The usage of Alias Names is only supported Sequence Tree when the property Show Alias
Names is set to true.

Configuration of the View Layout and the Presentation of Services

The size of the areas can be modified using the splitter bars between the areas. There is a
splitter bar between the Sequence Tree and the Operation and Details area and another one
between the Operation and the Details area.
Use the button to maximize the Operation area and hide the Details Area. Use the
button to maximize the Details area and hide the Operation Area.

The HMI Control Properties Show LongNames and Show Alias Names define the names
that are displayed in the tree controls.

Configuration of Alias Names

The services in the Sequence Tree can be renamed with an Alias Name. Make sure the
Property Show Alias Names is set to true in the Configurator.
Click on the name of the service in the Sequence Tree twice to change the default name to
an Alias Name.
By default the initial Alias Name is set to the Long Name when the Property Show Long-
Names is set to true and a Long Name is available. Otherwise it is set to the Short Name.
The default Alias Name is set when the service is added to the Sequence Tree.

Adding and Removing Items in the Sequence Tree

To add items to the sequence drag and drop them from the Operation area to the appropriate
location in the Sequence tree. A vertical cursor line shows where the item will be inserted.
When not PreAction and PostAction Node for a Logical Link is available in the Sequence
Tree, a small pop up will appear to let the user decide if the service should be added to Pre
or a Post Action.
The following items can be added to the sequence:

• Diagnostic Services

• ComPrimitives

• JavaJobs

125
6.10. Using Pre- and Post Actions

• OTX Projects

• OTX Scripts

• OTX Binaries

• Functional classes, i.e all services contained in a Functional Class

Items can also be moved in the Sequence Tree by dragging them to another location.

To remove a service or a Logical Link from the Sequence Tree, select the item and press the
<Del> key or select Remove from configuration in its context menu .

Tagging a Service as Documentation Service

Each Service in the Sequence Tree can be tagged as Documentation Service.

Services in the Sequence Tree that are tagged as Documentation Service will be included
with the parameters and the result of their execution in the Monaco Report of the associated
HMI Control.

Select the service in the Sequence Tree and open its context menu. Choose Tag as Doc-
umentation Service. A document symbol will be overlaid over the icon of the service to
indicate that it is a Documentation Service.

The request and response parameters of a Documentation Service that are selected in the
Details area are included in the Monaco Report. By default the Request Parameters in the
Params section are not selected and only the non-constant Response Parameters in the
Symbolic Responses section are preselected.

Choose Untag as Documentation Service from the context menu of a Documentation

Service in the Sequence Tree to revert the Documentation Service back to a normal service.

Saving the Changes

Click OK to save the Pre and Post Action Configuration and return to the Configurator. Pre
and Post Action configurations are not saved with the workspace as they are valid for all
workspaces in the DTS Project.

Apply will save the Pre and Post Action Configuration. The Pre and Post Action Editor is not
closed.

Cancel will close the Pre and Post Action Editor without saving the changes when the user
confirms that.

126
6.10. Using Pre- and Post Actions

6.10.2 Pre and Post Actions in Reports

Pre- and Post Actions can be included in the Monaco Reports.

The Pre- and Post Actions are displayed in a table. A tabel is only created when service or
otx results are available (service result, service error, otx result), i.e. an empty Pre or Post
Actions table is not shown.

Only services that are tagged as Documentation Services will be added to the Pre and Post
Actions table. If a Documentation Service has an error, it will be documented in the report.

The caption of the table for Pre Actions is PreActions. It is located before the Main Ac-
tions table. The table for Post Actions follows the Main Actions table and has the caption
PostActions .

The table has the following columns:

• Name
Displays the name of the Logical Link, the service, the request or response and the
associated parameters in the corresponding hierarchical structure.
Service names are displayed beneath their parent ECU link as Short or Long Name.
Request parameters are collected beneath the Request node, Response parameters
beneath the Positive Response node. In case of a negative Response, the response
parameters are located under the node Negative Response.
When parameter or a service has no Long Name the Short Name, the appendix (SN!)
is shown.

• Value
The Value column displays the value of a response or request parameter.

• Unit
The Unit column displays the unit for each response/request parameter if a unit is
available in the database.

• Logical Link
The column Logical Link shows the name of the Logical Link in the row for the service,
when the service was executed on a variant or the service was executed on another
ECU as its parent ECU node.
The Logical Link name is displayed either as Short Name or Long Name depending on
the settings of the Configurator properties Show Long Names and Show Link Name.

• Validity
The column Validity displays the validity information for each value of a re-
sponse/request parameter when a range information is available.

127
 Validity may contain the following messages:
Value not available: The value is not available in range.
Value not defined: The value is not defined in range.
Value not initialized: The value is not set and no default is available.
Value not valid : The value is not valid.
Value OK : The value is in range.
Coded to physical Value failed: Transformation from coded to physical value failed

7 Exchanging Layouts and HMI Controls

DTS Monaco allows exchanging individual HMI Controls or complete Layouts including their
HMI Controls between Workspaces.

This is realized by exporting Layouts and HMI Controls to files that can be re-imported to
other workspaces:

• Importing Layouts and HMI Controls

• Exporting Layouts and HMI Controls

7.1 Exporting Layouts and HMI Controls

DTS Monaco is able to export complete Layouts with their HMI Controls and single HMI
Controls into files that can be exchanged and imported to other Workspaces.

The following Export options are available:

• Exporting Layouts
• Exporting HMI Controls

This feature may be useful in the following use cases:

• Exchanging service sequences configured for HMI Controls such as Service Table.
This saves the effort to create a complex service sequence again and again for different
workspaces or templates.

• Exchanging configured Graphical Instruments Controls with their settings.

• Adding pre-configured Layouts with a certain configuration to an existing workspace
in Execution Mode. This allows extending a once created workspace with special
functionality ’on the fly’.

128
7.1. Exporting Layouts and HMI Controls

• Integrating a pre-configured Layout into a workspace that already contains local modi-
fications. This also applies to modifications made and saved in Execution Mode.

For exporting Layouts Monaco has to be either in Configuration Mode or in Execution Mode
with Execution stopped.

Conflicts

The configuration data of some HMI Controls may have several dependencies on other data
related to the DTS Project. Apart from the configuration data that is local to the HMI Control,
the configuration of a HMI Control depends also on configuration data at workspace scope.
That means this data affect all HMI Controls of this workspace.
These dependencies might cause conflicts in a Workspace when the user imports a Layout
or HMI Control into a workspace

• whose DTS project has got an other diagnostic data base.

• whose DTS project misses certain OTX scripts.

• with different configuration data of workspace or project scope.

To recognize such conflicts a consistency check is done when a layout is imported.

7.1.1 Exporting Layouts

DTS Monaco allows exchanging the configuration of Layouts and their HMI Controls from
one workspace to another.

For exporting Layouts Monaco has to be either in Configuration Mode or in Execution Mode
with Execution stopped.

Temporary Layouts and Constant Layouts cannot be exported.

Exporting a Layout

To export one or more Layouts of a Workspace use one of the following commands:

• Layout(s)... from the Export menu item in the File menu

• the context menu item Export of the Layouts node or the individual Layout in the
Configuration Bar (Configuration Mode only)

The Export Layouts dialog pops up.

129
7.1. Exporting Layouts and HMI Controls

Select the Layouts you want to export and specify the path and file name of the Monaco
Layout Exchange file. The file has the extension ”.mnlx”.
Click the button Export to store the configuration of the selected Workspace layouts, their
HMI Controls and all data with workspace scope that is referenced by the contained HMI
Controls to the file.

Cancel will close the dialog without creating a Monaco Layout Exchange file.

The Monaco Layout Exchange file contains the following data:

• the configuration data of the exported layouts,

• the HMI Controls of these layouts,

• the data points of the data server used by the exported HMI Controls

The settings of the Common Properties are transferred to local settings of the HMI Control
in the exported configuration data.

7.1.2 Exporting HMI Controls

DTS Monaco allows exchanging the configuration individual HMI Controls from one Layout
or Workspace to another.

For exporting an individual HMI Control Monaco has to be either in Configuration Mode or in

130
7.2. Importing Layouts and HMI Controls

Execution Mode with Execution stopped.

Exporting an HMI Control

To export an HMI Control select HMI Control... from the Export menu item in the File
menu.

The Export HMI Control dialog pops up.

Specify the path and file name of the Monaco HMI Control Exchange file. The file has the
extension ”.mnhx”.
Click the button Export to store the configuration of the selected HMI Control and all data
with workspace scope that is referenced by the HMI Controls to the file.

Cancel will close the dialog without creating a Monaco HMI Control Exchange file.

The Monaco HMI Control Exchange file contains the following data:

• the configuration data of the exported HMI Control,

• the data points of the data server used by the exported HMI Control

The settings of the Common Properties are transferred to local settings of the HMI Control
in the exported configuration data.

7.2 Importing Layouts and HMI Controls

DTS Monaco is able to import complete Layouts with their HMI Controls, single HMI Controls
or settings of HMI Controls that have been exported from another Workspace.

The following Import options are available:

• Importing Layouts

• Importing HMI Controls

• Importing HMI Controls Settings

131
7.2. Importing Layouts and HMI Controls

This feature may be useful in the following use cases:

• Exchanging service sequences configured for HMI Controls such as Service Table.
This saves the effort to create a complex service sequence again and again for different
workspaces or templates.

• Exchanging configured Graphical Instruments Controls with their settings.

• Adding pre-configured Layouts with a certain configuration to an existing workspace

in Execution Mode. This allows extending a once created workspace with special
functionality ’on the fly’.

• Integrating a pre-configured Layout into a workspace that already contains local modi-
fications. This also applies to modifications made and saved in Execution Mode.

For an import the target workspace has to be loaded and Monaco has to be either in Config-
uration Mode or in Execution Mode with Execution stopped.

Please note that the import of Layouts or of HMI Controls can have an impact on
the target workspace. There may be changes that cannot be reverted even when
the imported Layouts and HMI Controls are removed. For details see chapter
Impact of an Import on the Importing Workspace.

The consistency of the whole Workspace or a selection of Layouts can be checked using the
Workspace Consistency Check.
This can be useful, when you imported a Layout or HMI Controls that are causing errors,
when you add HMI Controls from another workspace using Copy and Paste or when you are
creating a new workspace by importing Layouts.

7.2.1 Importing Layouts

DTS Monaco allows importing Layouts and the attached HMI Controls from a Monaco Layout
Exchange file.

For an import the target workspace has to be loaded and Monaco has to be either in Config-

132
7.2. Importing Layouts and HMI Controls

uration Mode or in Execution Mode with Execution stopped.

Please note that the import of Layouts has an impact on the target workspace.
There may be changes that cannot be reverted even when the imported Lay-
outs are removed. For details see chapter Impact of an Import on the Importing
Workspace.

To import a Monaco Layout Exchange file open the Import Workspace Layouts dialog using
one of the following commands:

• Layout(s)... from the Import menu item in the File menu (Execution has to be stopped
when Monaco is in Execution Mode)

• the context menu item Import of the Layouts node in the Configuration Bar (Configu-
ration Mode only)

A wizard will guide you through the import process:

Wizard Step1: Selection of the Monaco Layout Exchange file.

Wizard Step2: Selection of the target Workspace.
Wizard Step3: Import and consistency check. Applying the new Layouts to the workspace.

Imported Layouts can be made permanent when saving them in Configuration Mode. Saving
in Execution Mode will leave them in state ”imported”. This way the user can easily remove
them later without need for a Interface Designer license. For details see Handling of Imported
Layouts.

7.2.1.1 Import Wizard - Step1

The first wizard dialog Import Workspace Layouts is used to specify the Monaco Layout
Exchange files.

Select the source.

There are two options:

• User selected: Choose this option to select any folder that contains the Layout files
you want to import.

133
7.2. Importing Layouts and HMI Controls

Click on the ... button on the right to open a folder selection dialog. Browse to the
folder where you have saved the Monaco Layout Exchange files. Click OK.
When the folder selection has been done, the Monaco Layout Exchange files (file
extension *.mnlx) in this folder will be listed in the box below.

• Recent imports: This option allows accessing copies of the recent Layout imports.

134
7.2. Importing Layouts and HMI Controls

These files are stored in the Globals folder. The folder path will be automatically dis-
played in the field below and cannot be changed.
The list on the bottom shows all recently imported Layout files in the left column and
the DTS project and the workspace they have been imported to in the right column.

To delete a file select it and press the Delete button .

To use the file for an import select it and click Next.

The next dialog offers importing the new Layouts to the currently loaded or to a copy of the
currently loaded workspace.

7.2.1.2 Import Wizard - Step2

The second wizard dialog Import Workspace Layouts lets you select the target workspace
the import will be applied to.

Importing Layouts exported from another workspace can cause conflicts in the new Layout.
It also may change configuration settings in the existing workspace.
If you do not have a backup of your current workspace it is a good idea to apply the new
Layouts only to a copy of the current workspace.
To do so, select the option Create and open a copy of the current workspace for import-
ing.

135
7.2. Importing Layouts and HMI Controls

Enter a name for the new Workspace.

If you do not want to create a new workspace and apply the new Layouts to the current
workspace please select Import to the current workspace.

Click Next to continue to the next dialog.

Monaco will now check the consistency of the workspace with the imported Layouts.

7.2.1.3 Import Wizard - Step3

Monaco starts importing the content of the Monaco Layout Exchange file and checks the
content in the Monaco Layout Exchange file against the importing Workspace.

The dialog displays the steps that are performed.

The result will be shown at the end of the text in the dialog.

The button Generate report allows creating a report text file that may help identifying prob-
lems and conflicts during the import process.

In case no errors occurred click Finish to apply the imported Layouts to the current or the
new Workspace.

In case of errors the Layouts of the Monaco Layout Exchange file will only be imported
when the option Allow import of not consistent HMI Control/Layouts is checked in the
tab Import HMI Control/Layout(s) of the Options dialog. To open the Options dialog select
Options... from the Tools menu.

136
7.2. Importing Layouts and HMI Controls

To check the Workspace or Layout again after you have fixed the problems use the
Workspace Consistency Check.

7.2.1.4 Handling of Imported Layouts

After the Layouts have been added to the Workspace, the new Layouts are in the state
imported. This is indicated by a preceding + sign in front of the Layout name. Layouts that
have been added as not-consistent will have an additional ! sign as appendix in the Layout
name.

Layouts in state imported can be deleted by right-clicking on the tab of the imported layout.
Monaco will prompt the user to confirm deleting the Layout.

Note: Not all changes made by the import - like added data points - are reverted by deleting
the imported layouts.

When the user with an Interface Designer license saves the workspace with the new Layouts
in Configuration Mode the state imported is removed. The preceding + and ! indicators
are also removed.

Users acting in Execution Mode are not able to remove the imported state. When saving the
Workspace the new Layouts remain marked as Imported Layouts.

7.2.2 Importing an HMI Control

The Monaco Framework offers a feature to export an individual HMI Control from one
Workspace and re-import it to another Workspace.

For an import the target workspace has to be loaded and Monaco has to be either in Config-
uration Mode or in Execution Mode with Execution stopped.

Please note that the import of an HMI Control can have an impact on the target
workspace. There may be changes that cannot be reverted even when the im-
ported HMI Control is removed. For details see chapter Impact of an Import on
the Importing Workspace.

To import a Monaco HMI Control Exchange file open the Import HMI Control into New Layout
dialog using one of the following commands:

• HMI Control... from the Import menu item in the File menu (Execution has to be
stopped when Monaco is in Execution Mode)

137
7.2. Importing Layouts and HMI Controls

A wizard will guide you through the import process:

Wizard Step1: Selection of the Monaco HMI Control Exchange file.

Wizard Step2: Selection of the target Workspace.
Wizard Step3: Import and consistency check. Applying the new HMI Control to the
workspace.

The imported HMI Control can be made permanent when saving it in Configuration Mode.
Saving in Execution Mode will leave them in state ”imported”. This way the user can easily
remove them later without need for a Interface Designer license. For details see Handling of
Imported HMI Controls.

7.2.2.1 Import HMI Control Wizard - Step1

The first wizard dialog Import HMI Control into New Layout is used to specify the Monaco
HMI Control Exchange files.

Select the source.

There are two options:

• User selected: Choose this option to select any folder that contains the HMI Control
Exchange files you want to import.

138
7.2. Importing Layouts and HMI Controls

Click on the ... button on the right to open a folder selection dialog. Browse to the
folder where you have saved the Monaco HMI Control Exchange files. Click OK.
When the folder selection has been done, the Monaco HMI Control Exchange files (file
extension *.mnhx) in this folder will be listed in the box below.

• Recent imports: This option allows accessing copies of the recent HMI Control im-
ports.

These files are stored in the Globals folder. The folder path will be automatically dis-
played in the field below and cannot be changed.
The list on the bottom shows all recently imported HMI Control Exchange files in the
left column and the DTS project and the workspace they have been imported to in the
right column.

To delete a file select it and press the Delete button .

To use the file for an import select it and click Next.

The next dialog allows selecting the target workspace for the new HMI Control.

7.2.2.2 Import HMI Control Wizard - Step2

The second wizard dialog Import Workspace Layouts lets you select the target workspace
the import will be applied to.

139
7.2. Importing Layouts and HMI Controls

Importing HMI Controls exported from another workspace can cause conflicts in the new
Workspace. It also may change configuration settings in the existing workspace.
If you do not have a backup of your current workspace it is a good idea to apply the new HMI
Control only to a copy of the current workspace.
To do so, select the option Create and open a copy of the current workspace for import-
ing.
Enter a name for the new Workspace.

If you do not want to create a new workspace and apply the new HMI Control to the current
workspace please select Import to the current workspace.

Click Next to continue to the next dialog.

Monaco will now check the consistency of the workspace with the imported HMI Control.

7.2.2.3 Import HMI Control Wizard - Step3

Monaco starts importing the content of the Monaco HMI Control Exchange file and checks
the content in the Monaco HMI Control Exchange file against the importing Workspace.

The dialog displays the steps that are performed.

140
7.2. Importing Layouts and HMI Controls

The result will be shown at the end of the text in the dialog.

The button Generate report allows creating a report text file that may help identifying prob-
lems and conflicts during the import process.

In case no errors occurred click Finish to apply the imported HMI Control to the current or
respectively the new Workspace.

In case of errors the HMI Control of the Monaco HMI Control Exchange file will only be
imported when the option Allow import of not consistent HMI Control/Layouts is checked
in the tab Import HMI Control/Layout(s) of the Options dialog. To open the Options dialog
select Options... from the Tools menu.

To check the Workspace or Layout again after you have fixed the problems use the
Workspace Consistency Check.

7.2.2.4 Handling of Imported HMI Controls

After the HMI Control has been added to the Workspace, the new Layout is in the state
imported. This is indicated by a preceding + sign in front of the new Layout name. An HMI
Control that has been added as not-consistent will have an additional ! sign as appendix in
the Layout name.

Layouts in state imported can be deleted by right-clicking on the tab of the imported layout.
Monaco will prompt the user to confirm deleting the Layout.

Note: Not all changes made by the import - like added data points - are reverted by deleting

141
7.2. Importing Layouts and HMI Controls

the imported layouts.

When a user with an Interface Designer license saves the workspace with the new Layout in
Configuration Mode the state imported is removed. The preceding + and ! indicator is also
removed.

Users acting in Execution Mode are not able to remove the imported state. When saving the
Workspace the new Layout remains marked as Imported Layouts.

7.2.3 Importing HMI Control Settings

The settings of an HMI Control can be loaded from an exported HMI Control Exchange file.
This will overwrite the current settings of the selected HMI Control.

Currently the following HMI Controls support the importing of HMI Control Settings from an
HMI Control Exchange file:

• Service Table

For an import the target workspace has to be loaded and Monaco has to be either in Config-
uration Mode or in Execution Mode with Execution stopped.

Please note that the import of an HMI Control can have an impact on the target
workspace. There may be changes that cannot be reverted even when the im-
ported HMI Control is removed. For details see chapter Impact of an Import on
the Importing Workspace.

To import the settings from a Monaco HMI Control Exchange file open the Import HMI Con-
trols Settings dialog by selecting HMI Control Settings... from the Import menu item in
the File menu (Execution has to be stopped when Monaco is in Execution Mode).

A wizard will guide you through the import process:

Step 1: Selection of the Monaco HMI Control Exchange file.

The first wizard dialog Import HMI Control Settings is used to specify the Monaco HMI Con-
trol Exchange file.

Select the source folder.

There are two options:

• User selected: Choose this option to select any folder that contains the HMI Control
Exchange files you want to import.

142
7.2. Importing Layouts and HMI Controls

Click on the ... button on the right to open a folder selection dialog. Browse to the
folder where you have saved the Monaco HMI Control Exchange file. Click OK.
When the folder has been selected, the Monaco HMI Control Exchange files (file ex-
tension *.mnhx) in this folder will be listed in the box below.

• Recent imports: This option allows accessing copies of the recent HMI Control im-
ports.

143
7.2. Importing Layouts and HMI Controls

These files are stored in the Globals folder. The folder path will be automatically dis-
played in the field below and cannot be changed.
The list on the bottom shows all recently imported HMI Control Exchange files in the
left column and the DTS project and the workspace they have been imported to in the
right column.

To delete a file select it and press the Delete button .

To use the file for an import select it and click Next.

The next dialog Import Options offers importing the new HMI Control to the currently loaded
or to a copy of the currently loaded workspace.

Step 2: Selection of the Import Scope

144
7.2. Importing Layouts and HMI Controls

By default the complete HMI Control configuration (settings and service configuration) is
imported.
In case Import the services is selected, only the service configuration is imported.

Press Next > to start the import.

Step 3: Result of the import process and consistency check

145
7.2. Importing Layouts and HMI Controls

Monaco starts importing the settings to the selected HMI Control and is checking the new
settings in the Monaco HMI Control Exchange file against the importing Workspace.
The dialog displays the current step that is performed.

The result will be shown at the end of the text in the dialog.

The button Generate report allows creating a report text file that may help identifying prob-
lems and conflicts during the import process.

In case no errors occurred click Finish to apply the imported settings to the HMI Control.

7.2.4 Workspace Consistency Check

A Monaco workspace always must match with the database of its DTS Project. It references
services and parameters in the database and relies on them to be present.
The Dataserver for the Graphical Instruments and sequences defined in HMI Controls refer-
ence services, parameters and OTX scripts.
Actions like importing or copying configurations from other projects can cause inconsisten-
cies between the Monaco configuration and the content of the ODX database.

Operations affecting Workspace Consistency

Exchanging Layouts and HMI Controls between users or updating database and OTX files
may affect the consistency of a Monaco workspace.

Copy and Paste of HMI Controls or complete Layouts between different projects also can

146
7.2. Importing Layouts and HMI Controls

easily cause inconsistencies.

When a Layout or HMI Control is inserted in a Workspace using Copy and Paste, the Layout
will have an unchecked status. The affected Layout will get a question mark as appendix to
the tab Layout name to indicate that it is not yet checked.
If an HMI Control configuration is copied to the Constant Layout, the Constant Layout button
in the Monaco toolbar will be shown with a question mark in an orange frame .

The Monaco window title will be extended with the text UNCHECKED to clearly indicate that
the workspace was not checked since HMI Controls and Layouts were added.

When a workspace is in state Unchecked or Inconsistent this will also be shown in the Status
Message Area.

Monaco will not be able to execute an inconsistent workspace correctly or it can also cause
Monaco to crash.

The Monaco Workspace Consistency Check can detect these inconsistencies and show
where a problem is located.

Executing a Workspace Consistency Check

To start a Workspace Consistency Check Monaco has to be either in Configuration Mode or

in Execution Mode with Execution stopped.

Note: A Monaco CONF or MIND license is required to execute a consistency check.

Select Check Workspace from the Tools menu or press the Workspace Consistency Check
button.

This will open the Layout selection dialog showing all available Layouts of the Workspace
including the Constant Layout.
Select the Layouts you want to include in the Consistency Check by checking or unchecking
them. By default all Layouts are selected.

147
7.2. Importing Layouts and HMI Controls

Cancel will close the dialog.

Click Check to start the Workspace Consistency Check. Executing the Workspace Consis-
tency Check requires saving all yet unsaved changes in the workspace.

The consistency check is now processing all selected Layout, HMI Controls and their config-
uration. After a while the result is displayed in the information area of the dialog.

148
7.2. Importing Layouts and HMI Controls

To create a report click the Generate Report button. A file dialog with a predefined file name
(MncCheckReport <Timestamp>.txt) will open. Change the file name and the directory to
save the file to your needs.
The Report file contains a summary and the errors found.

When a workspace consistency check fails, the Monaco window title will be extended with
the text INCONSISTENT to clearly indicate that an inconsistent workspace is loaded.

The Layout that contains an HMI control with an inconsistent configuration will get an excla-
mation mark as appendix to the tab Layout name.

If an HMI Control configuration in the Constant Layout is affected, the Constant Layout button
in the Monaco toolbar will be shown with an exclamation mark in a red frame .

If the Dataserver configuration causes a problem the Dataserver button in the Monaco tool-
bar will be shown with an exclamation mark in a red frame .

Close will close the dialog.

The results of the Consistency Check will be saved in the Workspace file. Using the menu
option Open last consistency check result in the Tools menu the results can be displayed
at any time.

Note: When a Workspace or a Layout has been checked successfully, the question or

149
7.2. Importing Layouts and HMI Controls

exclamation marks are removed from the Layout names. The overlaid consistency state is
removed from the toolbar icons.

Layouts that have an unchecked state are marked with an question mark. After a Workspace
Consistency Check that terminates with errors, the questions marks on the tabs and the tool-
bar icons will change to exclamation marks indicating that the Layout contains inconsistent
elements.

7.2.5 Impact of an Import on the Importing Workspace

Data Server Parameter Configuration

The Data Server Parameter Configuration stored in the Monaco Layout Exchange file or the
Monaco HMI Control Exchange file is merged with the Data Server Parameter Configuration
of the current workspace.

Only Data Server Parameters that are not configured in the workspace before the import
will be added. If a Data Server Parameter already exists, its properties will be handled as
follows:

• The property SamplingTime will be set to the lower value when different values are
used.

• The property Cyclic will be set to true if the importing layout has set it to true.

Layout Configuration

The relative position of the layouts to each other will be conserved. The imported layouts are
placed in the Layout Area behind the currently existing permanent layouts and before any
possibly existing temporary layout.

HMI Control Configuration

A data point used by the HMI Control to be imported that is already configured in the desti-
nation workspace will be updated to reference the existing data point.

An imported HMI Control is placed into a new Layout.

HEX and RAW Services

The names of the Hex/Raw services defined in sequences of imported HMI Controls will get

150
a postfix imp.
8 The Monaco HMI Controls
This chapter describes the functionality and user interfaces of HMI Controls (Human Ma-
chine Interface Control).
HMI Controls are specialized interfaces for one distinct user task (in the case of DTS e.g. for
DTC access, coding of an ECUVariant, flash access, reading measurement values, etc.).

The HMI Controls are grouped as follows:

HMI Controls of type Communication

• Bus Trace
• Diagnostic Services
• Symbolic Trace
• OTX

HMI Controls of type Control

• Annotation
• Communication Control
• Logical Link List
• Toggle Sequences

HMI Controls of type Function

• DTC
• ECU Identification
• IO Control (discontinued)
• Flash
• OBD
• Soft Key
• Tool Quick Test

151
8.1. HMI Control Annotation

• Variant Coding

HMI Controls of type Measurement

• Data Display (discontinued)

• Graphical Instrument

• Recorder

• Service Table

8.1 HMI Control Annotation

General Information

Description The HMI Control Annotation is used to insert text, pictures or

links to external PDF and CHM files into a Monaco Layout.
This feature allows extending user specific workspaces to pro-
vide aditional information or help for the user.
HMI Control Classifica- Control
tion
License HMI Library Extension required
Reports not supported

8.1.1 Using the HMI Control Annotation

The HMI Control Annotation may be used to display a text or to reference external docu-
ments.

Features

• Referencing documents using hyperlinks

• Embedding graphics
• RTF files

152
8.1. HMI Control Annotation

• Opening PDF files

• Opening CHM (Compiled HTML help) files

• Input of formatable texts

The following View Modes are supported:

Text with optional background picture

This view mode shows an optional text and/or picture. The text color may be modified by the
Configurator Setting TextColor.
A picture can be added as background. The picture size may be left unchanged or can be
scaled automatically to fit the size of the HMI Control. Use the property View Picture to set
the correct handling.

Text from RTF

The Text from RTF mode loads an RTF (Rich Text Format) file at start up and displays the
content in the annotation field. An RTF file may contain formatted text and graphics.
The properties Text and Background Picture will be ignored in this mode.

153
8.1. HMI Control Annotation

Open files with standard application (active link)

The view mode Open files with standard application (active link) displays a link to a file in the
Annotation HMI control. When the user clicks the link the linked file is opened in an external
viewer, e.g. a PDF file is opened in the default PDF viewer on the system.
Enter the link text in the Text property of the HMI Control Configurator.

The properties Text and Background Picture will be ignored in this mode.

154
8.1. HMI Control Annotation

Open help file chapter (active link)

The view mode Open help file chapter (active link) mode displays a link to a CHM (Compiled
HTML) file in the Annotation HMI control. When the user clicks the link the corresponding
chapter in the help file defined in the property HTML help path is opened.

The properties TextColor and Background Picture are ignored in this mode.

8.1.2 Configuration of the HMI Control Annotation

The look and behavior of the HMI Control in Execution Mode is controlled by the settings
provided by its Configurator.
For information how to work with the Configurator of an HMI Control see chapter Configura-
tion of HMI Controls.

The image below shows the Configurator window with the Common Settings tab selected.

155
8.1. HMI Control Annotation

It contains the following tabs:

• Common Settings

The following buttons are available: Buttons used by the Configurator dialog:

• OK : Saves the current configuration and closes the Configurator

• Cancel: Changes are discarded and the Configurator is closed

• Help: Opens the appropriate chapter in the Monaco help

The following table shows an overview of all Properties and their values of the tab Common
Settings.
Default values are represented by bold letters.

PROPERTY VALUES DESCRIPTION

GROUP /
PROPERTY

156
8.1. HMI Control Annotation

Gen- Annotation/any Name of the HMI Control that will be displayed in its
eral/Caption character string frame.
General/Show true/false Switches visualization of a border frame between on
Frame and off.
General/View Text with Switches the kind of content that is offered in Execu-
Mode optional back- tion mode:
ground pic-
ture/Text from Text with optional background picture: Shows the
RTF/Open files text that is entered in the property Text and an op-
with standard tional background picture of type Bitmap or JPEG
application (ac- that has to be selected in the Property Background
tive link)/Open Picture.
help file chapter Text from RTF: A formatted text from an RTF file is
(active link) shown when Monaco is in Execution Mode. The RTF
file has to be selected in the Property RTF Path.

Open files with standard application (active link):

Creates a link that is associated to a file. When the
link is clicked, an external program that is associated
to the file type by the operating system is launched
to display the file, e.g. a pdf file will be shown in
the Acrobat Reader (if Acrobat is the current default
viewer for pdf files). If a text is entered in the property
Text this text will be shown as link text otherwise the
link to the file will be shown.

Open help file chapter (active link): Creates a link

to a chapter of a CHM help file. The HTML Path re-
quires a special format, see description of the HTML
help path property below.
General/Text empty/any The text that is displayed by the HMI Control when
character string the property View Mode is set to Text with optional
background picture.
General/Text black/any color Color of the displayed text.
Color

157
8.1. HMI Control Annotation

Gen- empty/path to Path to a picture that is displayed in the HMI Control’s

eral/Background an BMP or JPG background.
Picture File
If the picture is located within the active DTS project,
only the relative path within the project is stored. This
is indicated by the prefix <ProjectPath> meaning the
root directory of the active project. This setting en-
ables relocating the project without updating the path
to the picture.
General/View fit to size/no fit to size: The picture is resized to fit completely in
Picture scale the HMI Control.
no scale: No resizing of the picture
General/RTF empty/browse The text taken from a RTF file that is displayed by the
Path to a RTF file HMI Control when the property View Mode is set to
RTF.

If the RTF file is located within the active DTS project,

only the relative path within the project is stored. This
is indicated by the prefix <ProjectPath> meaning the
root directory of the active project. This setting en-
ables relocating the project without updating the path
to the RTF file.
Gen- empty/browse Is activated if View Mode Open files with standard
eral/Additional to a PDF file application (active link) is selected. A hyperlink is
Information shown with the text defined in the Property Text. If
(External the Text field is empty the path to the file and the
Viewer) filename are displayed otherwise the content of the
Property Text is shown.

If the file is located within the active DTS project, only

the relative path within the project is stored. This is
indicated by the prefix <ProjectPath> meaning the
root directory of the active project. This setting en-
ables relocating the project without updating the path
to the file.

158
8.2. HMI Control Bus Trace

General/HTML empty/enter Is activated if View Mode Open help file chapter (ac-
help path path to a tive link) is selected. If the Text field is empty, the link
chapter of URL is displayed otherwise the content of the Prop-
a Compiled erty Text is shown.
HTML (*.chm)
help file You may enter the complete path to the CHM file and
the chapter using the following notation:
mk:@MSITStore:C:\Program
Files\Softing\Diagnostic Tool Set
8\8.06\help\OnlineHelp\Standard\Monaco.chm::
/Html/52372286A79AEC42BF17060B08C2CBDB.html.
This example opens the chapter HMI Control Anno-
tation in the Monaco help file of the DTS installation.

The easiest way to retrieve the correct link of a chap-

ter is to open the CHM file and browse to the appro-
priate chapter.
Then use the context menu entry Properties of the
content window.
In the Properties dialog you will see an Address en-
try.
Copy the Address URL and paste it to the HTML help
path property of the Annotation HMI Control Config-
urator.
Replace any spaces in %20 format with normal
spaces (e.g. C:\Program%20Files\ -> C:\Program
Files\).

8.2 HMI Control Bus Trace

General Information

159
8.2. HMI Control Bus Trace

Description Analysis of offboard and onboard communication at bus level

in hexadecimal notation.
Shows CAN, CAN FD (CAN with Flexible Data Rate) and K-
Line bus trace data on one PhysicalInterfaceLink and allows
recording bus trace data to a file for later analysis in the Ana-
lytics application. The Analytics application is part of the DTS
Basesystem.

Features:

• Copy content of the Bus Trace window by context menu

• Recording of communication to a trace file

• Filtering the output by CAN Id and ECU names

• Representing the output with relative and absolute

timestamps

• The output may be paused for analyzing it during trace

recording

Classification Communication HMI Control

License Basic Monaco License
Reports not supported

8.2.1 Using the HMI Control Bus Trace

Areas of Application

The HMI Control Bus Trace allows fundamental analysis of offboard and onboard communi-
cation at bus level (hexadecimal notation).

Features

• The ECU communication can be recorded to a file for later analysis in the Analytics
application.

• The content of the Output Area may be copied to the Windows clipboard.

• The output can be filtered by using CAN Identifiers.

160
8.2. HMI Control Bus Trace

• Time Stamps can be configured to be shown in absolute or relative notation.

• Output can be paused to be analyzed during communication.

• Tracing can be configured to be started automatically as soon as the workspace was

loaded.

The user interface of the HMI Control Bus Trace consists of two parts, a toolbar and the
Output View, see figure below.

Output View

The color of a row indicates source of the content:

Color Source
Black Data sent by the Tester
Blue Data received by the
Tester
Red Error

161
8.2. HMI Control Bus Trace

The trace window displays at least three columns:

Time Stamp

In the first column the time stamp is provided. There are two different kinds of time stamps
(absolute and relative) which are accessible by the Configurator of this HMI Control. The
time stamp is always displayed in a decimal format. The figure below explains the different
types of time stamps.

Message Identifier

The second column of the trace window displays the message identifier (e.g. CAN Identifier )
of each sent Request and the corresponding Response or CAN Frame. The identifiers are
displayed in hexadecimal format.
CAN frames with 29 bit CAN Identifier are shown with an x appended to the CAN
Identifier.

CAN FD frames are also marked by an additional flag appended to the CAN
Identifier.
An f as extension indicates a CAN FD frame. An fb extension indicates a CAN
FD frame with Baudrate switching in the data sending phase.

The flags x and f/fb may also occur together.

Depending on the setting of the property Map CANID to the message identifier may have
different representations.

Data

The third and last column displays the raw data of each sent Request (represented by black

162
8.2. HMI Control Bus Trace

color) and the corresponding received Response (represented by blue color) in hexadecimal
format.

The content of the output view or part of it may be copied to the Windows clipboard. Before

that stop the output view by clicking the button .

Select one or more trace lines and right-click them to show a context menu.
Note: You may select multiple lines by holding down the CTRL key while clicking on them.
Form the context menu select:

• Copy Cell to copy the content of the right-clicked cell in the selected line.

• Copy to copy all of the selected lines

• Select All to select the whole content of the output view.

Note: You may also use CTRL+C to copy the selected lines.

Toolbar

The second part of the user interface of the HMI Control Bus Trace is the Toolbar. The table
below gives an overview about the elements of the toolbar.

Button Description

Starts monitoring on the corresponding Physical Interface Link -> output

starts; precondition for trace file recording

Stops monitoring on the corresponding Physical Interface Link

Starts tracing to a previously defined trace file. If no trace file was defined
before a default trace file is used.
Trace files will be stored in the traces subfolder of the current DTS project.

Stops tracing to the trace file.

Pauses tracing to the trace file.

Stops the output and enables scrolling; enables the user to scroll back to
displayed bus events which are already out of the visible area of the Output
View.

163
8.2. HMI Control Bus Trace

Continues the output and disables scrolling

Create and edit CAN Filters.

Clears the Output View.

Applies the selected CAN Filters to the content of the Output View.

Button Opens the Configurator of the HMI Control in Execution Mode.

Config-
ure...

8.2.2 Configuration of the HMI Control BusTrace

The look and behavior of the HMI Control in Execution Mode is controlled by the settings
provided by its Configurator.
For information how to work with the Configurator of an HMI Control see chapter Configura-
tion of HMI Controls.

The image below shows the Configurator window with the Common Settings tab selected.

164
8.2. HMI Control Bus Trace

It contains the following tab:

• Common Settings: Settings that control the look and behavior of the HMI Control (de-
scribed below)

The following buttons are available:

• OK : Saves the current configuration and closes the Configurator

• Cancel: Changes are discarded and the Configurator is closed
• Help: Opens the appropriate chapter in the Monaco help

The table below describes all properties of the tab Common Settings and their value range .
Default values are represented in bold letters.

165
8.2. HMI Control Bus Trace

Property Default Value / Description

Group / Prop- Value Range
erty
Gen- Bus Trace/any Name of the HMI Control that will be displayed in its
eral/Caption character string frame.
This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
General/Show true/ false Switches visualization of a border frame between on
Frame and off.
This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
General/use CAN1/ Determines the Physical Interface Link used for com-
PhysicalInter- depends on the munication
faceLink Configuration of
the used hard-
ware interface
General/ absolute/relative Determines the type of time stamp that is used for
TimeStamp displaying the data in the output view
Type
General/ <Name of Sets the configurable part <trace file name> of of
TraceFile name the Physical the trace file name.
Interface Link The name of the trace file has the following format:
e.g. CAN1>/ <timestamp> <trace file name>.trc
any string The format of <timestamp> is yyyy-mm-dd hh-mi-ss
(yyyy=year, mm=month, dd=day, hh=hour in 24h for-
mat, mi=minutes, ss=seconds).

Changing the trace file name in Execution Mode is

allowed. The change is applied when the trace file is
opened for the next trace file recording. The file name
for the current trace recording will keep the former
naming until it is closed.

The trace file will be stored in the folder BusTrace lo-

cated in the traces folder of the current DTS project.
The content can be viewed using the Analytics ap-
plication contained in the DTS Base System.
General/Fixed false/true Every CANID gets its own row in the output area
View

166
8.2. HMI Control Bus Trace

General/Map ID/
CANID to Message This property determines how the CAN Identifier is
name/ interpreted by the HMI Control. It is only available if
Message name the physical interface link is a CAN bus. The ECU
and ID/ name is taken from the ODX database or, if the CAN
ECU Identifier is not defined in the ODX database, from a
name/ECU DBC file that was added to the DTS project.
name and ID/
J1939 style ID: Shows the CAN Identifier as hexadecimal num-
ber.

message name: Shows the message name instead

of the CAN Identifier.
Shows PHYS REQUEST or PHYS RESPONSE
when the CAN Identifier is defined for Physical Ad-
dressing in the ODX database.
Shows FUNCT REQUEST when the CAN Identi-
fier is defined for Functional Addressing in the ODX
database.
For CAN Identifiers not defined in the ODX database
the message name from a a DBC file that was added
to the DTS project is used.

message name and ID: Shows both, the message

name and the CAN Identifier.

ECU name: Displays the ECU Short Name instead

of the CAN Identifier.
Displays the ECU Short Name that is associated to
the CAN Identifier in the ODX database.
For CAN Identifiers not defined in the ODX database
the ECU name from a a DBC file that was added to
the DTS project is used.

ECU name and ID: Displays the ECU Short Name

and the CAN Identifier.

J1939 style: Available for bus type J1939 only. Dis-

plays 29 bit CAN Identifiers as hexadecimal value
separated in 3 groups: Priority (3 Bit), PGN (18 Bit),
Source Address (8 Bit). 11 bit CAN Identifiers are
presented as one hex value.

167
8.3. HMI Control Communication Control

General/ None / Start Defines the behavior when Monaco execution is

Startup Behav- Visual Trace / started.
ior Start Visual &
File Trace None: The visual trace or the file trace are not started
automatically.
Start Visual Trace: The HMI Control starts tracing
the diagnostic communication and displays the trace
events in the Display Area.
Start Visual & File Trace: The HMI Control starts
to trace the diagnostic communication. The trace
events are displayed in the Display Area and written
to a trace file.

General/ false/true The Num column is displayed showing a consecutive

Num Column number for every row.
General/ false/true Indicates the FlexRay-State
State Column
General/ false/true The DLC column is displayed indicating the number
Show DLC of bytes in a message. DLC is the abbreviation of
Data Length Code.
Configure But- false/true Enables or disables the Configure Button in the HMI
ton/Visible Control.
This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.

8.3 HMI Control Communication Control

General Information

Description The HMI Control Communication Control is intended to control

Logical Links. It is used to initialize and terminate the commu-
nication to ECUs by a configurable sequence of services and
ComPrimitives, e.g. it offers a very simple way to automatically
transfer several ECUs into a special diagnostic mode.
Classification Control HMI Control
License HMI Library Extension required
Reports not supported

168
8.3. HMI Control Communication Control

8.3.1 Using the HMI Control Communication Control

The HMI Control Communication Control allows gaining control on Logical Links. This
means, since a Communication HMI Control assumes that all needed Logical Links work
within a correct state the Communication Control sets these states.

Therefore it provides sequences for initialization of communication, exiting the communi-

cation and to resume states after an error. These sequences are available via meth-
ods/operations.

The methods/operations can be easily omitted via the configuration to allow full control on
the Logical Links by the application exclusively.

The HMI Control provides the following three methods/operations:

• InitSequence:
Used to initialize the entire communication with regard to the selected Protocol, ECU,
etc. Usually this sequence contains e.g. a ComPrimitive GotoOnline, StartCommuni-
cation, a DiagnosticService StartDiagnosticSession and a Job SecurityAccess with all
related ECUs.
• ExitSequence:
Used to stop the communication started via the InitSequence method/operation. Usu-
ally contains a ComPrimitive StopCommunication.
• ErrorSequence:
Used to resume the LogicalLinks states after a communication error occurred. Usually
contains a GoToOffline ComPrimitive for all related ECUs, which ensures that calling
the InitSequence allows to restart the communication from an appropriate state (if
possible).
All of the three operations/methods are represented by a button in the user interface of the
HMI Control. The figure below shows the user interface in the Execution Mode in the case
the default settings in the Configurator were not changed.

169
8.3. HMI Control Communication Control

8.3.2 Configuration of the HMI Control Communication Control

The look and behavior of the HMI Control in Execution Mode is controlled by the settings
provided by its Configurator.
For information how to work with the Configurator of an HMI Control see chapter Configura-
tion of HMI Controls.

The image below shows the Configurator window with the Common Settings tab selected.

It contains the following tabs on the left:

• Common Settings: Settings that control the look and behavior of the HMI Control (de-
scribed below)

• Filters: Settings for filtering Logical Links that are not required

• Predefined Sequence Tabs: Init Sequence, Exit Sequence and Error Sequence
Please see chapter Designing Sequences of Services, ComPrimitives and OTX Scripts
for creating sequences of services and ComPrimitives

The tabs on the right Services, ComPrimitives and Configuration are used for designing the
sequences.

• Services: For detailed information about the tab Services please see chapter Config-
uration of Services and ComPrimitives

• ComPrimitives: For detailed information about the tab ComPrimitives please see chap-
ter Configuration of Services and ComPrimitives

170
8.3. HMI Control Communication Control

• Configuration: The usage of the tab Configuration is the same as described in chapter
Configuration of Services and ComPrimitives

The following buttons are available:

• OK : Saves the current configuration and closes the Configurator

• Cancel: Changes are discarded and the Configurator is closed

• Help: Opens the appropriate chapter in the Monaco help

The table below describes all properties of the tab Common Settings and their value range .
Default values are represented in bold letters.

Property Default Value / Description

Group / Prop- Value Range
erty
General/ Communication Name of the HMI Control that will be displayed in its
Caption Control/ any frame.
character string
General/ true/ false Switches visualization of a border frame between on
Show Frame and off.
General/ true/ false Switches visualization of Services between on and
Show Services off.
General/ true/ false Switches visualization of FunctionalClasses (includ-
Show Func- ing Services) between on and off.
tional Classes
General/ true/ false Switches visualization of LongName between on and
Show Long- off
Names
General/ horizontal/ ver- vertical: buttons are placed beneath each other
Layout tical horizontal: buttons are placed from left to right
General/ false/true Switches visualization of LogicalLinks on ECUVari-
Show LogicalL- ants in the tabs Filters, Services and ComPrimitives
inks on Variants of the Configurator.
General/ None/Start The defined sequence is started automatically at
Startup Behav- Init Sequence start
ior / Start Exit Se-
quence / Start
Error Sequence
General/ false/ true
Wait for finish

171
8.4. HMI Control Data Display (Discontinued)

General/ false/true The communication starts automatically, if the com-

Auto Start munication has not been started already. If the ser-
Communication vice belongs to a Base Variant a VariantIdentificatio-
nAndSelection ComPrimitive will be executed.
Init Sequence/ true/ false Switches visualization of the button between on and
Visible off
Init Se- Init Sequence/ Caption of the button
quence/Caption any character
string
Init Sequence/ Stop/ any char- Caption of the button after it was pressed in the Exe-
Run Caption acter string cution Mode
Exit Sequence/ true/ false Switches visualization of the button between on and
Visible off
Exit Sequence/ Exit Se- Caption of the button
Caption quence/ any
character string
Exit Sequence/ Stop/ any char- Caption of the button after it was pressed in the Exe-
Run Caption acter string cution Mode
Error Se- true/ false Switches visualization of the button between on and
quence/ off
Visible
Error Se- Error Se- Caption of the button
quence/Caption quence/ any
character string
Error Se- Stop/ any char- Caption of the button after it was pressed in the Exe-
quence/ acter string cution Mode
Run Caption

8.4 HMI Control Data Display (Discontinued)

General Information

This HMI Control is not supported any more for new workspaces. It can still be
executed in existing workspaces.
Its functionality is now part of the Service Table HMI Control.

172
8.4. HMI Control Data Display (Discontinued)

Description The HMI Control DataDisplay displays measurement values

read from ECUs once or cyclically.
Services may be activated and deactivated during runtime.
The sampling rate can be configured individually.
Services can be added simply and fast using Drag and Drop
from the Service Tree. Alias names for service parameters are
supported.
Classification Measurement HMI Control
License HMI Library Extension required
Reports not supported

8.4.1 Using the HMI Control Data Display

The HMI Control Data Display shows a list of services with their parameters. The values of
the parameters are retrieved from one or more ECUs.

The image below shows the user interface of the HMI Control HMI Control DataDisplay.

Process Values list

This Process Values list displays the values retrieved from the ECU.
Use the icons to change the text size of the content in the process value table.

• Diagnostic Service
Displays the name of the Diagnostic Service that is used to retrieve the value.
The check box in front of the service name determines if the associated Diagnostic
Service is executed after the Start button was pressed or not. If the checkbox is ac-
tivated the Service is executed. Enabling or disabling a Diagnostic Service using this
checkbox is also supported during run time.

The colored flag in front of the check box is called Execution State. A green flag is
shown while the service is executed, a red flag indicates an error.

173
8.4. HMI Control Data Display (Discontinued)

• Logical Link
Shows the corresponding Logical Link (ECU) the Diagnostic Service belongs to.

• Time(ms)
This column displays the execution time of the appropriate Diagnostic Service.
The Execution time is the time from sending the service until the response is received,
interpreted and displayed in the user interface.

• Cycle(ms)
The cycle time represents the time interval the Diagnostic Service is sent to the ECU.
The cycle time can be set in Execution Mode by double-clicking into the appropriate
cell.

• Response Param
A Diagnostic Service can contain one or more Response Parameters. Which Re-
sponse Parameters are displayed can be configured in the Configurator of the HMI
Control. The column shows the Response Parameter that delivers the required value.

• Value
This column displays the interpreted value of the ECU response.

• Unit
This column shows the unit associated to the interpreted value (if available).

• RangeInfo
When a range information is available in the ODX database, this column shows in-
formation about the validity of the value. The Configuration property Display Column
RangeInfo determines if the column RangeInfo is shown or hidden.

The following values may be displayed:

Value OK : The value is within a valid range.
Value not valid: The value is in an invalid area.
Value not defined: The value is in an area, which is marked in a specification (e.g. as
reserved).
Value not available: The value is in a currently invalid area. The value usually is
presented by the ECU but can currently not be performed due to e.g. initialisation or
temporary problems.

If internal scale contraints are available in the database they are added to the Range-
Info in brackets.

Rows with a RangeInfo other than Value OK are printed in red.

174
8.4. HMI Control Data Display (Discontinued)

When a value of a parameter is not available (e.g. because of an interpetation

error) the row with the parameter will be printed in red. Other values from other
parameters of the associated service will be processed and displayed normally.

Using the HMI Control

Click the Start button to start the data acquisition from the ECUs. While data acquisition is
running the caption of the button changes from Start to Stop.

When the Frequent checkbox is activated data will be read from the ECU cyclically using
the individual cycle time configureed for each service. If this option is disabled the data will
be read only once right after pressing the Start button. The status of the check box can not
be changed during run time.

It is also possible to set the startup behavior to autostart.

Single process values might be omitted during run time to optimize performance.

• When you select and delete a row with a Response Parameter entry in the Data Display
the associated service will be removed with all its parameters.

• By holding down the CTRL key, you may select multiple process value entries at a time.

Using the Service Tree

The Data Display HMI Control supports Drag and Drop of services from the Service Tree
HMI Control. You may drag and drop services and functional classes into the Data Display
HMI Control. If these have request parameters the default values for these parameters will
be used. A dialog will be shown if there are no default values defined for that parameter. So
you may enter the correct ones.

175
8.4. HMI Control Data Display (Discontinued)

This dialog will also be shown when you hold down the CTRL key while executing a Drag and
Drop of a service. The dialog allows selecting which response parameter will be displayed
in the Data Display HMI Control.
The request parameters will be configurable as well.

Click Save to accept the configuration for this parameter.

Click Cancel to reject the parameter settings and go on to the next parameter.
Click Abort to reject this parameter setting and all further ones.

You may Drag and Drop multiple services and functional classes at a time. The parameters
of each service contained will be processed one after the other, e.g. when holding down the
CTRL key while executing a Drag and Drop action, you will get a parameter selection dialog
for every service that was selected or is contained in a functional class.

The Data Display HMI Control supports only the service types Service and Simple Service.
A Service contains 0 to n request parameters and 0 to m response parameters.
A Simple Service contains 0 to n request parameters and 0 to 1 response parameters.
A response parameter of these service types will be displayed if it is part of a positive re-
sponse and if it has the parameter type eVALUE and data type Simple Data Type (see ASAM
Specification).
An error message with the following error text will appear if this is not the case:
No valid response parameter available: There is no response parameter to display.

176
8.4. HMI Control Data Display (Discontinued)

The following response parameter is invalid: The response parameter is not of the correct
type.

If you press OK the next parameter will be processed. Clicking Cancel aborts the process.

8.4.2 Configuration of the HMI Control Data Display

The Configurator Settings control the behavior of the HMI Control Data Display in Execution
Mode.

The Configurator contains the following tabs:

• Common Settings

• Filters

• Display Data

The following buttons are available:

• OK : Saves the current configuration and closes the Configurator

• Cancel: Changes are discarded and the Configurator is closed

• Help: Opens the appropriate chapter in the Monaco help

8.4.2.1 Common Settings

The image below shows the dialog window Data Display - Configurator with the Common
Settings tab opened.

177
8.4. HMI Control Data Display (Discontinued)

The following table shows an overview of all Properties and their values of the tab Common
Settings. Default values are represented in bold letters.

Property Default Value / Description

Group / Prop- Value Range
erty
Gen- Data Dis- Name of the HMI Control that will be displayed in its
eral/Caption play/any char- frame.
acter string This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
General/Show true/false If true, the border frame of the HMI Control is dis-
Frame played else no border frame is displayed.
This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
General/Show true/false If true, Services are displayed in the Services tab of
Services the Configurator.
General/Show false/true If true, FunctionalClasses (including Services) are
Functional- displayed in the Services tab of the Configurator.
Classes

178
8.4. HMI Control Data Display (Discontinued)

General/Show true/ false If true, Long Names are displayed in the Process Val-
LongNames ues list, if false Short Names are shown.
General/Show true/false If true, Logical Links of Variants are displayed in the
LogicalLinks on Filters and Services tab of the Configurator.
Variants This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
Gen- None/Autostart Allows executing the Data Display HMI Control at
eral/Startup program start automatically.
Behavior This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
General/Auto false/true The communication starts automatically, if the com-
Start Communi- munication has not been started already. If the ser-
cation vice belongs to a Base Variant a VariantIdentificatio-
nAndSelection ComPrimitive will be executed.
Process true/false If true, the column Diagnostic Service is displayed in
Values Win- the Process Values list, if false it is hidden.
dow/Display
Service Names
Process true/false If true, the column Alias is displayed in the Process
Values Win- Values list, if false it is hidden.
dow/Display
Alias Name
Process true/false If true, the column Logical Link is displayed in the
Values Win- Process Values list, if false it is hidden.
dow/Display
Link Name
Process true/false If true, the column Time for service execution is dis-
Values Win- played in the Process Values list, if false it is hidden.
dow/Display
Time
Process true/false If true, the column Cycle is displayed in the Process
Values Win- Values list, if false it is hidden.
dow/Display
Cycle
Process true/false If true, the column Response Param is displayed in
Values Win- the Process Values list, if false it is hidden.
dow/Display
Response
Parameters

179
8.4. HMI Control Data Display (Discontinued)

Process true/false If true, the column Unit is displayed in the Process

Values Win- Values list, if false it is hidden.
dow/Display
Unit
Process true/false If true, the column RangeInfo is displayed in the Pro-
Values Win- cess Values list, if false it is hidden.
dow/Display
Column Range-
Info
Process Values true/false If true, the check boxes in front of the Diagnostic Ser-
Window/Allow vice are displayed allowing to skip the execution of
Service Omis- services during runtime. If false the checkboxes are
sion hidden, so the user is not able to skip the execution
of certain services.
Process true/false Determines if the Execution State icon in front of the
Values Win- Diagnostic Service (colored flag) is displayed in the
dow/Display user interface.
Execution State
Start But- true/false If true, the button Start is displayed in the in the user
ton/Visible interface, if false it is hidden.
Start But- Start/any char- Caption of the Start button.
ton/Caption acter string
Start But- Stop/any char- Caption of the Start button after it was pressed in the
ton/Run Cap- acter string Execution Mode.
tion
Start But- true/false If true, the Frequent checkbox is displayed in the user
ton/Show interface, if false it is hidden.
Frequent Box
Start But- true/false Determines if the check box Frequent is checked by
ton/Check default.
Frequent Box
Configure But- false/true Enables or disables the Configure Button in the HMI
ton/Visible Control.
This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.

8.4.2.2 Filters
The tab Filters is used to configure the contents of the tab Services on the right side of the
dialog window Data Display - Configurator. In the case of the HMI Control Data Display using

180
8.4. HMI Control Data Display (Discontinued)

filters has no effect on the user interface. For detailed information about filters please have
a look at the chapter Using Filters.

The Filters tab allows controlling the Logical Links shown in the tab Services of the HMI
Control.

It has the following layout:

The Filters tab lists all Logical Links of the current DTS project.

The following table gives an overview of all properties and their values of the tab Filters.
Default values are represented in bold letters.

Property Default Description

Group / Value /
Property Value
Range
LogicalL- off/on on: enables Logical Link filtering,
ink filter off: every Logical Link of the current DTS project is
listed in the tab Services of the HMI Control.
Logi- pass/reject pass: this Logical Link will be listed in Logical Link
calLink list of the DTC HMI Control;
filter/Link reject: this Logical Link will not be listed
Name
Function- off/on on: enables Functional Classes filtering,
alClasses off: every Functional Class of the current DTS
filter project is listed in the tab Services of the HMI Con-
trol.

181
8.4. HMI Control Data Display (Discontinued)

Functional pass/reject pass: this Functional Class will be listed in Logical

Class fil- Link list of the HMI Control;
ter/Functional reject: this Functional Class will not be listed
Class
Name

8.4.2.3 Display Data

Figure from below shows the dialog window Data Display - Configurator.

The tab Display Data: lists all services that retrieve data from ECUs. These Services and
the data are displayed in the list Process Value of the user interface.
The structure and the handling of this tab is the same as described in chapter Sequences.

Please be aware that at least one RequestParameter must be checked in the tab Config-
uration to display the selected Diagnostic Service in the list box Process Value in the user
interface.

Add Services

To add a service that retrieves data select one from the tree in the Services tab.
Use the green arrow showing to the left to add it to the list of services in the tab Display Data.

Configure Services

To configure a service select it in the tab Display Data.

182
8.5. HMI Control Diagnostic Services

Open the tab Configuration on the right side.

Check or uncheck Parameters in the section Symbolic Responses to select the symbolic
responses you want to be listed in the Process Value list.
The Property group Others is a special group for the Configurator of the HMI Control Data
Display. Using the Property sampling time the default time interval for this Diagnostic Service
can be changed.

The Property group Execution provides the property executeOnActiveVariant.

8.5 HMI Control Diagnostic Services

General Information

Description The HMI Control Diagnostic Services allows data verification

and communication test for diagnostics experts with full ac-
cess to functions and sequences

Features

• Configuration and execution of services, jobs, ComPrim-

itives and HexServices e.g. for verification of a data de-
scription.

• Set up of simple test sequences that can contain several

services, jobs and ComPrimitives. The sequences can
be started easily by pressing the associated button.

• Setup of communication to one or more ECUs

• Analysis of diagnostic communication at symbolic level

with configurable output display

Classification Communication HMI Control

License Basic Monaco License
Reports supported

8.5.1 Using the HMI Control Diagnostic Services

The HMI Control Diagnostic Services provides complete access to Diagnostic Services, in-
cluding Request Parameters, and visualizes the entire communication on the message and

183
8.5. HMI Control Diagnostic Services

Process Values level.

Features

• Configuration and execution of services, jobs, ComPrimitives and HexServices

• Simple test sequences that contain several services can be set up.

• Assembly of services at PDU level

• Sequences can be configured to be started automatically as soon as the workspace

was loaded.

The Request Parameters for a selected Diagnostic Service can be set on a symbolic level.

Additionally, configurable buttons allow access to frequently used functions like DTC reading,
ECU identification, ECU reset, etc. The display can be stored to a file for documentation
purpose.

Access to the database is given via a database browser similar to DTS Venice. The database
browser allows defining filters on a Logical Link and Functional Class level. These filters
avoid presenting more information than needed during runtime.

The user has also the possibility to send ComPrimitives to the hardware interface (e.g. Ap-
plying Protocol Parameter Sets, HexServices, etc).

The look and feel depends on the settings of the HMI Control Configurator.

The Figure below shows the user interface of the HMI Control DiagnosticServices after send-
ing the service readDataByIdentifier.

184
8.5. HMI Control Diagnostic Services

Diagnostic tree

The display area Diagnostic provides a tree of all services that are available within a Logical
Link of the database in the DTS Project. These Diagnostic Services can be sorted by using
Functional Classes.

The communication can be started via context menu, by double-clicking or pressing Enter
on an ECU from the diagnostic tree. This will take over the state of the Logical Link from
other HMI Controls to the HMI Control Diagnostic Services and vice versa.
A double-click or pressing Enter on an ECU that is in state communication will close the
Logical Link.

Creating Temporary Layouts

The context menu also offers the option New tab for Logical Link which will open a new
Monaco Layout with a maximized Diagnostic Services HMI Control. The HMI Control is only
able to handle the Logical Link used in the context menu that triggered the new Layout.
Bus Communication is started automatically for this Logical Link. Once the new Layout is
created, a right-click on its tab headline will enable you to remove the Layout again. The
Layout exists only during the Monaco session for this Workspace. It cannot be saved.

Searching Services

The Diagnostic Services HMI Control features a Search option. To start a search choose a
node in the tree of Diagnostic Services you want to search through. Click in the search field
located above the Diagnostic Services tree (or press CTRL+F) and enter a string you want

185
8.5. HMI Control Diagnostic Services

to search for. A box will open with all items that matched the search string listed. When you
select an item, the box is closed and the item is marked in the tree of Diagnostic Services.
By enabling the checkbox Global Search the whole database will be searched. In case of a
large database the search can take several minutes.

Settings for Services and ComPrimitives

The tab Settings shows the currently selected Logical Link and Diagnostic Service or Com-
Primitive. The parameters of the current service including their current values and units are
shown. The current value of the Request Parameter may be changed by double-clicking the
value of the parameter.

For the ComPrimitive StartCommunication the name and parameters of the associated ser-
vice or job are displayed.

The tab Description contains all database description elements of the service itself and the
corresponding Request Parameters.
Audiences and Additional Audiences associated with the selected service are displayed in
section [Audience] located behind section [Description]
The information displayed in the tab is taken from the diagnostic database.

Process Values

The complete communication is visualized in the Process Values list. The PDU of the Re-
quest of the sent Diagnostic Service is displayed (see figure above). The PDU of the Re-
sponse is also shown. Furthermore the Response is shown on a symbolic level. Additionally,
colors are used to inform the user about Warnings (green) or Errors (red). Messages sent
from the ECU are displayed in blue characters, messages sent from the HMI Control to the
ECU are displayed in black characters. The items shown in the Process Values window may
be selected in the Configurator of the HMI Control.

ShortName
Shows the Short Name of the object in the database.

Value
Shows the Value of the object.

Unit
Shows the Unit of the Value, if available.

RangeInfo
When a range information is available in the ODX database, this column shows information
about the validity of the value.

The following values may be displayed:

Value OK : The value is within a valid range.

186
8.5. HMI Control Diagnostic Services

Value not valid: The value is in an invalid area.

Value not defined: The value is in an area, which is marked in a specification (e.g. as
reserved).
Value not available: The value is in a currently invalid area. The value usually is presented by
the ECU but can currently not be performed due to e.g. initialisation or temporary problems.

If internal scale contraints are available in the database they are added to the RangeInfo in
brackets.

Rows with a RangeInfo other than Value OK are printed in red.

Error
Shows error messages.

Buttons

Current Selection

Clicking the button Transmit transmits the selected Diagnostic Service on the bus once. If the
check box Cyclic is enabled the Diagnostic Service will be sent cyclically until it is stopped.
The cycle time in milliseconds may be set in the field next to the check box. When cyclic
transmission is active, the caption of the button Transmit switches to Stop.

You also may double-click a service in order to transmit it.

Transmit preconfigured

This group can contain up to four sequence buttons (Sequence 1...4).

A Sequence button starts a series of Diagnostic Services, OTX scripts or ComPrimitives.

See chapter Designing Sequences for details.

The Transmit preconfigured group with the Sequence buttons are disabled by default. You
have to activate at least one of the Sequence buttons in the Configurator in order to get the
button displayed in the user interface.

Semantic Selection

The Diagnostic Services HMI Control provides the Semantic Selection button that allows
sending all services of the selected ECU in the Diagnostic tree that are tagged with a special
SEMANTIC flag in the database.

The Semantic Selection button is disabled by default. To enable it, set the Configurator
setting Sematic Selection Button/visible to true.

The ODX Standard allows setting a SEMANTIC attribute for services and jobs in the
database. The SEMANTIC flag adds additional, classifying information to the service or

187
8.5. HMI Control Diagnostic Services

job that refers to the context it is used for. There is a set of predefined SEMANTIC flags in
the ODX Standard as e.g. IDENTIFICATION for services that are used to read ECU identifi-
cation data.

The SEMANTIC flags that shall be used to select the services are enumerated in the read-
only property Sematic Selection Button/Semantic.

To compose the set of SEMANTIC flags that shall be used for selecting the services, go to
the last tab on the left side in the Configurator. Its name corresponds to the caption of the
sematic button (setting Sematic Selection Button/Caption).
From the box on the top of the tab select an ECU where you expect the required SEMANTIC
flags. All ECUs that pass the Logical Link filter (if there is any) will be shown in the list.
Note: The HMI Control does not automatically check alle ECUs in the database for all
Semantic flags as this may lead to peformace issues for large databases

The HMI Control looks for the SEMANTIC flags used by the selected ECU in the database.
Checkmark a SEMANTIC flag in the list. The SEMANTIC flag will be added to the set of
SEMANTIC flags.

When the Sematic Selection button is pressed, the set of SEMANTIC flags is applied to
retrieve the services of the selected ECU in the database.
The services and jobs that have a SEMANTIC flag that matches one of the configured SE-
MANTIC flags will be excuted. The original Logical Link from where they were added to the
set does not matter.

The configuration and settings made for the Semantic Selection button are stored
in the Monaco workspace file. They will be availbale the next time the workspace
is loaded.

Configure

Using the Configurator of the HMI Control a button Configure can be inserted in the user
interface to get direct access to the Configurator in Execution Mode during runtime. This is
not a default setting and therefore it is not visible by default.

Scroll bars appear automatically for Database, Parameter, Description and Process Values
lists if the number of entries exceeds the visible area.

Keyboard Operation

Using the <Tab> key (without holding shift key) you can move through the following controls:

• Diagnostic tree

188
8.5. HMI Control Diagnostic Services

• Settings / Description tab

• Parameter settings list (if list is visible and not empty!)
• PDU edit field (if visible and enabled)
• Transmit button (if enabled)
• Sequence buttons (from 1 upto 4, if visible)
• Semantic button (if visible)
• Process values list
• Configure button (if visible)

Generating Reports

To generate a report use the Monaco Report feature.

The report contains the output of the process values window.

8.5.2 Configuration of the HMI Control Diagnostic Services

The look and behavior of the HMI Control in Execution Mode is controlled by the settings
provided by its Configurator.
For information how to work with the Configurator of an HMI Control see chapter Configura-
tion of HMI Controls.

The image below shows the Configurator window with the Common Settings tab selected.

189
8.5. HMI Control Diagnostic Services

It contains the following tabs:

• Common Settings: Settings that control the look and behavior of the HMI Control (de-
scribed below)

• Filters: Settings for filtering Logical Links that are not required
• Sequence tabs Sequence 1...4: Configuration interface for creating sequences of ser-
vices and ComPrimitives

The tabs on the right Services, ComPrimitives and Configuration are used for designing the
sequences.

• Services: For detailed information about the tab Services please see chapter Config-
uration of Services and ComPrimitives

• ComPrimitives: For detailed information about the tab ComPrimitives please see chap-
ter Configuration of Services and ComPrimitives

• Configuration: The usage of the tab Configuration is the same as described in chapter
Configuration of Services and ComPrimitives

The section Execution in the tab Configuration provides additional elements not used by
other HMI Controls:
generic and skip.

When generic is checked, the execution of the appropriate Service is not bound to a specific
Logical Link. It is marked as generic in the LogicalLink column of the sequence.
This allows executing the service for different Logical Links, i.e. for the currently selected
Logical Link in the HMI Control when the sequence is started.
To make this work, the Service must exist in the different Logical Links.
The Logical Link that will be used is the one that is selected in the user interface of the HMI
Control during execution mode .

When skip is checked, the Service/Command in the sequence is skipped during execution.
This will allow the user to disable elements of a sequence temporarily without deleting it
completely.

The following buttons are available:

• OK : Saves the current configuration and closes the Configurator

• Cancel: Changes are discarded and the Configurator is closed
• Help: Opens the appropriate chapter in the Monaco help

190
8.5. HMI Control Diagnostic Services

8.5.2.1 Common Settings

The following table shows an overview of all properties and their values of the tab Common
Settings. Default values are represented in bold letters.

Property Default Value / Description

Group / Prop- Value Range
erty
Gen- Diagnostic Name of the HMI Control that will be displayed in its
eral/Caption Services/any surrounding frame.
character string This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
General/Show true/false If true, the border frame of the HMI Control is dis-
Frame played else no border frame is displayed.
This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
General/View true/false If true, the PDU edit field of the HMI Control is dis-
PDU played else it is not displayed.
This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
General/Allow true/false If true, editing the PDU is allowed else editing is not
PDU editing allowed.
This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
General/Show true/false If true, Diagnostic Services are shown.
Services
General/Show true/false If true, Hex and Raw Services are shown.
Hex and Raw
Services
General/Show true/false If true, Protocol Parameter Sets are shown.
Protocol Pa-
rameter Sets
General/Show true/false If true, ComPrimitives are shown.
ComPrimitives
Gen- Functional Switches sorting mode.
eral/Sorting Class/Ascending/Semantic

191
8.5. HMI Control Diagnostic Services

General/Show true/ false If true, the HMI Control uses the Long Names in
LongNames the Configurator and user interfaces for presenting
database objects (links, services, parameters...), if
false Short Names are shown.
General/Show ServiceID/None Sets the format of the Identifier.
Identifier ServiceID and
DataID
General/Show true/false If true, Protocols are shown.
Protocol Layer
General/Show true/false If true, Functional Groups are shown.
Functional
Group Layer
General/Auto true/false If true, the Output Window is cleared automatically.
clear output
window
General/Show true/false If true, the Variants of the Base Variant are displayed.
LogicalLinks on This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
Variants rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
Gen- None/Start Se- If one of the options Start Sequence 1..4 is selected,
eral/Startup quence 1/Start the sequence defined in the appropriate Sequence
Behavior Sequence tab of the Diagnostic Services HMI Control is started
2/Start Se- automatically when Monaco starts execution.
quence 3/Start
Sequence 4 Execution is started automatically when the option
Start automatically after loading in the Workspace
Options dialog is activated and a workspace is
loaded in Execution Mode or Monaco switches from
Configuration Mode to Execution Mode. In Execution
Mode execution can be started manually when the
execution has been stopped before by pressing the
Start button, F5 or using the menu entry Start from
the Execution menu.

This property cannot be changed when the Configu-

rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.

192
8.5. HMI Control Diagnostic Services

General/Auto true/false If set to true and the communication has not been
Start Communi- started already, executing a service or HEX service
cation will cause Monaco to perform a StartCommunication
ComPrimitive before sending the service. If the ser-
vice belongs to a Base Variant a VariantIdentificatio-
nAndSelection ComPrimitive will be additionally exe-
cuted before sending the service.

If set to false, the communication will not be started

automatically. The StartCommunication and VariantI-
dentificationAndSelection ComPrimitive have to be
performed manually before sending the service.

Process Values true/false If true, the PDU is displayed.

Window/Show
PDU
Process Values true/false If true, the Symbolic Responses are displayed.
Window/Show
symbolic Re-
sponse
Process Values true/false If true, Structures are displayed.
Window/Show
Structures
Process Values true/false If true, only the PDU is shown and the symbolic inter-
Window/Show pretation of the PDU is suppressed.
PDU Level only
Process Values true/false If true, the Database Info is displayed.
Window/Show
Database info
Process true/false If true, all parameters that are constant
Values Win- (i.e parameters of type eCODED CONST,
dow/Show only eNRC CONST, ePHYS CONST and eMATCH-
non constant ING REQUEST PARAM) will be suppressed. Only
parameters parameters that have a value that may change are
displayed in the Process Values window.
Process Values true/false If true, information sent from diagnostic jobs during
Window/Show execution is displayed.
Job Info
Transmit But- Transmit/any Caption of the Transmit button.
ton/Caption character string

193
8.5. HMI Control Diagnostic Services

Transmit Stop/any char- Caption of the Transmit button after it was pressed in
Button/Run acter string the Execution Mode
Caption
Frequent true/false If true, the check box Frequent is displayed.
Check-
box/Visible
Frequent true/false Determines if the check box Frequent is in checked
Check- state by default.
box/default
is checked
Frequent 1000/any posi- Sets the cycle time for the service triggered by the
Check- tive number Transmit button.
box/sampling
time(ms)
Sequence 1-4 true/false If true, the Sequence button is displayed.
Button/visible
Sequence 1-4 Sequence 1- Caption of the Sequence button.
Button/Caption 4/any character
string
Sequence 1-4 Stop/any char- Caption of the Sequence button after it was pressed
Button/Run acter string in the Execution Mode.
Caption
Sequence 1-4 true/false Determines if the Sequence should be sent cyclically.
Button/frequent
Sequence 1000/any posi- Cycle time for cyclic sending of the sequence.
1-4 But- tive number
ton/sampling
time(ms)
Semantic true/false If true, the Semantic Selection button is displayed.
Selection But-
ton/visible
Semantic Read mea- Caption of the Semantic Selection button.
Selection But- surement
ton/Caption values/any
character string
Semantic Stop/any char- Caption of the Semantic Selection button after it was
Selection acter string pressed in the Execution Mode.
Button/Run
Caption

194
8.6. HMI Control DTC

Semantic - Shows the selected SEMANTIC flags.

Selection But-
ton/Semantic
Configure But- true/false Enables or disables the Configure Button in the HMI
ton/visible Control.
This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.

For general explanations of the tab Common Settings please have a look at chapter Common
Settings.

8.6 HMI Control DTC

General Information

Description The HMI Control DTC is used to read the fault memory of a
single ECU, particularly the Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)
and the associated environment data.
It also allows clearing DTCs and generating a report. Different
view modes and filtering options are offered.

Classification Function HMI Control

License HMI Library Extension required
Reports supported

195
8.6. HMI Control DTC

Application Guideline supported

(AGL)
This HMI Control only works with ODX data that was created
according to the Softing Authoring Guidelines. It requires spe-
cial services that have to match with the Softing Authoring
Guidelines.

If the ODX data of the customer does not fulfill this require-
ment, Softing offers the Application Guideline (AGL) technol-
ogy that allows using customer specific ODX data without cre-
ating customer specific software variants of DTS Monaco.

Application Guidelines are files that are able to create a map-

ping between the functionalities supported by DTS Monaco
(as reading DTCs, Coding, ECU Identification) and the cus-
tomer specific ODX data, that was created according to the
Authoring Guidelines of the customer.

If you want to work with this HMI Control using customer spe-
cific ODX data, contact Softing to get assistance in setting up
such an AGL interface.

8.6.1 Using the HMI Control DTC

The pre-configured DTC Control is shown in the image below.

196
8.6. HMI Control DTC

Overview

The user interface is divided in three areas:

Configuration and Execution Area

DTC Display Area
Supplementary DTC Information Area

You may copy results from the DTC Display Area and Supplementary DTC Information Area
to the Windows Clipboard for use in other applications.

1. Select the item you want to copy. You may select multiple items by holding down the
CTRL key during selection of the items.

2. Right-click the selected item to show a context menu.

The menu item Copy Line to Clipboard will copy your selection to the Clipboard.
The menu item Copy Cell to Clipboard will copy only the content of the selected cell to
the Clipboard.
The menu item Copy All to Clipboard will copy the whole content of the selected list to
the Clipboard.
You may also use CTRL+C to copy your selection to the Clipboard.

3. In the Clipboard all items in a line will be separated by Tabs.

Generating a Report

To generate a report use the Monaco Report feature.

The report contains the following data:

• The Long or Short name of the ECU

• The number of DTCs read. For every DTC the following data will be listed:

– The DTC code

– The SAE name

– The DTC text

– The value of the Status byte

– The value of the Readiness bit

197
8.6. HMI Control DTC

– The value of the MIL bit

– The value of the Stored bit

– The value of the Active bit

For DTCs with environment parameters, these will be listed for these DTCs the following
report sections:

• The name of the environment parameter

• The value of the environment parameter

• The unit of the environment parameter

8.6.1.1 Configuration and Execution Area

This area is used to configure and control the behavior of the DTC and Supplementary DTC
Information Area.

Selecting an ECU

The ECU drop-down list contains ECUs (Logical Links) found in the database of your DTS
project. Select the ECU you want to work with from the list.

If you enter a search string in the head line of the list, all Base Variants or Variants will be
displayed when they are matching with the entered keyboard input.

Click Connect to start the communication with the selected ECU.

When an ECU is selected, the appropriate Logical Link will be opened. If the Logical Link
is not already active (maybe by another HMI Control) a Start Communication request is

198
8.6. HMI Control DTC

executed. A Variant Identification and Selection is executed when a Variant Detection was
not performed before.

The status of the ECU connection is visualized by an icon in front of the ECU name. See the
chapter Logical Link States for details.

To close the connection to the ECU, click the button Disconnect.

Reading DTCs from an ECU

The Button Read requests the DTCs from the selected ECU. While the DTCs are read from
the ECU, the button text changes to Stop. Pressing Stop will abort the reading process.

If the ECU has no DTCs stored, a message box will notify you that no DTCs were found.

Execution Settings

The checkboxes Execution Settings let you control the additional options for reading DTCs:

• Confirmed DTCs: When selected the confirmed DTCs are read.

• Supported DTCs: When selected all supported DTCs are read.
• Test Not Completed: When selected all DTCs which have the status TestNotComplete
are read.

• Mirror Memory: When selected the DTCs from mirror memory are read.
• Runtime Filter: Enables the Runtime Filter checkboxes, allowing configuring individual
filters.
This item is only available when the configuration option Show Runtime filter is enabled
in the Configurator of the HMI Control.

Environment Data: When checked the environment data of the DTCs is also read.

Execution settings are saved to the Monaco Workspace and will be reloaded when the
workspace is started.

Runtime Filter

Runtime Filters are only available for Logical Links that make use of the UDS protocol. They
are used to request only DTCs that match the checked filter options. The filter options refer
to the Status bit definitions described in the ISO 15765-3 specification.

The following filter options are available for UDS links:

• Test failed
• Test failed this monitoring cycle

199
8.6. HMI Control DTC

• Pending DTC

• Confirmed DTC

• Test not completed since last clear

• Test failed since last clear

• Test not completed this monitoring cycle

• Warning indicator requested

• Edit hex: Allows entering a hex number representing the status of the individual check
boxes of the runtime filters.
Entering a value will set the check boxes of the runtime filter accordingly.
When you check or uncheck individual runtime filter options this will also be reflected
in the hex value of this field.

When using a Runtime Filter, only the services that request the selected DTC types are sent
to the ECU whereas using the Display Filter does request all DTCs from the ECU and filters
after receiving the DTCs.
The Runtime Filter may be used to reduce load in some cases by omitting to request DTCs
that are not required.

The Runtime Filter settings are only displayed if the property Show Runtime filter is set to
true in the Configurator of the HMI Control.

To show the filter options click the icon.

Runtime filter settings are saved to the Monaco Workspace and will be reloaded when the
workspace is started.

Display Filter

The checkboxes Display Filter are used to control the content of the Display and Environment
Data area. These options have no effect on reading the DTCs from the ECU. After the DTCs
were read from the ECU the user may control the scope of displayed data.

There are two different Display Filter views available. The kind of Display Filter view may
be set in the Configurator of the HMI Control using the property DisplayFilter in the General
group.

200
8.6. HMI Control DTC

• Display Filter mode Status

MIL On: When checked only DTCs that have set the Warning Indicator Requested
(MIL ON) are shown . In case of UDS this affects all DTCs that have set the DTC
Status Bit Warning Indicator Requested (Bit Number 7).

Stored: When checked only DTCs that have set the DTC Status Bit Confirmed DTC
are shown (Bit Number 3 in case of vehicle protocol UDS).

Active: When checked only DTCs that have set the DTC Status Bit Test Failed are
shown (Bit Number 0 in case of vehicle protocol UDS).

DTC Filter : When checked a preset pass filter for displaying DTCs is activated. The
pass filter may be set tab DTC Code Filter of the Configurator and defines the DTC
Codes to be displayed.

• Display Filter mode Status Byte

Using this Display Filter mode a user defined Status Byte Filter may be set. The Status
Byte is computed by bitwise AND from the DTC Status byte read from the ECU and
the Mask Byte. When this statement is true for a DTC this DTC will be displayed.

DTC Filter : When checked a preset pass filter for displaying DTCs is activated. The
pass filter may be set in the tab DTC Code Filter of the Configurator and defines the
DTC Codes to be displayed.

Status Byte: When checked, the Status Byte Filter becomes active. A DTC will only be
displayed if at least one bit (must be 1) of the status byte filter matches with the bit of
the status byte from the DTC. Example:
Status Byte Filter mask 1001 0000 (0x50) and DTC status byte: 0001 0011 (0x13) ->
Bit 5 matches, so the DTC is displayed.

Filter Mask: This field contains the user defined Mask Byte (Default is FF). The Status
Byte Filter has to be entered as a hexadecimal number.

Reading DTCs cyclically

You may read DTCs cyclically by activating the checkbox cyclic right beside the Read button.
During cyclic reading the Read button changes its caption to Stop. Clicking Stop will interrupt
the cyclic reading. The cycle time can be adjusted using the input field next to the cyclic

201
8.6. HMI Control DTC

check box. The default value is 1000 ms. You may change the value using the up and down
arrows or by entering a new value in milliseconds.

Clear DTCs

The button Clear all DTCs clears all DTCs of the selected ECU (either check-marked or
not) that are displayed in the DTC Display Area.

To clear individual DTCs, uncheck the checkboxes of all DTCs in the DTC Display Area that
you do not want to be cleared and press the button Clear selected DTCs.
This feature is only available in Detailed View.
After the button has been pressed, the selected DTCs are cleared in the ECU and all DTC
entries are removed from the table in the DTC Display Area. Click the Read button again to
update the display to the current DTC state of the ECU.

Enter Configuration Mode

The button Configure allows executing the Configurator of this HMI Control during execution
mode. Because not every setting can be modified during execution mode some settings are
disabled.

8.6.1.2 DTC Display Area

The Display area supports two view modes: Compact View and Detailed View.

In any view mode the number of displayed DTCs as part from the number of read DTCs is
shown on top of the DTC Display Area.

You may toggle the two view modes by clicking on the button at the right.

Detailed View
The Detailed View shows all DTCs in a list. By clicking on a column header the list is
sorted by the order of the items in this column. The visibility of an individual column can be
configured in the Configurator of the HMI Control.

The Detailed View offers the following columns:

Column Remarks

202
8.6. HMI Control DTC

DTC This column shows the DTC Code in SAE

format. Example: When the DTC Code is
61000 the DTC Code in SAE format would be
P061000.
DTC (hex) This column shows the DTC Code in hex-
adecimal format.
Fault Symptom This column shows the DTC Fault Symptom
text.
Status Byte (hex) This column displays the Status Byte in hex-
adecimal format.
Readiness This column displays the status of the Readi-
ness bit (UDS bit 4 -> Test Not Complete
Since Last Clear).
MIL This column displays the status of the MIL bit
(UDS bit 7 -> Warning Indicator Requested)
Stored This column displays the status of the Stored
bit (UDS bit 3 ->Confirmed DTC)
Active This column displays the status of the Active
bit (UDS bit 0 ->Test Failed)

You may copy one or several entries in the DTC Data table to the Windows Clipboard using
CTRL+C or the context menu entry Copy. The information of a row will be separated by Tab
characters.

In Detail View a DTC is shown in red color when no environment data is available.
The Negative Response Code from the ECU when reading environment data is
displayed in the Environment Data window and also written to the Report of the
HMI Control.

Compact View
In Compact View each DTC is displayed as a box with the DTC Code in SAE format. The
boxes are sorted according to the DTC code.

The color of the box depends on the status of the DTC:

203
8.6. HMI Control DTC

Color Description
red The status of DTC is ”Active” (UDS -> Status
bit 0, Test failed) and ”Stored” (UDS ->Status
bit 3, Confirmed DTC).
orange The status of DTC is ”Active” (UDS -> Sta-
tus bit 0, Test failed) but not ”Stored” (UDS ->
Status bit 3, Confirmed DTC).
yellow The status of DTC is not ”Active” (UDS ->
Status bit 0, Test failed) but ”Stored” (UDS -
> Status bit 3, Confirmed DTC).
green The status of DTC is not ”Active” (UDS -
> Status bit 0, Test failed) and not ”Stored”
(UDS -> Status bit 3, Confirmed DTC).
gray The status of the DTC is ”Test not complete”
(UDS -> Status bit 4, Test not complete since
last clear).

If a box is selected the Fault Symptom text will be displayed.

8.6.1.3 Supplementary DTC Information Area

The Supplementary DTC Information Area shown supplementary information associated
with the selected DTC.
It offers two tabs:

• DTC Environment Data

When you select a DTC in the DTC Display Area the associated environment data will
be displayed in the DTC Environment Data tab.

The DTS Environment Data tab offers the following columns:

Column Remarks

204
8.6. HMI Control DTC

Environment Parameter Name of the Environment Data item. By clicking on the header
of the Environment Parameter column the list is sorted by the
order of the items in this column.
Value Value of the Environment Parameter.
Unit Unit of the Environment Parameter value.
RangeInfo When a range information is available in the ODX database,
this column shows information about the validity of the value.
The configuration property Display Column RangeInfo deter-
mines if the column RangeInfo is shown or hidden.

The following values may be displayed:

Value OK : The value is within a valid range.
Value not valid: The value is in an invalid area.
Value not defined: The value is in an area, which is marked in
a specification (e.g. as reserved).
Value not available: The value is in a currently invalid area.
The value usually is presented by the ECU but can currently
not be performed due to e.g. initialization or temporary prob-
lems.

If internal scale constraints are available in the database they

are added to the RangeInfo in brackets.
Only available for ODX databases (SMR, SRD and SOD
database format).
Raw Value (hex) Non-interpreted raw value of the Environment Parameter in
hexadecimal format.
The configuration property Display Column Raw value (hex)
determines if the column Raw value (hex) is shown or hidden.
Only available for ODX databases (SMR, SRD and SOD
database format).

• DTC Additional Information

When you select a DTC in the DTC Display Area the static text of the associated SDG
in the database will be displayed in the DTC Additional Information tab.
DTC Addition Information is only available for ODX based projects (SMR, SRD, and
SOD database format).

205
8.6. HMI Control DTC

The DTC Additional Information tab shows the following columns:

Column Remarks
Name Name of the Additional Information item. By clicking on the
header of the Name column the list is sorted by the order of
the items in this column.
Value Value of the Additional Information item.
Description Description of the Additional Information item.

You may copy one or several entries in the tables to the Windows Clipboard using CTRL+C or
the context menu entry Copy. The information of one row will be separated by Tab characters.

There is a toggle button on the right upper corner of the Supplementary DTC Information
Area to show or hide the area.

To sort the list alphabetically, click on the header of the first column.

8.6.2 Configuration of the HMI Control DTC

The Configurator Settings control the behavior of the HMI Control DTC in Execution Mode.

The Configurator contains the following tabs:

• Common Settings

• Filters

• DTC Code Filter

The following buttons are available:

• OK : Saves the current configuration and closes the Configurator

• Cancel: Changes are discarded and the Configurator is closed

206
8.6. HMI Control DTC

• Help: Opens the appropriate chapter in the Monaco help

8.6.2.1 Common Settings

The image below shows the dialog window DTC - Configurator with the Common Settings
tab opened.

The following table shows an overview of all properties and their values of the tab Common
Settings. Default values are represented in bold letters.

207
8.6. HMI Control DTC

Property Default Value / Description

Group / Prop- Value Range
erty
Gen- DTC/any char- Name of the HMI Control that will be displayed in its
eral/Caption acter string surrounding frame.

General/Show true/false If true, the border frame of the HMI Control is dis-
Frame played else no border frame is displayed.

General/Show true/ false If true, Long Names are displayed in the ECU list and
LongNames the Environment Data table, if false Short Names are
shown.
General/Show true/false If true, the Variants of the Base Variant are displayed.
LogicalLinks on This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
Variants rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
General/Show true/false If true, the Environment Data window is displayed, if
Environment false it is hidden.
Data Window
Gen- Status/Status Switches the layout of the Display Filter in the Con-
eral/Display Byte figuration and Execution Area.
Filter
Gen- - Defines the ECU that will be shown on top of the ECU
eral/Default list in the Configuration Area
Logical Link
Gen- true/false If set to true, the selected ECU is connected imme-
eral/Connect diately after it was selected. When set to false, the
selected ECU ECU is selected but not connected. To establish a
automatically connection, the Connect button has to be pressed.
Options/DTC Compact/ Shows the DTC information in Compact View or De-
view Detailed tailed View.
Options/Show true/false Displays the Runtime filter options in the Configura-
Runtime filter tion Area.

DTC detailed true/false If true, the column DTC (hex) is displayed in the De-
View Win- tailed View, if false it is hidden.
dow/Show DTC
(hex) column

208
8.6. HMI Control DTC

DTC De- true/false If true, the column Fault Symptom is displayed in the
tailed View Detailed View, if false it is hidden.
Window/Show
Fault Symptom
column
DTC De- true/false If true, the column Status Byte (hex) is displayed in
tailed View the Detailed View, if false it is hidden.
Window/Show
Status Byte
(hex) column
DTC De- true/false If true, the column Readiness is displayed in the De-
tailed View tailed View, if false it is hidden.
Window/Show
Readiness
column
DTC Detailed true/false If true, the column MIL is displayed in the Detailed
View Win- View, if false it is hidden.
dow/Show MIL
column
DTC De- true/false If true, the column Stored is displayed in the Detailed
tailed View View, if false it is hidden.
Window/Show
Stored column
DTC De- true/false If true, the column Active is displayed in the Detailed
tailed View View, if false it is hidden.
Window/Show
Active column
EnvData Win- true/false If true, the column RangeInfo is displayed in the En-
dow/Show Col- vData window, if false it is hidden.
umn RangeInfo
EnvData Win- true/false If true, the column Raw value (hex) is displayed in the
dow/Show Col- EnvData window, if false it is hidden.
umn Raw value
(hex)
Configure But- true/false Enables or disables the Configure Button in the HMI
ton/visible Control.

209
8.6. HMI Control DTC

8.6.2.2 Filters
The Filters tab allows controlling the Logical Links shown in the LogicalLink list of the DTC
HMI Control.

It has the following layout:

The Filters tab lists all Logical Links of the current DTS project.

The following table gives an overview of all properties and their values of the tab Filters.
Default values are represented by bold letters.

PROPERTY VALUES DESCRIPTION

LogicalLink filter off/on on: enables Logical Link filtering,
off: every Logical Link of the cur-
rent DTS project is listed in Logi-
cal Link list of the DTC HMI Con-
trol

210
8.6. HMI Control DTC

LogicalLink fil- pass/reject pass: this Logical Link will be

ter/Link Name listed in Logical Link list of the
DTC HMI Control;
reject: this Logical Link will not be
listed

8.6.2.3 DTC Code Filter

Some ECUs can provide hundreds of DTCs which are spread over multiple of its functions.
If someone is interested in a specific function of an ECU then it will help to display only the
DTCs which are relevant for the function.

The DTC Code Filter tab allows controlling the DTCs shown in the DTC Display Area of the
HMI Control, when the Display Filter option DTC Filter is checked.

It has the following layout:

211
8.7. HMI Control ECU Identification

The DTC Code Filter is a pass filter. If the DTC Code Filter is enabled then only the selected
DTCs will be displayed in the DTC Display Area.
For each Logical Link a pass filter may be set. The Logical Link is selected from list on the
top of the DTC Code Filter tab.

After a Logical Link has been selected in the drop down list, all DTC Codes (in SAE Format)
and associated Fault Symptom texts of the selected Logical Link are listed.
Initially all DTCs in the DTC Code filter tab are checked. One or more DTCs may be selected
or deselected using the checkboxes in front of them.

When the option Show only unselected DTCs is checked, only the DTCs are listed that have
not been checkmarked. That is useful to get a quick overview of the currently excluded DTCs
especially when the ECU supports a huge number of DTCs.

8.7 HMI Control ECU Identification

General Information

Description The HMI Control ECU Identification is used to read ECU spe-
cific information.
Classification Function HMI Control
License HMI Library Extension required
Reports supported
Pre and Post Actions supported

212
8.7. HMI Control ECU Identification

Application Guideline supported

(AGL)
This HMI Control only works with ODX data that was created
according to the Softing Authoring Guidelines. It requires spe-
cial services that have to match with the Softing Authoring
Guidelines.

If the ODX data of the customer does not fulfill this require-
ment, Softing offers the Application Guideline (AGL) technol-
ogy that allows using customer specific ODX data without cre-
ating customer specific software variants of DTS Monaco.

Application Guidelines are files that are able to create a map-

ping between the functionalities supported by DTS Monaco
(as reading DTCs, Coding, ECU Identification) and the cus-
tomer specific ODX data, that was created according to the
Authoring Guidelines of the customer.

If you want to work with this HMI Control using customer spe-
cific ODX data, contact Softing to get assistance in setting up
such an AGL interface.

ECU specific information can be hardware information, boot software information or code
and data software information.
Generally this information contains the supplier name, supplier id and version data.

Due to the fact that no ISO specification defines a result structure, the whole ECU Identifica-
tion information and the result structure which can be read from an ECU is specific for that
ECU or for the ECUs of an OEM.

Use Application Guidelines to adapt the identification services to the requirements of the
HMI Control.

The ECU Identification HMI Control uses the AGL Function READ ECU IDENT to identify the
services that have to be executed. To identify the response parameters of the executed ser-
vices, that have to be displayed, the HMI Control uses the AGL Function ECU IDENT VALUE
in outParamMappings section.

From the identified parameters the Value and the Unit are displayed together with the name
of the Parameter. The displayed name of the Parameter is the value of parameter definition
ItemValue if available or the Short Name or the LongName depending on the property Show

213
8.7. HMI Control ECU Identification

LongNames.

If you have problems matching your ODX data to the requirements of the Monaco HMI Con-
trol please contact Softing for support.

8.7.1 Using the HMI Control ECU Identification

The HMI Control ECU Identification allows reading and viewing the identification data using
two view modes. The results may be saved to a report.

Reading the ECU Identification

In the drop down list ECU select All ECUs to read out the identification data from all ECUs
or select a specific ECU.

The HMI Control offers two view modes:

• HTML view mode

This view mode shows the ECU Identification data as an HTML document based on
tables.

• Tree view mode

The Tree view mode shows the ECU Identification data in a tree structure.

The button Configure allows opening the Configurator window in Execution mode if this
enabled in the configuration settings.

Start reading the identification data by pressing the Read button.

While reading the ECU information the caption of the button changes to Stop allowing
interrupting the reading process.

If Pre- and PostActions are enabled, Pre-Actions for the corresponding ECU are executed
directly before reading the identification data and the Post-Actions are executed after the
identification data has been read from that ECU.

Displaying the ECU Identification Data

It is not supported to drop services into the HMI Control.

Note: When another ECU is selected, the content of the result window will be cleared.

HTML view mode

The HTML view mode shows a structured list with the soft- and hardware properties of each

214
8.7. HMI Control ECU Identification

individual ECU.

Pre- and PostActions used by the HMI Control ECU Identification are shown as a separate
table before and after the Main Action table when services are tagged as Documentation
Services.
The table contains the columns Name, Value, Unit, Logical Link and Validity.
The column Name contains the ECU, the service and the selected request and response
parameters in this order.

The result is displayed as a text block for every ECU. The text block consists of a header with
information about the ECU, its variant and diagnostic version and a table with the identifica-
tion properties such as hard- and software versions and supplier information.

Tree view mode

In Tree view mode a tree of services and response parameters for each ECU is displayed.

Pre- and PostActions used by the HMI Control ECU Identification are also shown in the tree
when services are tagged as Documentation Services.

The tree contains the ECU name, the service name, the response name and all response
parameters.

215
8.7. HMI Control ECU Identification

Use the Expand button to expand all nodes and the Collapse button to close all
nodes.

Creating a Report

The Report button generates a report file in HTML format with all identification information
contained in the currently displayed result window.
Additionally user specific information can be stored in the report file.

Pre- and PostActions

If Pre- and PostActions in the Configurator of the HMI Control are enabled, Pre-Actions are
executed when the Read button is pressed. When the execution stops or is stopped by using
the Stop button , the Post-Actions are executed.

8.7.2 Configuration of the HMI Control ECU Identification

The Configurator Settings control the behavior of the HMI Control ECU identification in Exe-
cution Mode.

The Configurator contains the following tabs:

• Common Settings

• Filters

The following buttons are available:

• OK : Saves the current configuration and closes the Configurator

• Cancel: Changes are discarded and the Configurator is closed

• Edit: Opens the Pre and Post Action Editor.

Pre- and Post Actions can be specified for a HMI Control type in a DTS Project, i.e.
for all ECU Identification HMI Controls in all workspaces of a DTS Project. Whenever
a the execution of the HMI Control is started the Pre-Actions defined in the Pre- and
Post Action Editor are executed. When the execution is stopped, the Post-Actions are
executed.
This applies when the Property Execute Pre- and Post Actions is set to true.

• Help: Opens the appropriate chapter in the Monaco help

216
8.7. HMI Control ECU Identification

8.7.2.1 Common Settings

The image below shows the dialog window ECU Identification - Configurator with the Com-
mon Settings tab opened.

The following table shows an overview of all Properties and their values of the tab Common
Settings. Default values are represented in bold letters.

Property Default Description

Group / Value /
Property Value
Range
Gen- ECU Name of the HMI Control that will be displayed in its
eral/Caption Identifica- frame.
tion/any
character
string
Gen- true/ false Displays the HMI control with or without frame and
eral/Show caption.
Frame

217
8.7. HMI Control ECU Identification

Gen- true/ false If true, Long Names are displayed in the ECU list, if
eral/Show false Short Names are shown.
Long-
Names
Gen- <All Defines the ECU preselection in the ECU field
eral/Default ECUs>/other
ECU prese- This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
lected rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
ECU
Config- false/true Enables or disables the Configure button in the HMI
ure But- Control.
ton/Visible This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
Pre/Post true/false Enables the execution of the Pre- and Post Actions
Ac- defined in the Pre and Post Action Editor. If set to
tions/Execute true, the execution of the Pre- and PostActions is en-
Pre- and abled.
PostAc- If false, Pre- and Post Actions are ignored.
tions
Pre/Post false/true Allows Alias Names to be configured in the Se-
Ac- quence Tree of theServices/ComPrimitives tab in the
tions/Show Pre and Post Action Editor.
Alias
Name
Pre/Post true/false Displays the Variants in the Services/ComPrimitives
Ac- tab of the Pre and Post Action Editor.
tions/Show
LogicalL-
inks on
Variants
Pre/Post None/ServiceIDSets the format of the Identifier prefix for the services
Ac- ServiceID shown in the Services/ComPrimitives tab of the Pre
tions/Show and DataID and Post Action Editor.
Identifier

218
8.8. HMI Control Flash

8.7.2.2 Filters
The Filters tab allows controlling the Logical Links (ECUs) shown in the ECU list of the HMI
Control.

The Filters tab lists all Logical Links of the current DTS project.

The following table gives an overview of all properties and their values of the tab Filters.
Default values are represented by bold letters.

PROPERTY VALUES DESCRIPTION

LogicalLink filter off/on on: enables Logical Link filtering,
off: every Logical Link of the cur-
rent DTS project is listed in the
ECU list of the HMI Control
LogicalLink fil- pass/reject pass: this Logical Link will be
ter/Link Name listed in the ECU list of the HMI
Control;
reject: this Logical Link will not be
listed

8.8 HMI Control Flash

General Information

Description The HMI Control Flash enables a quick and comfortable way
to download flash data to an ECU.

Flash data has to be provided as an ODX-D file with an OEM-

specific flash job and a referenced ODX-F file that contains
the flash data itself or a reference to an external flash file. The
external flash file may also be late-bound. External flash files
in HEX, MOT, BIN, S3 and S19 format are supported.

It allows testing and running flash sequences or updating an

ECU to a specific software state.
The HMI Control allows simple execution of a programming
procedure for an ECU in three steps. The order of program-
ming sessions can be defined using the Flash Priority.

Classification Function HMI Control

219
8.8. HMI Control Flash

License HMI Library Extension required

Reports supported

8.8.1 Using the HMI Control Flash

To download a flash container to an ECU, execute the following steps:

1. In the Logical Links tree window select the ECU you want to flash. You may press the
button Show only ECU with FlashSession in order to filter out ECUs that do not have
flash sessions.

2. In the Session Control window the available Flash Sessions will be shown.

Select one or more flash sessions by clicking the associated checkboxes.

When you select a Flash Session in the Logical Links window the Data Blocks of the
Flash Session will be shown in the Session Control.
You may change the Flash Priority of a Session by double-clicking the appropriate row
or by pressing <F2> when the appropriate row in the Session Control is selected.
Enter a new value in the FlashPrio cell of the session.

When you select a Data Block in the Logical Links window the Segments of the Data
Block will be shown in the Session Control.

220
8.8. HMI Control Flash

3. To start the flash process, press the Run button.

When flashing multiple sessions, the currently flashed session is highlighted by an

arrow icon in front of the session entry in the Session Control area.

During Flashing the Logical Links and Session Control areas are disabled.

At the bottom of the window a progress bar displays the current status of the Flash
Programming process. While flashing is active, the caption of the Run button changes
to Stop in order to allow canceling the process.

4. The result of the flash process will be shown in the Status field located beneath the
progress bar.
You may open the Status field to show the history of status messages.

Click the Copy to Clipboard button in order to copy all status messages to the
Windows clipboard.

Use the Erase button to delete all Status Messages.

Exchanging the flash files during runtime

For SMR files the HMI Control Flash provides the button Temporarily add flash data that
allows selecting a different flash data file (SMR-F) during runtime. The button is hidden for
other project types (SOD and SRD).

By clicking the button Temporarily add flash data a file dialog opens, allowing browsing to
any directory and load one or more SMR-F files in case of an SMR project from this location.

The selected flash files are not copied to the project and the reference is not saved in the
project configuration. The flash files are added temporarily and the reference will be lost
when the workspace is closed. Switching from Execution Mode to Configuration Mode and
back keeps the temporary flash files loaded.

221
8.8. HMI Control Flash

A flash session with a temporarily added flash data file is indicated by the icon , a flash
session with a temporarily added latebound flash file shows the icon .

To remove temporarily added flash files, select the flash session in the Logical Links tree
on the left press <Del> or right-click to open a context menu. Select Remove temporary
flash file to remove the temporarily added flash file.

The button can be hidden when the Property Show Button ”Manage Flash Data” in the
Configurator of the HMI Control is set to false.

Exchanging external latebound flash data files

The HMI Control Flash supports exchanging late bound flash data files for SMR, SOD and
SRD projects. Wildcards for the flash data file in the database are supported. This allows
the user selecting one out of several latebound flash data files that match the wildcard.

The HMI Control Flash indicates a session with a latebound flash data file using the
symbol in front of the flash session in the Logical Links window. If no latebound flash data
file is available in the flash session a symbol will be displayed.

To open the file dialog for selecting the latebound flash data file, select a Flash Session in
the Logical Links window and double-click a flash data file in the Session Control window.

The file dialog will only show flash data files that match the flash data file specified in the
database (using wildcards or not).

Generating Reports

To generate a report use the Monaco Report feature.

8.8.2 Configuration of the HMI Control Flash

The Configurator Settings control the behavior of the HMI Control Flash in Execution Mode.

The Configurator contains the following tabs:

• Common Settings

• Filters

The following buttons are available:

• OK : Saves the current configuration and closes the Configurator

222
8.8. HMI Control Flash

• Cancel: Changes are discarded and the Configurator is closed

• Help: Opens the appropriate chapter in the Monaco help

8.8.2.1 Common Settings

The image below shows the dialog window Flash - Configurator with the Common Settings
tab opened.

223
8.8. HMI Control Flash

The table below gives an overview of all Properties and their values of the tab Common
Settings of the Configurator of the HMI Control Flash. Default values are represented by
bold letters.

Property Default Value / Description

Group / Prop- Value Range
erty
Gen- Flash/ any Name of the HMI Control that will be displayed in its
eral/Caption character string frame.
This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
General/Show true/false If true, the border frame of the HMI Control is dis-
Frame played else no border frame is displayed.
This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
General/Show true/false If true, Long Names are displayed in the Process Val-
LongNames ues list, if false Short Names are shown.
General/Show true/false If true, Logical Links of Variants are displayed in the
LogicalLinks on Filters and Services tab of the Configurator.
Variants This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
General/Show true/false The button Temporarily add flash data is shown in the
Button ”Tem- user interface of the HMI Control a It allows adding a
porarily add flash file of type smr-f while Monaco is in Execution
flash data” Mode. The file will only be treated temporarily (as
long as the workspace is not closed) by the HMI Con-
trol and not be added to the project or workspace.

The option is only enabled for DTS projects with SMR

database files.

This property cannot be changed when the Configu-

rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
General/Start true/false If true, double-clicking a flash session in the logical
flashing by Link box will immediately start flashing. If set to false
double click the Run button has to be pressed to start flashing.
This settings allows avoiding starting flashing unin-
tentionally.

224
8.8. HMI Control Flash

General/Auto true/false The communication starts automatically, if the com-

Start Communi- munication has not been started already. If the ser-
cation vice belongs to a Base Variant a VariantIdentificatio-
nAndSelection ComPrimitive will be executed.
Session false/true If true, the Direction column of the Session View ta-
View/Show ble is shown.
Direction
Session true/false If true, the Flashclass column of the Session View
View/Show table is shown.
Flashclass
Session true/false If true, the Flashkey column of the Session View ta-
View/Show ble is shown.
Flashkey
Session true/false If true, the Bytes column of the Session View table is
View/Show shown.
Bytes
Session false/true If true, the Blocks column of the Session View table
View/Show is shown.
Number of
Blocks
Session true/false If true, the Flashjob column of the Session View table
View/Show is shown.
Flashjob
Session true/false If true, the FlashPrio column of the Session View ta-
View/Show ble is shown.
FlashPrio
Session true/false Shows the Up and Down button on the left border
View/Session of the Session Control window. The buttons allow
Reorder But- changing the order of flash sessions in the list.
tons
Datablock true/false If true, the Type column of the Data Block View table
View/Show is shown.
Type
Datablock true/false If true, the Bytes column of the Data Block View table
View/Show is shown.
Bytes
Datablock true/false If true, the File column of the Data Block View table
View/Show File is shown.
Datablock true/false If true, the Format column of the Data Block View
View/Show table is shown.
Format

225
8.8. HMI Control Flash

Segment true/false If true, the Number column of the Segment View ta-
View/Show ble is shown.
Number
Segment true/false If true, the Start Address column of the Segment
View/Show View table is shown.
Start Address
Segment true/false If true, the End Address column of the Segment View
View/Show End table is shown.
Address
Segment true/false If true, the Bytes column of the Segment View table
View/Show is shown.
Bytes
Configure But- true/false Enables or disables the Configure Button in the HMI
ton/Visible Control.
This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.

8.8.2.2 Filters
The Filters tab allows controlling the Logical Links shown in the LogicalLink list of the HMI
Control.

The Filters tab lists all Logical Links of the current DTS project.

The following table gives an overview of all properties and their values in the tab Filters.
Default values are represented by bold letters.

PROPERTY VALUES DESCRIPTION

LogicalLink filter off/on on: enables Logical Link filtering,
off: every Logical Link of the cur-
rent DTS project is listed in Logi-
cal Link list
LogicalLink fil- pass/reject pass: this Logical Link will be
ter/Link Name listed in Logical Link list;
reject: this Logical Link will not be
listed

226
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

8.9 HMI Control Graphical Instrument

General Information

Description The HMI Control Graphical Instrument offers a large number

of Instrument Types.

The instruments can be used to visualize a value delivered

by the parameters of a service response or to graphically set
values of request parameters that are sent to the ECU using
diagnostic services.
Classification Measurement HMI Control
License HMI Library Extension required
Reports not supported

8.9.1 Using Graphical Instruments

The HMI Control Graphical Instrument offers a series of instruments as graphical user inter-
face to perform different tasks as:

• read out measurement values from an ECU and display them graphically

• set values using a graphical instrument and send the data to an ECU

Reading data from an ECU and sending data to the ECU is done by diagnostic services.
The instrument itself does not send these services itself, it uses a data server to provide
the data. The data server send the service to the ECU and provides request and response
parameters that contain the data.
The instrument can be configured to use one or more of these parameters (depending on
the instrument type).

Setting up the Data Server

The data server sends requests and receives responses to the ECU. The parameters con-
tained in these services hold the data used by the instruments.

227
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

The services and parameters used by the instruments have to be set up in the Data Server
Configurator .

Configuration of the Instrument

The parameters the Data Server provides can be selected individually for each instrument.
Some instruments can only use one parameter, other can make use of several parameters.

To add an instrument switch Monaco into Configuration Mode and add a HMI Control of type
Graphical Instrument. Open the Configurator of the HMI Control and select the Common
Settings tab.
Double-click the property Instrument Type and select the instrument type that servers your
requirements.
Go to the Parameters tab and select the parameters you want to use with your instrument.

If the parameter is not listed here, click the Edit button to open the Configurator of the Data
Server where you can define the required parameters and associated services.

Starting and Stopping the Instruments

The instruments are not started by default when the Monaco configuration is started.

To start the Instruments select the entry Start instruments from the Exection menu. There is
also a tool bar button.

When the Instruments are started the Data Server starts the communication with the ECUs.

The Monaco workspace can be configured to start the instruments automatically after
Monaco execution has started. This feature can be enabled in the Workspace Options di-
alog. To open the dialog select Configure workspace... in the Configuration menu. Check
Start Instruments automatically in the Start Options tab of the dialog.

The instruments may be stopped using the entry Stop instruments from the Exection menu.
There is also a tool bar button.

8.9.2 Configuration of the Data Server

To configure the Data Server select the menu entry Configure data server from the Con-
figuration menu (available in Configuration Mode).

This will open the Data Server - Configurator allowing configuring the diagnostic services
and their request and response parameters that provide the values to be displayed by the
Graphical Instrument HMI Controls.

The Data Server Configurator may also be accessed with the Edit button in the Configurator

228
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

of the HMI Control Instrument.

The figure below shows the dialog window Data Server - Configurator.

It contains the following tabs on the left:

• Common Settings: Settings that control the look and behavior of the Data Server

• Server Data: Configuration of the services and OTX scripts used to retrieve data for
the Graphical Instruments

• Filters: Settings for filtering Logical Links that are not required

The tabs on the right Services, Configuration, Otx and Otx Variables are used for the con-
figuration of services and OTX scripts.

• Services: For detailed information about the tab Services please see chapter Config-
uration of Services and ComPrimitives

• Configuration: The usage of the tab Configuration is the same as described in chapter
Configuration of Services and ComPrimitives

• Otx: Allows browsing for and selection of OTX scripts

• Otx Variables: Allows selecting the required Screen variables available in the selected
OTX script

229
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

8.9.2.1 Common Settings

The table below describes all properties of the tab Common Settings and their value range .
Default values are represented in bold letters.

230
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Property Default Description

Group / Value /
Property Value
Range
Gen- true/ false Switches visualization of LongName of data object in
eral/Show the user interface between on and off
Long-
Names
Gen- true/ false Switches visualization of LogicalLinks on ECU Vari-
eral/Show ants in tab Filters and Services of the Configurator
LogicalL- between on and off
inks on
Variants
Gen- false/true The communication starts automatically, if the com-
eral/Auto munication has not been started already. A Start
Start Com- Communication ComPrimitive is sent. If the service
munication belongs to a Base Variant a VariantIdentificationAnd-
Selection ComPrimitive will be executed.
Gen- true/ false If set to true, the folder Library containing the Global
eral/Show OTX scripts is displayed in the OTX tree in the Otx
Library in tab. If false, the folder Library and the contained
OTX tree Global OTX scripts are hidden.
OTX scripts that shall be accessible not only for one
project can be added to the Library of Global OTX
scripts using the tab Libraries in the System Config-
urator.

8.9.2.2 Server Data

The tab Server Data contains the services and OTX scripts that are used to provide the
parameters and OTX variables containing the data for the Graphical Instruments.

The structure and the handling of this tab is described in chapter Designing Sequences of
Services, ComPrimitives and OTX Scripts.

The figure below shows a preconfigured tab Server Data.

231
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

For configuration of the services and OTX scripts select a service or an OTX script in the
list. To configure services click the tab Configuration on the right. The handling of the tab
Configuration is described in chapter Configuration of Services and ComPrimitives.

The tab Configuration is divided into four sections:

• Params
In the section Params the request service parameters can be selected for instruments
that send data to an ECU using requests (e.g. slider).
To change the default value of a parameter double-click into the appropriate cell.

• Symbolic Responses
In the section Symbolic Responses the response service parameters are selected for
instruments that visualize Diagnostic Data. The response parameter may be provided
as interpreted value if possible. This is indicated in the parameter list of the Graphical
Instrument by the text ”(Coded)” which is appended to the Reponse parameter, e.g.
Speed(coded).

• Selection
In the section Selection you can select all or none of the request and response service
parameters using the help of the checkbox select all.

• Others
In the section Others the sampling time is set. It determines the time between two
sending/reading procedures of the selected Diagnostic Service. This setting is used,
when the value from the entry cyclic is set to true.

232
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

To select OTX Variables select an OTX script in the Server Data list and click the tab OTX
Variables on the right. The handling of the tab OTX Variables corresponds to the one of the
Configuration tab.

The OTX script selection tree presents OTX Scripts, OTX Binary Scripts and OTX projects.
All kind of OTX scripts (including binary scripts), i.e. not only scripts that contain a main
procedure, are shown.

8.9.3 Configuration of the Instrument

The look and behavior of an individual Graphical Instrument HMI Control in Execution Mode
is controlled by the settings provided by its Configurator. For information how to work with
the Configurator of an HMI Control see chapter Configuration of HMI Controls.
The Configurator allows selecting the parameters that are provided by the Data Server HMI
Control.

To open the Configurator of a Graphical Instrument select one of the options described in
the chapter Configuration of HMI Controls.

The figure below shows the dialog Graphical Instrument - Configurator.

233
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

The Configurator contains the following tabs:

• Common Settings
• Parameters
• Graphical Settings

The following buttons are available:

• OK : Saves the current configuration and closes the Configurator

• Cancel: Changes are discarded and the Configurator is closed
• Edit: When the tab Parameters is selected, this button allows opening the Server Data
tab of the Graphical Instruments Data Server.

• Help: Opens the appropriate chapter in the Monaco help

8.9.3.1 Common Settings

The table below describes all properties of the tab Common Settings and their value range .
Default values are represented in bold letters.

234
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Property Default Value / Description

Group / Prop- Value Range
erty
Gen- Instrument/any Name of the HMI Control that will be displayed in its
eral/Caption character string frame.
General/Show true/false Switches visualization of a border frame between on
Frame and off.
General/Show true/false Shows the Short Name respectively the Long Name
LongNames of a service or parameter in the Configurator user in-
terface. A change of this property will be reflected in
all related tabs in the Configurator.
General/Show true/false Displays an index number in the Service column
Index of Ser- of the Parameters tab to distinguish services when
vice there are several services with the same name, (e.g.
one service used two times with different settings).
The index represents the number of the row in the
table, starting with row 0.
General/Color true/false Displays the HMI Control using colors while Monaco
in Config Mode is in Configuration Mode. At least one parameter has
to be selected in the tab Parameters.
Gen- Angular Selects the type of the Graphical Instrument (see The
eral/Instrument Gauge / Instrument Types).
Type Slider /
Bar Graph /
7-Segment Dis-
play /
Knob /
Oscilloscope /
Toggle Button /
Toggle Group
Button /
Input Field /
Output Field /
LED /
Thermometer /
Level Indicator
Gen- true/false If true, this instrument is started when the Monaco
eral/Autostart / workspace is started. Other instruments that are
Stop set to false are not started automatically. They are
started only when Start Instruments is selected.

235
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

8.9.3.2 Parameters
The tab Parameters shows the service parameters provided by the Data Server.

The parameters listed in this tab depend on the selected Instrument Type. Only parameters
that can be handled by the instrument are shown.

The following parameter types are supported:

• Responses / Requests:
If the Instrument supports response or request parameters, the parameters are listed
with the associated service name, data type and Logical Link. The Long Name or the
Short Name of the parameter, the associated service and Logical Link will be shown
according to the property Show LongNames in Common Settings.

For most Instrument types only one parameter can be checked. Only Oscilloscope and
Toogle Group Button allow selecting more that one parameter.

For most parameters a parameter with the coded value and a parameter with the in-
terpreted value is available. Parameters that represent a coded value can be identified
by the trailing (Coded) text.

236
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

The checkbox Hide not supported parameters filters out all parameters that are not
supported by the selected instrument type. The checkbox is checked by default. If it is
unchecked these parameters are displayed in grey color.

The column Path shows the path to a parameter in a hierarchical structure. The path
is used to identify a parameter in a structure as a response may contain several struc-
tures where parameters have the same name.

• Services:
If the Instrument supports services, the available services are listed with the asso-
ciated service name, cyclic settings and Logical Link.. The Long Name or the Short
Name of the service and the Logical Link will be shown according to the property Show
LongNames in Common Settings.

The services can be configured to be executed cyclically with the associated cycle
time.

The table below lists the parameter and data types the different instrument types can handle:

Instru- Re- Re- Ser- Data Types

ment Type sponse quest vice
Angular x A UINT8, A UINT16, A UINT32, A INT8,
Gauge A INT16, A INT32, A FLOAT32, A FLOAT64
Slider x A UINT8, A UINT16, A UINT32, A INT8,
A INT16, A INT32, A FLOAT32, A FLOAT64

237
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Bar Graph x A UINT8, A UINT16, A UINT32, A INT8,

A INT16, A INT32, A FLOAT32, A FLOAT64
7-Segment x A UINT8, A UINT16, A UINT32, A INT8,
Display A INT16, A INT32, A FLOAT32, A FLOAT64
Knob x A UINT8, A UINT16, A UINT32, A INT8,
A INT16, A INT32, A FLOAT32, A FLOAT64,
eTEXTTABLE
Oscilloscope x A UINT8, A UINT16, A UINT32, A INT8,
A INT16, A INT32, A FLOAT32, A FLOAT64
Toggle But- x
ton
Input Field x A UINT8, A UINT16, A UINT32, A INT8,
A INT16, A INT32, A FLOAT32, A FLOAT64,
eTEXTTABLE
Output x A UINT8, A UINT16, A UINT32, A INT8,
Field A INT16, A INT32, A FLOAT32, A FLOAT64,
A ASCIISTRING
LED x A UINT8, A UINT16, A UINT32, A INT8,
A INT16, A INT32, A FLOAT32, A FLOAT64,
A ASCIISTRING
Thermometerx A UINT8, A UINT16, A UINT32, A INT8,
A INT16, A INT32, A FLOAT32, A FLOAT64
Level Indi- x A UINT8, A UINT16, A UINT32, A INT8,
cator A INT16, A INT32, A FLOAT32, A FLOAT64

If the property Show Index of Service is set in the Common Settings tab, the Short Name of
the service is followed by a number allowing to identify the service uniquely.
This may be useful when the same diagnostic service with different settings is used several
times in the Data Server.

8.9.3.3 Graphical Settings

The Graphical Settings determine the look and feel of the selected Instrument Type.
The properties of this tab depends on the selected Instrument Type.
The figure below shows the dialog Graphical Settings of a Angular Gauge Instrument.

238
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

The Graphical Settings of the individual intruments are explained in detail the instrument
description (see The Instrument Types.

Ranges
The following instrument types support the definition of ranges with different colors:

• Angular Gauge

• Slider

• Bar Graph

239
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

• Oscilloscope
• Thermometer
• Level Indicator

The ranges are set in the Graphical Settings tab using the property group Ranges.

Example (Angular Gauge with three ranges):

8.9.4 The Instrument Types

Monaco provides the following Instrument Types:

• Angular Gauge
• Slider
• Bar Graph
• 7-Segment Display
• Knob
• Oscilloscope
• Toggle Button
• Toggle Group Button

240
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

• Input Field

• Output Field

• LED

• Thermometer

• Level Indicator

8.9.4.1 Angular Gauge

The instrument type Angular Gauge is used to display a single response parameter.

Instrument Settings

The following table shows an overview of all properties and their values in the tab Graphical
Settings of an Angular Gauge instrument. Default values are represented in bold letters.

Property Default Description

Group / Value /
Property Value
Range
Val- true/false Set the correct Min/Max-Value, provided that these
ues/Self- values are set in the appropriate diagnostic data ob-
Adjusting jects in the database.
241
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Val- Any num- Sets the Minimum value the instrument can display
ues/Min ber ac- manually.
Value cording to
database
range info
Val- Any num- Sets the Maximum value the instrument can display
ues/Max ber ac- manually.
Value cording to
database
range info
Val- 10.000/any Defines the interval between two main tics.
ues/Delta number
Value for
Main Tics
Val- 10.000/any Defines the interval between two sub tics.
ues/Delta number
Value for
Sub Tics
Dis- <Short The Alias Name is displayed in the HMI Control when
play/Alias Name the option Alias Name is selected in the Graphical
Name of the Settings option Show Name.
selected
parameter>/any
name

242
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Dis- Caption, Sets the name displayed inside the instrument.

play/Show Alias
Name Name, Caption: Displays the name defined in the Common
Parameter, Settings option Caption
Parameter Alias Name: Displays the name defined in the
Long- Graphical Settings option Alias Name
Name, Parameter: Displays the Short Name of the parame-
Ser- ter in the database
Parameter LongName: Displays the Long Name of
vice.Parameter,
Service, the parameter in the database
Service Service.Parameter: Displays the Short Name of the
Long- service and the Short Name of the parameter in
Name, the database in format <Short Name of Service>.<
None Short name of Parameter>
Service: Displays the Short Name of the service in
the database
Service LongName: Displays the Long Name of the
service in the database
None: Displays nothing
Dis- Normal, Switches the style used for the instrument.
play/Style Quarter,
Flat, Clock
Dis- Pointer, Sets the shape of the instrument needle.
play/Needle Triangle,
Arrow
Dis- None, This setting allows displaying the current value as a
play/Digital Center digital number in the instrument.
Value Lower,
Center
Upper
Dis- 0, 0...6 This setting sets the number of digits of the Digital
play/Digital Value displayed in the instrument.
Digits
Color and White, any Sets the foreground color of the instrument.
Font/Foreground
color (color
box)
Color and Blue, Sets the background color of the instrument.
Font/Background
Any Color
(color box)
Color and Orange, Sets the color of the intrument needle.
Font/Color Any Color
for Needle (color box)

243
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Color and Arial, Any Sets the font of the instrument labels.
Font/Font Font (Font
Box)
0, 0 ... 100 Sets the number of ranges. For each range a block
Ranges/Number with the properties Lower Limit, Upper Limit and
of Ranges Color is added in the lines below.
0, Min Sets the lower limit of the range.
Ranges/Range
Value ...
[range Max Value
number]
Lower
Limit
0, Min Set the upper limit of the range.
Value
Ranges/Range ...
[range Max Value
number]
Upper
Limit
black, Set the color of the range.
Ranges/Range
Any Color
[range (color box)
number]
Color

8.9.4.2 Slider
The instrument type Slider is used to set a single request parameter.

Keyboard Support

The Slider position can be adjusted using the keyboard:

• Arrow Up key or Arrow Right key increases the slider position.

244
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Shift + Arrow Up key or Shift + Arrow Right key increases the slider position to the
next main tick mark.

• Arrow Down key or Arrow Left key descreases the slider position.
Shift + Arrow Down key or Shift + Arrow Left key decreases the slider position to the
next main tick mark.

• Home key sets the Slider to the minimum position

• End key sets knob to the maximum position

Instrument Settings

The following table shows an overview of all properties and their values in the tab Graphical
Settings of a Slider instrument. Default values are represented in bold letters.

Property Default Description

Group / Value /
Property Value
Range
Val- true/false Set the correct Min/Max-Value, provided that these
ues/Self- values are set in the appropriate diagnostic data ob-
Adjusting jects in the database.
Val- Any num- Sets the Minimum value the instrument can display
ues/Min ber ac- manually.
Value cording to
database
range info
Val- Any num- Sets the Maximum value the instrument can display
ues/Max ber ac- manually.
Value cording to
database
range info
Val- 10.000/any Defines the interval between two main tics.
ues/Delta number
Value for
Main Tics
Val- 10.000/any Defines the interval between two sub tics.
ues/Delta number
Value for
Sub Tics

245
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Val- true/false If true, the request parameter is sent only after re-
ues/Write leasing the mouse button. If false the request param-
after eter is sent during the complete sliding action.
Mouse
Up
Dis- <Short The Alias Name is displayed in the HMI Control when
play/Alias Name the option Alias Name is selected in the Graphical
Name of the Settings option Show Name.
selected
parameter>/any
name
Dis- Caption, Sets the name displayed inside the instrument.
play/Show Alias
Name Name, Caption: Displays the name defined in the Common
Parameter, Settings option Caption
Parameter Alias Name: Displays the name defined in the
Long- Graphical Settings option Alias Name
Name, Parameter: Displays the Short Name of the parame-
Ser- ter in the database
Parameter LongName: Displays the Long Name of
vice.Parameter,
Service, the parameter in the database
Service Service.Parameter: Displays the Short Name of the
Long- service and the Short Name of the parameter in
Name, the database in format <Short Name of Service>.<
None Short name of Parameter>
Service: Displays the Short Name of the service in
the database
Service LongName: Displays the Long Name of the
service in the database
None: Displays nothing
Dis- Horizontal, Switches the orientation used for the instrument.
play/Orientation
Vertical
Dis- Rectangular, Sets the shape of the instrument pointer.
play/Pointer) Circle, Tri-
angle,
Pointer
Color and White, any Sets the foreground color of the instrument.
Font/Foreground
color (color
box)
Color and Blue, Sets the background color of the instrument.
Font/Background
Any Color
(color box)

246
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Color and Orange, Sets the color of the intrument pointer.

Font/Color Any Color
for Pointer (color box)
Color and Red, Any Sets the color of the intrument pointer in case of an
Font/Color Color error.
for Error (color box)
Color and MS Sand Sets the font of the instrument labels.
Font/Font Serif, Any
Font (Font
Box)
Additional false, true Displays an additional mark in the instrument scale
marks/Mark with the numeric value entered in Mark [mark num-
[mark num- ber] Value.
ber] enable
Additional 0.00000, Value for the additional Mark [mark number].
marks/Mark any num-
[mark num- ber
ber] Value
0, 0 ... 100 Sets the number of ranges. For each range a block
Ranges/Number with the properties Lower Limit, Upper Limit and
of Ranges Color is added in the lines below.
0, Min Sets the lower limit of the range.
Ranges/Range Value ...
[range Max Value
number]
Lower
Limit
0, Min Set the upper limit of the range.
Ranges/Range Value ...
[range Max Value
number]
Upper
Limit
black, Set the color of the range.
Ranges/Range Any Color
[range (color box)
number]
Color

247
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

8.9.4.3 Bar Graph

The instrument type Bar Graph is used to read a single response parameter in form of a
slider.

Instrument Settings

The following table shows an overview of all properties and their values in the tab Graphical
Settings of a Bar Graph instrument. Default values are represented in bold letters.

Property Default Description

Group / Value /
Property Value
Range
Val- true/false Set the correct Min/Max-Value, provided that these
ues/Self- values are set in the appropriate diagnostic data ob-
Adjusting jects in the database.
Val- Any num- Sets the Minimum value the instrument can display
ues/Min ber ac- manually.
Value cording to
database
range info
Val- Any num- Sets the Maximum value the instrument can display
ues/Max ber ac- manually.
Value cording to
database
range info
Val- 10.000/any Defines the interval between two main tics.
ues/Delta number
Value for
Main Tics
Val- 10.000/any Defines the interval between two sub tics.
ues/Delta number
Value for
Sub Tics

248
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Dis- <Short The Alias Name is displayed in the HMI Control when
play/Alias Name the option Alias Name is selected in the Graphical
Name of the Settings option Show Name.
selected
parameter>/any
name
Dis- Caption, Sets the name displayed inside the instrument.
play/Show Alias
Name Name, Caption: Displays the name defined in the Common
Parameter, Settings option Caption
Parameter Alias Name: Displays the name defined in the
Long- Graphical Settings option Alias Name
Name, Parameter: Displays the Short Name of the parame-
Ser- ter in the database
Parameter LongName: Displays the Long Name of
vice.Parameter,
Service, the parameter in the database
Service Service.Parameter: Displays the Short Name of the
Long- service and the Short Name of the parameter in
Name, the database in format <Short Name of Service>.<
None Short name of Parameter>
Service: Displays the Short Name of the service in
the database
Service LongName: Displays the Long Name of the
service in the database
None: Displays nothing
Dis- Horizontal, Switches the orientation used for the instrument.
play/Orientation
Vertical
Dis- Rectangular, Sets the shape of the instrument pointer.
play/Pointer) Circle, Tri-
angle,
Pointer
Color and White, any Sets the foreground color of the instrument.
Font/Foreground
color (color
box)
Color and Blue, Sets the background color of the instrument.
Font/Background
Any Color
(color box)
Color and Orange, Sets the color of the instrument pointer.
Font/Color Any Color
for Pointer (color box)

249
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Color and MS Sand Sets the font of the instrument labels.

Font/Font Serif, Any
Font (Font
Box)
Additional false, true Displays an additional mark in the instrument scale
marks/Mark with the numeric value entered in Mark [mark num-
[mark num- ber] Value.
ber] enable
Additional 0.00000, Value for the additional Mark [mark number].
marks/Mark any num-
[mark num- ber
ber] Value
0, 0 ... 100 Sets the number of ranges. For each range a block
Ranges/Number with the properties Lower Limit, Upper Limit and
of Ranges Color is added in the lines below.
0, Min Sets the lower limit of the range.
Ranges/Range Value ...
[range Max Value
number]
Lower
Limit
0, Min Set the upper limit of the range.
Ranges/Range Value ...
[range Max Value
number]
Upper
Limit
black, Set the color of the range.
Ranges/Range Any Color
[range (color box)
number]
Color

8.9.4.4 7-Segment Display

The instrument type 7-Segment Display is used to read a single response parameter.

250
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Instrument Settings

The following table shows an overview of all properties and their values in the tab Graphical
Settings of a 7-Segment Display instrument. Default values are represented in bold letters.

Property Default Description

Group / Value /
Property Value
Range
Dis- <Short The Alias Name is displayed in the HMI Control when
play/Alias Name the option Alias Name is selected in the Graphical
Name of the Settings option Show Name.
selected
parameter>/any
name

251
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Dis- Caption, Sets the name displayed inside the instrument.

play/Show Alias
Name Name, Caption: Displays the name defined in the Common
Parameter, Settings option Caption
Parameter Alias Name: Displays the name defined in the
Long- Graphical Settings option Alias Name
Name, Parameter: Displays the Short Name of the parame-
Ser- ter in the database
Parameter LongName: Displays the Long Name of
vice.Parameter,
Service, the parameter in the database
Service Service.Parameter: Displays the Short Name of the
Long- service and the Short Name of the parameter in
Name, the database in format <Short Name of Service>.<
None Short name of Parameter>
Service: Displays the Short Name of the service in
the database
Service LongName: Displays the Long Name of the
service in the database
None: Displays nothing
Dis- 8, any Sets the number of digits.
play/Digits number
Dis- Decimal, Sets number format used for displaying the value.
play/Radix Binary,
Hexdeci-
mal
Dis- false, true Determines if the digits in front of the value are filled
play/Show with leading zeros.
Leading
Zeros
Dis- 2, any Determines the decimal point position.
play/Decimal number
Position
Dis- Normal, Sets the thickness of the segments.
play/SegmentSmall ,
Thickness Large
Dis- Normal, Determines the space between the digits.
play/SegmentSmall ,
Space Large
Dis- Normal, Determines the space between the segments.
play/SegmentSmall ,
Separation Large

252
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Dis- false, true If true, the segments are displayed in italic format.
play/Italic
Dis- false, true If true, unused segments are displayed in the color
play/Use defined by the property Off color.
Off Color
Col- Blue, Sets the background color of the instrument.
ors/Background
Any Color
(color box)
Colors/On White, Sets the color of used segments.
Color Any Color
(color box)
Colors/Off Red, Any Sets the color of unused segments.
Color Color
(color box)
Col- Green, Sets the background color in running mode.
ors/Color Any Color
for Run (color box)
Col- Red, Any Sets the color of used segements in case of an error.
ors/Color Color
for Error (color box)

8.9.4.5 Knob
The instrument type Knob is used to set a single request parameter.

253
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Keyboard Support

The knob position can be adjusted using the keyboard:

• Arrow Up key or Arrow Right key turns knob clockwise

• Arrow Down key or Arrow Left key turns knob counter clockwise

• Home key sets knob to the first position

• End key sets knob to the last position

Instrument Settings

The following table shows an overview of all properties and their values in the tab Graphical
Settings of a Knob instrument. Default values are represented in bold letters.

Property Default Description

Group / Value /
Property Value
Range

254
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Val- true/false Set the correct Min/Max-Value, provided that these

ues/Self- values are set in the appropriate diagnostic data ob-
Adjusting jects in the database.
Val- Any num- Sets the Minimum value the instrument can display
ues/Min ber ac- manually.
Value cording to
database
range info
Val- Any num- Sets the Maximum value the instrument can display
ues/Max ber ac- manually.
Value cording to
database
range info
Val- 10.000/any Defines the interval between two main tics.
ues/Delta number
Value for
Main Tics
Val- true/false If true, the request parameter is sent only after re-
ues/Write leasing the mouse button. If false, the request pa-
after rameter is sent during the complete switching action.
Mouse
Up
Dis- <Short The Alias Name is displayed in the HMI Control when
play/Alias Name the option Alias Name is selected in the Graphical
Name of the Settings option Show Name.
selected
parameter>/any
name

255
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Dis- Caption, Sets the name displayed inside the instrument.

play/Show Alias
Name Name, Caption: Displays the name defined in the Common
Parameter, Settings option Caption
Parameter Alias Name: Displays the name defined in the
Long- Graphical Settings option Alias Name
Name, Parameter: Displays the Short Name of the parame-
Ser- ter in the database
Parameter LongName: Displays the Long Name of
vice.Parameter,
Service, the parameter in the database
Service Service.Parameter: Displays the Short Name of the
Long- service and the Short Name of the parameter in
Name, the database in format <Short Name of Service>.<
None Short name of Parameter>
Service: Displays the Short Name of the service in
the database
Service LongName: Displays the Long Name of the
service in the database
None: Displays nothing
Dis- Circular, Switches the style used for the instrument.
play/Style Point,
Complex,
Faucet
Dis- Central, Sets the position of the instrument.
play/Position Left, Right
Dis- None, Cir- Sets the mark tyle used to indicate the knob position.
play/Mark cle, Trian-
gle, Arrow
Color and White, any Sets the foreground color of the instrument.
Font/Foreground
color (color
box)
Color and Blue, Sets the background color of the instrument.
Font/Background
Any Color
(color box)
Color and Orange, Sets the color of the knob.
Font/Color Any Color
for Knob (color box)
Color and Red, Any Sets the color of the knob mark.
Font/Color Color
for Mark (color box)

256
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Color and Red, Any Sets the color of the knob in case of an error.
Font/Color Color
for Error (color box)
Color and Arial, Any Sets the font of the instrument labels.
Font/Font Font (Font
Box)

8.9.4.6 Oscilloscope
The instrument type Oscilloscope is used as a y-t plotter. It writes the value of a parameter
over the time into a graph.

Plot Area

The Pause button only freezes the display, it does not stop data recording. Data recording
continues to run in the background. Recorded data will be displayed when the Start button

257
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

is pressed the next time.

The little arrows on the axis allow modifying the displayed range.

The Oscilloscope instrument supports writing 8 different parameter values in parallel.

The size of the plot area can be defined using the properties in the section Plot Area of the
Graphical Settings tab.

Legend

A legend showing the name of the parameter can be displayed when the property Show
Legend in activated in the Configurator.

The name of the parameters in the legend is specified by the selected item of the Show
Legend property. If Show Legend is set to None, the legend will be hidden.

The size of the legend area can be adjusted using the separating line between legend and
plot area. Double-clicking the line resets the area to the default size.

The channels in the legend are preceded by a colored box and an additional checkbox.
The color of the box corresponds to the plot line color of the channel in the plot area. The
checkbox allows turning the corresponding plot line in the plot area on and off.

Keyboard Support

The button state can be toggled using the SPACE key.

• Arrow Up key or Arrow Right selects the next button to the right

• Arrow Down key or Arrow Left selects the next button to the left

Instrument Settings

The following table shows an overview of all properties and their values in the tab Graphical
Settings of an Oscilloscope instrument. Default values are represented in bold letters.

Property Default Description

Group / Value /
Property Value
Range
Val- true/false Set the correct Min/Max-Value, provided that these
ues/Self- values are set in the appropriate diagnostic data ob-
Adjusting jects in the database.

258
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Val- Any num- Sets the Minimum value the instrument can display
ues/Min ber ac- manually.
Value cording to
database
range info
Val- Any num- Sets the Maximum value the instrument can display
ues/Max ber ac- manually.
Value cording to
database
range info
Val- 10/any in- Sets the number of horizontal orientation lines.
ues/Number teger num-
of Tics ber
Dis- None, hori- Determines how the grid is displayed.
play/Grid zontal, ver-
Type tical, both
Dis- Pan, Wrap Switches between different data scroll options.
play/Pan Around
Mode
Dis- None, Labels the y-axis with the name of the parameter.
play/Show Alias
Legend Name, Alias Name: Displays the name defined in the
Parameter, Graphical Settings option Alias Name as label
Parameter Parameter: Displays the Short Name of the parame-
Long- ter in the database as label
Name, Parameter LongName: Displays the Long Name of
Ser- the parameter in the database as label
Service.Parameter: Displays the Short Name of the
vice.Parameter,
Service, service and the Short Name of the parameter in
Service the database in format <Short Name of Service>.<
LongName Short name of Parameter> as label
Service: Displays the Short Name of the service in
the database as label
Service LongName: Displays the Long Name of the
service in the database as label
None: Displays no label
Dis- true, false If false, the Start/Pause button is not displayed.
play/Show
Button

259
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Plot 90, 0...100 Defines the vertical size of the grid in percent of the
Area/Bottom size available for the plot area (grid area including
area used by the x-axis and its labels). The value
defines the bottom edge of the grid in the plot area.
When using a value of 100 the grid will fill the whole
plot area in vertical direction. The x-axis and its la-
bels will not be displayed any more in this case.
Plot 10, 0...100 Defines the horizontal size of the grid in percent of
Area/Left the size available for the plot area (grid area including
area used by the y-axis and its labels). The value
defines the left edge of the grid in the plot area.
When using a value of 0 the grid will fill the whole plot
area in horizontal direction. The y-axis and its labels
will not be displayed any more in this case.
Color and White, Sets the background color of the instrument.
Font/Background
Any Color
(color box)
Color and Black, Sets the color of the grid.
Font/Color Any Color
for Grid (color box)
Color and Arial, Any Sets the font of the instrument labels.
Font/Font Font (Font
Box)
true, false If true, trace recording is started with the start of the
Trace/Start instrument.
trace file
on activa-
tion
Chan- 1 ... 8 Channel number
nels/No.
Chan- read only Name of the parameter used for the channel with this
nels/Name field number.
Chan- <Short The Alias Name is displayed as label of the Y-axis
nels/Alias Name in the HMI Control when the option Alias Name is se-
Name of the lected in the Graphical Settings option Show Legend.
selected
parameter>/any
name
Chan- 2, 0 ... 4 Sets the width of the graph line.
nels/Width

260
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Chan- Solid, Sets the type of the graph line.

nels/Type Dash, Dot,
Dash-Dot,
Dash-Dot-
Dot
Chan- Analog, Sets the sampling mode (only visualization).
nels/Mode Logical,
Discrete
Chan- Any Color Sets the color of the graph line for this channel.
nels/Color (color box),
default
value de-
pends
on the
selected
channel
0, 0 ... 100 Sets the number of ranges. For each range a block
Ranges/Number with the properties Lower Limit, Upper Limit and
of Ranges Color is added in the lines below.
0, Min Sets the lower limit of the range.
Ranges/RangeValue ...
[range Max Value
number]
Lower
Limit
0, Min Set the upper limit of the range.
Ranges/RangeValue ...
[range Max Value
number]
Upper
Limit
black, Set the color of the range.
Ranges/RangeAny Color
[range (color box)
number]
Color

8.9.4.7 Toggle Button

The instrument type Toggle Button is used to send a single diagnostic service.

261
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

The Toggle Button can be used to start or stop the cyclic the sending of a service that
is configured in the data server. The service will be sent also when the instruments are
stopped. All Graphical Instruments that display the parameter value will be activated.

When the Toggle Button is pressed the selected service checked in the Parameters tab is
sent.

All Graphical Instruments that are configured to display one of the parameters of the service
will be activated.

Keyboard Support

The button state can be toggled using the SPACE key.

Instrument Settings

The following table shows an overview of all properties and their values in the tab Graphical
Settings of a Toggle Button instrument. Default values are represented in bold letters.

Property Default Description

Group / Value /
Property Value
Range
Dis- <Short The Alias Name is displayed in the HMI Control when
play/Alias Name the option Alias Name is selected in the Graphical
Name of the Settings option Show Name.
service>/any
name

262
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Dis- Caption, Sets the name displayed inside the instrument.

play/Show Alias
Name Name, Caption: Displays the name defined in the Common
Service Settings option Caption
LongName Alias Name: Displays the name defined in the
Graphical Settings option Alias Name
Service: Displays the Short Name of the service in
the database
Service LongName: Displays the Long Name of the
service in the database
Dis- Enable, If enabled, the label of the Toggle Button blinks during
play/Blink Disable execution.
Dis- Slow, Nor- Sets the blink rate of the label during execution.
play/Blink mal, Fast
Rate
Color and Green, Sets the color pressed button.
Font/Color Any Color
for Run (color box)
Color and White, Sets the color of the released button.
Font/Color Any Color
for Stop (color box)
Color and Red, Any Sets the color of the Toggle Button in case of an error.
Font/Color Color
for Error (color box)
Color and Arial, Any Sets the font of the instrument labels.
Font/Font Font (Font
Box)

8.9.4.8 Toggle Group Button

The instrument type Toggle Group Button is used to send a user defined set of of diagnostic
services.

263
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

The Toggle Group Button can be used to start or stop the cyclic the sending of one or
more services that are configured in the data server. The services will be sent also when
the instruments are stopped. All Graphical Instruments that display one or more of these
parameter values will be activated.

When the Toggle Group Button is pressed the services checked in the Parameters tab are
sent.

All Graphical Instruments that are configured to display one of the parameters of the service
will be activated.

Keyboard Support

The button state can be toggled using the SPACE key.

Instrument Settings

The following table shows an overview of all properties and their values in the tab Graphical
Settings of a Toggle Group Button instrument. Default values are represented in bold letters.

Property Default Description

Group / Value /
Property Value
Range
Dis- Enable, If enabled, the label of the Toggle Button blinks during
play/Blink Disable execution.
Dis- Slow, Nor- Sets the blink frequency of the button label during
play/Blink mal, Fast execution.
Rate
Color and Green, Sets the color pressed button.
Font/Color Any Color
for Run (color box)
Color and White, Sets the color of the released button.
Font/Color Any Color
for Stop (color box)
Color and Red, Any Sets the color of the Toggle Button in case of an error.
Font/Color Color
for Error (color box)
Color and Arial, Any Sets the font of the instrument labels.
Font/Font Font (Font
Box)

264
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

8.9.4.9 Input Field

The instrument type Input Field is used to set a single request parameter.

Keyboard Support

For a input field with a numeric value the value can be adjusted using the keyboard:

• Arrow Up key increases the value

• Arrow Down key decreases the value

Instrument Settings

The following table shows an overview of all properties and their values in the tab Graphical
Settings of an Input Field instrument. Default values are represented in bold letters.

Property Default Description

Group / Value /
Property Value
Range
Val- Any num- Sets the Minimum value the instrument can display
ues/Min ber ac- manually.
Value cording to
database
range info
Val- Any num- Sets the Maximum value the instrument can display
ues/Max ber ac- manually.
Value cording to
database
range info

265
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Dis- <Short The Alias Name is displayed in the HMI Control when
play/Alias Name the option Alias Name is selected in the Graphical
Name of the Settings option Show Name.
selected
parameter>/any
name
Dis- Caption, Sets the name displayed inside the instrument.
play/Show Alias
Name Name, Caption: Displays the name defined in the Common
Parameter, Settings option Caption
Parameter Alias Name: Displays the name defined in the
Long- Graphical Settings option Alias Name
Name, Parameter: Displays the Short Name of the parame-
Ser- ter in the database
Parameter LongName: Displays the Long Name of
vice.Parameter,
Service, the parameter in the database
Service Service.Parameter: Displays the Short Name of the
Long- service and the Short Name of the parameter in
Name, the database in format <Short Name of Service>.<
None Short name of Parameter>
Service: Displays the Short Name of the service in
the database
Service LongName: Displays the Long Name of the
service in the database
None: Displays nothing
Dis- 50, Any Size of the Output Field in percent of the instrument.
play/Output Number
Field
Size[%]
Color and White, any Sets the caption color of the instrument.
Font/Foreground
color (color
box)
Color and Blue, Sets the background color of the instrument.
Font/Background
Any Color
(color box)

8.9.4.10 Output Field

The instrument type Output Field is used to display a single response parameter.

266
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Instrument Settings

The following table shows an overview of all properties and their values in the tab Graphical
Settings of an Output Field instrument. Default values are represented in bold letters.

Property Default Description

Group / Value /
Property Value
Range
Dis- <Short The Alias Name is displayed in the HMI Control when
play/Alias Name the option Alias Name is selected in the Graphical
Name of the Settings option Show Name.
selected
parameter>/any
name

267
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Dis- Caption, Sets the name displayed inside the instrument.

play/Show Alias
Name Name, Caption: Displays the name defined in the Common
Parameter, Settings option Caption
Parameter Alias Name: Displays the name defined in the
Long- Graphical Settings option Alias Name
Name, Parameter: Displays the Short Name of the parame-
Ser- ter in the database
Parameter LongName: Displays the Long Name of
vice.Parameter,
Service, the parameter in the database
Service Service.Parameter: Displays the Short Name of the
Long- service and the Short Name of the parameter in
Name, the database in format <Short Name of Service>.<
None Short name of Parameter>
Service: Displays the Short Name of the service in
the database
Service LongName: Displays the Long Name of the
service in the database
None: Displays nothing
Dis- 50, Any Size of the Output Field in percent of the instrument.
play/Output Number
Field
Size[%]
Dis- 0, Any Size of the Unit Output Field in percent of the instru-
play/Unit Number ment.
Field
Size[%]
Dis- Decimal, Sets number format used for displaying the value.
play/Radix Binary,
Hexdeci-
mal
Color and White, any Sets the caption color of the instrument.
Font/Foreground
color (color
box)
Color and Blue, Sets the background color of the instrument.
Font/Background
Any Color
(color box)
Color and Blue, Sets the text background color of the instrument.
Font/Text Any Color
back- (color box)
ground

268
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

8.9.4.11 LED
The instrument type LED is used to display boolean information.

Instrument Settings

The following table shows an overview of all properties and their values in the tab Graphical
Settings of a LED instrument. Default values are represented in bold letters.

Property Default Description

Group / Value /
Property Value
Range
Dis- <Short The Alias Name is displayed in the HMI Control when
play/Alias Name the option Alias Name is selected in the Graphical
Name of the Settings option Show Name.
selected
parameter>/any
name
Dis- Caption, Sets the name displayed inside the instrument.
play/Show Alias
Name Name, Caption: Displays the name defined in the Common
Parameter, Settings option Caption
Parameter Alias Name: Displays the name defined in the
Long- Graphical Settings option Alias Name
Name, Parameter: Displays the Short Name of the parame-
Ser- ter in the database
Parameter LongName: Displays the Long Name of
vice.Parameter,
Service, the parameter in the database
Service Service.Parameter: Displays the Short Name of the
Long- service and the Short Name of the parameter in
Name, the database in format <Short Name of Service>.<
None Short name of Parameter>
Service: Displays the Short Name of the service in
the database
Service LongName: Displays the Long Name of the
service in the database
None: Displays nothing

269
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Dis- !=0/Any Term that decides if the LED changes to state On or

play/Value Operation Off
for On The following operators are offered: !=, ==, >, <, >=,
<=
Dis- Rectangle/Ellipse
Sets the style of the LED.
play/Led
Style
Col- Gray, Sets the background color of the instrument.
ors/Background
Any Color
(color box)
Colors/On Green, Sets the color for On state.
Color Any Color
(color box)
Colors/Off Red, Any Sets the color for Off state.
Color Color
(color box)
Col- Red, Any Sets the color in case of an error.
ors/Color Color
for Error (color box)

8.9.4.12 Thermometer
The instrument type Thermometer serves as an instrument to display numerical values with
additional marks. The current value is visualized as a filled tube.

Instrument Settings

The following table shows an overview of all properties and their values in the tab Graphical

270
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Settings of a Thermometer instrument. Default values are represented in bold letters.

Property Default Description

Group / Value /
Property Value
Range
Val- true/false Set the correct Min/Max-Value, provided that these
ues/Self- values are set in the appropriate diagnostic data ob-
Adjusting jects in the database.
Val- Any num- Sets the Minimum value the instrument can display
ues/Min ber ac- manually.
Value cording to
database
range info
Val- Any num- Sets the Maximum value the instrument can display
ues/Max ber ac- manually.
Value cording to
database
range info
Val- 10.000/any Defines the interval between two main tics.
ues/Delta number
Value for
Main Tics
Dis- <Short The Alias Name is displayed in the HMI Control when
play/Alias Name the option Alias Name is selected in the Graphical
Name of the Settings option Show Name.
selected
parameter>/any
name

271
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Dis- Caption, Sets the name displayed inside the instrument.

play/Show Alias
Name Name, Caption: Displays the name defined in the Common
Parameter, Settings option Caption
Parameter Alias Name: Displays the name defined in the
Long- Graphical Settings option Alias Name
Name, Parameter: Displays the Short Name of the parame-
Ser- ter in the database
Parameter LongName: Displays the Long Name of
vice.Parameter,
Service, the parameter in the database
Service Service.Parameter: Displays the Short Name of the
Long- service and the Short Name of the parameter in
Name, the database in format <Short Name of Service>.<
None Short name of Parameter>
Service: Displays the Short Name of the service in
the database
Service LongName: Displays the Long Name of the
service in the database
None: Displays nothing
Dis- 0, 0...6 This setting sets the number of digits of the current
play/Digital value displayed in the instrument.
Digits
Color and White, any Sets the foreground color of the instrument.
Font/Foreground
color (color
box)
Color and Blue, Sets the background color of the instrument.
Font/Background
Any Color
(color box)
Color and Orange, Sets the color of the instrument pointer.
Font/Color Any Color
for Value (color box)
Color and MS Sand Sets the font of the instrument labels.
Font/Font Serif, Any
Font (Font
Box)
Additional false, true Displays an additional mark in the instrument scale
marks/Mark with the numeric value entered in Mark [mark num-
[mark num- ber] Value.
ber] enable

272
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Additional 0.00000, Value for the additional Mark [mark number].

marks/Mark any num-
[mark num- ber
ber] Value
0, 0 ... 100 Sets the number of ranges. For each range a block
Ranges/Number with the properties Lower Limit, Upper Limit and
of Ranges Color is added in the lines below.
0, Min Sets the lower limit of the range.
Ranges/Range Value ...
[range Max Value
number]
Lower
Limit
0, Min Set the upper limit of the range.
Ranges/Range Value ...
[range Max Value
number]
Upper
Limit
black, Set the color of the range.
Ranges/Range Any Color
[range (color box)
number]
Color

8.9.4.13 Level Indicator

The instrument type Level Indicator serves as an instrument to display numerical values with
additional marks. The current value is displayed by a moving indicator.

273
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Instrument Settings

The following table shows an overview of all properties and their values in the tab Graphical
Settings of a Level Indicator instrument. Default values are represented in bold letters.

Property Default Description

Group / Value /
Property Value
Range
Val- true/false Set the correct Min/Max-Value, provided that these
ues/Self- values are set in the appropriate diagnostic data ob-
Adjusting jects in the database.
Val- Any num- Sets the Minimum value the instrument can display
ues/Min ber ac- manually.
Value cording to
database
range info
Val- Any num- Sets the Maximum value the instrument can display
ues/Max ber ac- manually.
Value cording to
database
range info
Val- 10.000/any Defines the interval between two main tics.
ues/Delta number
Value for
Main Tics

274
8.9. HMI Control Graphical Instrument

Dis- <Short The Alias Name is displayed in the HMI Control when
play/Alias Name the option Alias Name is selected in the Graphical
Name of the Settings option Show Name.
selected
parameter>/any
name
Dis- Caption, Sets the name displayed inside the instrument.
play/Show Alias
Name Name, Caption: Displays the name defined in the Common
Parameter, Settings option Caption
Parameter Alias Name: Displays the name defined in the
Long- Graphical Settings option Alias Name
Name, Parameter: Displays the Short Name of the parame-
Ser- ter in the database
Parameter LongName: Displays the Long Name of
vice.Parameter,
Service, the parameter in the database
Service Service.Parameter: Displays the Short Name of the
Long- service and the Short Name of the parameter in
Name, the database in format <Short Name of Service>.<
None Short name of Parameter>
Service: Displays the Short Name of the service in
the database
Service LongName: Displays the Long Name of the
service in the database
None: Displays nothing
Dis- 0, 0...6 This setting sets the number of digits of the current
play/Digital value displayed in the instrument.
Digits
Color and White, any Sets the foreground color of the instrument.
Font/Foreground
color (color
box)
Color and Blue, Sets the background color of the instrument.
Font/Background
Any Color
(color box)
Color and Orange, Sets the color of the instrument pointer.
Font/Color Any Color
for Value (color box)
Color and MS Sand Sets the font of the instrument labels.
Font/Font Serif, Any
Font (Font
Box)

275
8.10. HMI Control IO Control (Discontinued)

Additional false, true Displays an additional mark in the instrument scale

marks/Mark with the numeric value entered in Mark [mark num-
[mark num- ber] Value.
ber] enable
Additional 0.00000, Value for the additional Mark [mark number].
marks/Mark any num-
[mark num- ber
ber] Value
0, 0 ... 100 Sets the number of ranges. For each range a block
Ranges/Number with the properties Lower Limit, Upper Limit and
of Ranges Color is added in the lines below.
0, Min Sets the lower limit of the range.
Ranges/Range
Value ...
[range Max Value
number]
Lower
Limit
0, Min Set the upper limit of the range.
Ranges/Range
Value ...
[range Max Value
number]
Upper
Limit
black, Set the color of the range.
Any Color
Ranges/Range
[range (color box)
number]
Color

8.10 HMI Control IO Control (Discontinued)

General Information

This HMI Control is not supported any more for new workspaces. It can still be
executed in existing workspaces.
Its functionality is now part of the Service Table HMI Control.

276
8.10. HMI Control IO Control (Discontinued)

Description The HMI Control IO Control allows sending predefined diag-

nostic services to an ECU in an easy and comfortable way.
The services address actuators or are setting internal in an
ECU.
Services can be added simply and fast using Drag and Drop
from the Service Tree. Alias names for service parameters are
supported.
A colored icon shows if the service has been executed suc-
cessfully. Response messages from an ECU are not dis-
played.
Classification Function HMI Control
License HMI Library Extension required
Reports not supported

The messages to be sent are displayed in a list with their parameters. In addition to sending,
it is also possible to change the values of the RequestParameters or reset them to standard
values. These standard values are independent from the standard values of the diagnostic
database and will be defined during HMI Control configuration. Then they are stored together
with the appropriate Monaco configuration, where the HMI Control IO Control was inserted.
The user will be informed about the result of a sent item with help of a colored feedback
lamp, the Execution State. A green lamp indicates the good-case, a red one the bad-case.

8.10.1 Using the HMI Control IO Control

The user interface consists of two parts, the Toolbar and the Process Value area, where a
list of items to send to the ECU will be shown, you can see the two parts in the figure from
below.

Process Value

277
8.10. HMI Control IO Control (Discontinued)

• Diagnostic Service: In this column the ShortName of the DiagnosticService, which

belongs to this row is displayed.

• Logical Link: The second column, the LogicalLink, is used for sending the Diagnostic-
Service from the first row.

• Request Param: In this column the request service parameters of the DiagnosticSer-
vice are displayed. If a DiagnosticService has more than one request service parame-
ter every parameter gets its own row.

• Value: In this row the Value of the appropriate request service parameter is displayed
which will be sent to the ECU after pressing the Transmit button. The value can be
changed with help of a list box, which occurs after a double click onto the appropriate
cell. If the value bases on a computational method from type texttable the list box
displays all possible values.

If the value is from a numeric type the value has to be typed into the cell after the
double click. The typed value can only be in the range, which is specified as max and
min value in the appropriate DiagnosticDataObject in the Venice database.

• Unit: If a unit was defined for the request service parameter it will be displayed in this
column. A unit has to be defined with help of the DTS Venice database editor.

• RangeInfo: If an information about the range is available you can find the entry in
this column. Possible range information are Value OK, Value not defined, Value not
available and Value not valid. The range information has to be defined with help of the
DTS Venice database editor.

The range information is not displayed as default. If you want to add it to the process
values you must set its visibility with help of the Configurator for this HMI Control in the
tab General Settings.

Toolbar

• [Transmit]: This button allows sending a Diagnostic Service or onboard message to an

ECU. Select the row from the appropriate DiagnosticService and press the Transmit
button. If you want to send a DiagnosticService which has more than one request
service parameter and uses therefore more than one line in the process value area it
does not make any difference which line you select from this DiagnosticService before
pressing the Transmit button.

After pressing the Transmit button a square icon occurs in the process value area in
the column DiagnosticService. It has the name Execution State and informs the user,

278
8.10. HMI Control IO Control (Discontinued)

whether the execution of the service was okay, or if an error has occurred. In the good-
case the square icon has a green color and will be displayed only for a short time.
In the bad-case it has the color red and will not hide until the DiagnosticService was
executed again in a good-case.

• [Reload]: The usage of the Reload button is nearly the same as of the Transmit button.
But before sending, the request service parameter in the selected value cell of the
process value area will be overwritten with the value defined in the Configurator. This
value is independent of the database and has to be set when defining the paramter
configuration of the service in the Configurator of this HMI Control.

• [Configure]: The configure button allows to execute the Configurator of this HMI Con-
trol during execution mode. Because not every setting can be changed during execu-
tion mode some settings may be disabled. The Configurator is explained in chapter
Configuration of the HMI Control IO Control.

Label and visibility of the buttons can be changed with help of the Configurator for this HMI
Control.

Additional Notes

• When you select and delete a row with a Request Parameter entry in the IO Control
Panel the associated service will be removed with all its parameters.

• The IO Control HMI Control supports Drag and Drop actions from the Service Tree HMI
Control. You may drag and drop services and functional classes into the IO Control
HMI Control. If these have request parameters the default values for these parameters
will be used. A dialog will be shown if there are no default values defined for that
parameter. So you may enter the correct ones.

279
8.10. HMI Control IO Control (Discontinued)

This dialog will also be shown when you hold down the CTRL key while executing a
Drag and Drop action. In this dialog you may select which request parameter shall be
displayed in the IO Control HMI Control.
Click Save to accept the configuration for this parameter.
Click Cancel to reject the parameter settings and go on to the next parameter.
Click Abort to reject this parameter setting and all further ones.

• You may Drag and Drop multiple services and functional classes at a time. The pa-
rameters of each service contained will be processed one after the other, e.g. when
holding down the CTRL key while executing a Drag and Drop action, you will get a
parameter selection dialog for every service that was selected or is contained in a
functional class.

• The IO Control HMI Control supports only the service types Service and Simple Ser-
vice. A Service contains 0 to n request parameters and 0 to m response parameters.
A Simple Service contains 0 to n request parameters and 0 to 1 response parameters.
A request parameter of these service types will be displayed if it has the parameter
type eVALUE and data type Simple Data Type (see ASAM Specification). An error
message with the following error text will appear if this is not the case:
No valid request parameter available: There is no request parameter to display.

280
8.10. HMI Control IO Control (Discontinued)

The following request parameter is invalid: The request parameter is not of the correct
type.
If you press OK the next parameter will be processed. Clicking Cancel aborts the
process.

8.10.2 Configuration of the HMI Control IO Control

The look and behavior of the HMI Control in Execution Mode is controlled by the settings
provided by its Configurator.
For information how to work with the Configurator of an HMI Control see chapter Configura-
tion of HMI Controls.

The image below shows the Configurator window with the Common Settings tab selected.

It contains the following tabs on the left:

• Common Settings: Settings that control the look and behavior of the HMI Control (de-
scribed below)

• Filters: Settings for filtering Logical Links that are not required

• IO Controls: List of services displayed in the process value area

281
8.10. HMI Control IO Control (Discontinued)

The tabs on the right Services and Configuration are used for designing the IO Control
services.

• Services: For detailed information about the tab Services please see chapter Config-
uration of Services and ComPrimitives

• Configuration: The usage of the tab Configuration is the same as described in chapter
Configuration of Services and ComPrimitives

The following buttons are available:

• OK : Saves the current configuration and closes the Configurator

• Cancel: Changes are discarded and the Configurator is closed

• Help: Opens the appropriate chapter in the Monaco help

8.10.2.1 Common Settings

The table below describes all properties of the tab Common Settings and their value range .
Default values are represented in bold letters.

Property Default Description

Group / Value /
Property Value
Range
Gen- IO Con- Name of the HMI Control that will be displayed in its
eral/Caption trol/any surrounding frame.
character This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
string rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
Gen- true/ false Switches visualization of a border frame between on
eral/Show and off.
Frame This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
Gen- true/false Switches visualization of Diagnostic Services be-
eral/Show tween on and off
Services

282
8.10. HMI Control IO Control (Discontinued)

Gen- false/true Switches visualization of FunctionalClasses (includ-

eral/Show ing Services) between on and off
Functional-
Classes
Gen- true/ false Switches visualization of LongName of data object in
eral/Show the user interface between on and off
Long-
Names
Gen- true/ false Switches visualization of LogicalLinks on ECUVari-
eral/Show ants in tab Filters and Services of the Configurator
LogicalL- between on and off
inks on This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
Variants rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
Gen- false/true The communication starts automatically, if the com-
eral/Auto munication has not been started already. If the ser-
Start Com- vice belongs to a Base Variant a VariantIdentificatio-
munication nAndSelection ComPrimitive will be executed.
Process true/false Switches visualization of the names of Diagnostic-
Values Services in the user interface between on and off
Win- (column DiagnosticService)
dow/Display
Service
Names
Process true/false Switches visualization of an alias name of a Service
Values on and off
Win-
dow/Display
Alias
Name
Process true/false Switches visualization of the names of LogicalLinks
Values in the user interface between on and off (column Log-
Win- icalLink)
dow/Display
Link Name
Process true/false Determines if Range Information is displayed in the
Values user interface
Win-
dow/Display
Range In-
formation

283
8.10. HMI Control IO Control (Discontinued)

Process true/false Determines if the Excution State icon is displayed in

Values the user interface
Win-
dow/Show
Execution
State
Trans- true/false Switches visualization of the button Transmit in the
mit But- user interface between on and off
ton/Visible
Trans- Start/any Caption of the button
mit But- character
ton/Caption string
Transmit Stop/any Caption of the button after it was pressed in the Exe-
Button/Run character cution Mode
Caption string
Reload true/false Switches visualization of the button Reload in the
But- user interface between on and off
ton/Visible
Reload Start/any Caption of the button
But- character
ton/Caption string
Reload Stop/any Caption of the button after it was pressed in the Exe-
Button/Run character cution Mode
Caption string
Config- true/false Switches visualization of the button Configure in the
ure But- user interface between on and off
ton/Visible This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.

8.10.2.2 IO Controls
This tab contains the Diagnostic Services that should be displayed in the Process Value area
in the user interface.
The structure and the handling of this tab is the same as described in chapter Designing
Sequences of Services, ComPrimitives and OTX Scripts

The Configuration tab on the right is divided into the sections Params, Selection and Execu-
tion .

• Params

284
8.11. HMI Control Logical Link List

In the section Params the standard values for the request service parameters are
defined in the appropriate cell (by double clicking). As default the standard settings are
taken from the database. After changing the standard values the settings can be stored
independently from the database together with the Monaco Workspace configuration.

If a checkbox is marked, the request service parameter will be displayed in the process
value area. As default no checkbox is marked.

Please note that the appropriate Service will not be displayed in the Process Value
area of the user interface if no checkbox is marked.

• Selection
In the section Selection checking Select all will select all the request service parame-
ters. Unchecking it will deselect all parameters.

• Execution
The section Execution is explained in chapter Configuration of Services and ComPrim-
itives.

8.11 HMI Control Logical Link List

General Information

Description The HMI Control Logical Link List visualizes Logical Links and
their states across all HMI Controls. It is a central point in a
workspace that can be used to intitialize or terminate the com-
munication to an ECU. It can dispay communication errors.
Classification Control HMI Control
License HMI Library Extension required
Reports not supported

285
8.11. HMI Control Logical Link List

8.11.1 Using the HMI Control Logical Link List

The HMI Control Logical Link List displays all Logical Links within the selected Vehicle Infor-
mation Table (VIT) of a DTS Project.

The pre-configured Logical Link List Control is shown in the image below.

Icon mode Report Mode

A context menu is available for every Logical Link in the list. This menu offers the following
items:

Menu Item Remarks

Copy Cell to Copies only the content of the selected cell to the Clipboard.
Clipboard
Copy Line to Copies the selected line to the Clipboard. You may also use CTRL+C
Clipboard to copy your selection to the Clipboard.
Copy All to Clip- Copies the whole content of the control to the Clipboard.
board
Open Logical Opens a Logical Link.
Link For details see Logical Link States.

286
8.11. HMI Control Logical Link List

Close Logical Closes a Logical Link.

Link For details see Logical Link States.
A double-click or pressing Enter on a Logical Link in state communica-
tion will close the Logical Link.
Start Communi- Starts Bus Communication for this Logical Link.
cation For details see Logical Link States.
A double-click or pressing <Enter> on a closed Logical Link will start
communication on this Logical Link.
Stop Communi- Stops Bus Communication for this Logical Link.
cation For details see Logical Link States
New tab for Opens a new Monaco Layout with a Diagnostic Services HMI Control
Logical Link and starts Bus Communication for this Logical Link. Once the new Lay-
out is created, a right-click on its tab headline will enable you to remove
the Layout again.

The Logical Links are displayed with a status icon showing the current state of the link (see
Logical Link States).

The HMI Control Logical Link List has the functionality of a master for controlling the state of
Logical Links. This means that if a Logical Link is closed by the Logical Link List HMI Control
all other Logical Links to this ECU currently used in other HMI controls are also closed.

Closing the Logical Link has no effect on some other HMI Controls when the following con-
ditions are met:

• An OTX script is executed by an HMI Control. The HMI Control which executes the
OTX script cannot detect which Logical Link is used by the OTX script.

• A Sequence is running in an HMI Control and using the Logical Link which shall be
closed or executes an OTX script.

• An HMI Control is communicating with several ECUs (e.g. Quick Test).

• The Flash Programming HMI Control is performing a flash process using the Logical
Link that is to be closed.

• The Variant Coding HMI Control is performing a coding process using the Logical Link
that is to be closed.

287
8.11. HMI Control Logical Link List

In this case these HMI Controls do not cancel their actions, but they write an error message
to the status view.

Tool Bar

The Toolbar can be enabled in the Common Settings of the HMI Configurator by setting the
Property Show Toolbar to true).

Button Functionality Corresponding ComPrimitives

Starts and stops the bus commu- StartCommunication

nication; StopCommunication
DTS 8 COS initializes or deinitial-
izes an ECU;

performs a Variant Identification; VariantIdentification

only available when an ECUBase-
Variant is selected

8.11.2 Configuration of the HMI Control Logical Link List

The Configurator offers options to control the behavior of the LogicalLinkList HMI Control in
Execution Mode..

It contains the following tabs:

• Common Settings

• Filters: For detailed information please have a look at the chapter Using Filters.

• OK : Saves the current configuration and closes the Configurator

• Cancel: Changes are discarded and the Configurator is closed

• Help: Opens the appropriate chapter in the Monaco help

8.11.2.1 Common Settings

The image below shows the dialog window LogicalLink List - Configurator with the Common
Settings tab opened.

288
8.11. HMI Control Logical Link List

The following table shows an overview of all Properties and their values of the tab Common
Settings. Default values are represented in bold letters.

PROPERTY VALUES DESCRIPTION

GROUP /
PROPERTY
General/Caption Logical Link List/any character Name of the HMI Control that will
string be displayed in its frame.
General/Show true/false Displays the HMI control with or
Frame without frame and caption
General/Show true/false Shows the LongName or Short-
LongNames Name of the Logical Link.

289
8.11. HMI Control Logical Link List

General/Show true/false If parameter View Mode is set to

LogicalLink Report a column named State is
State added to the Logical link list show-
ing the state of the Logical Link as
a text (closed, online, communica-
tion)
General/Show true/false If parameter View Mode is set
Column Variants to Report a column named ECU-
Variant is added to the Logical link
list showing the Name of the ECU
Variant if it was detected or the
state of variant detection(Variant
not set, Variant not detected)
General/Show false/true Shows a toolbar above the Logical
Toolbar Link table
General/Show true/false Shows the toolbar button
Button Start/Stop Comm
”Start/Stop
Comm”
General/Show false/true Shows the toolbar button Variant
Button ”Variant Identify
Identify”
General/Show false/true Additionally shows all Variants as
LogicalLinks on Logical Links
Variants
General/Sorting Alphabetic/None/Reverse/LinkstateSets the sorting of the Logical
Links
Alphabetic: the Logical Links are
sorted in alphabetic order
None: the Logical Links are listed
as they are found in the database
Reverse: the Logical Links are
sorted in reverse alphabetic order
Linkstate: the Logical Links are
sorted according to their Links
State

290
8.11. HMI Control Logical Link List

General/View Icon/Report Icon: The Logical Links are show

Mode in a simple list without additional
information
Report: The Logical Links are
show in a table with optional
columns State and Variants

8.11.2.2 Filters
The Filters tab allows controlling the Logical Links shown in the LogicalLink list of the HMI
Control.

It has the following layout:

The Filters tab lists all Logical Links of the current DTS project.

The following table gives an overview of all properties and their values in the tab Filters.

291
8.12. HMI Control OBD

Default values are represented by bold letters.

PROPERTY VALUES DESCRIPTION

LogicalLink filter off/on on: enables Logical Link filtering,
off: every Logical Link of the cur-
rent DTS project is listed in Logi-
cal Link list
LogicalLink fil- pass/reject pass: this Logical Link will be
ter/Link Name listed in Logical Link list;
reject: this Logical Link will not be
listed

8.12 HMI Control OBD

General Information

292
8.12. HMI Control OBD

Description The HMI Control OBD provides a comfortable and fast access
to exhaust related control units using standardized diagnos-
tic services in acc. with ISO 15031-5 or SAE J1979:2014-07
(Euro 5+6) and SAE J2012.
It allows the validation and release of the OBD standardized
diagnostic functions of individual ECUs or a complete ECU
network.

Areas of Application

• Development of onboard diagnostics for individual ECUs

or entire vehicles

• Based on data in accordance with ODX 2.2.0

• Function test and validation

• ECU integration and system test

• Test drive

Features

• Automatic bus recognition (K-line, CAN)

• Running Mode 1 to Mode A (ISO 15031-5, SAE

J1979:2014-07)

• Support of DTCs in accordance with ISO 15031-6

Classification Function HMI Control

License HMI Library Extension required
Reports not yet supported

293
8.12. HMI Control OBD

The OBD HMI Control can only be used with specific databases as it requires
special services.

You may use the OBD protocol template or the OBD demo project provided with
DTS Monaco.

The requirements for the special services are described in the Softing ODX Au-
thoring Guidelines. For detail information please contact the Softing Support.

8.12.1 Using the HMI Control OBD

Setting up an OBD Project

DTS provides a complete OBD sample project that includes an OBD database based on
ODX and a preconfigured Monaco workspace.

When you intend to make modifications to the database and the Monaco workspace, please
make a copy of the OBD demo project using the Save project as function in the Project
menu of the System Configurator because any changes will be overwritten without notifica-
tion when a program update takes place.

You also may create a new project from scratch using the OBD protocol template. In this
case you have to create your Monaco workspace and add the HMI Control OBD yourself.
After that, please switch to the Execution Mode of DTS Monaco.
The HMI Control OBD is displayed in the figure below.

294
8.12. HMI Control OBD

To start the HMI Control OBD an OBD ECU has to be connected

Detect Bus

Using the Detect Bus button the connected bus type (CAN, K-Line or CARB) will be de-
tected. If a bus is detected the message e.g. CAN Baudrate with the depending information
about the Baudrate is displayed at the bottom of the HMI Control.

If the detection fails (wrong or no bus/OBD ECU available) an appropriate message is dis-
played in the status line of the OBD HMI Control: No supported OBD bus found!

ECU-Access

In the section ECU-Access you can define the setting for bus type detection. The following
selections are possible:

• Automatic: The bus type which is automatically found will be selected (CAN, K-Line or
CARB)

• CAN: A CAN bus is expected

• K-Line: A K-Line bus is expected

• CARB: A CARB bus is expected

In case that option Use First Detected is enabled the first positive detected bus will be used.
As soon as a fitting bus with connected OBD control unit is detected the usable buttons
Mode 1 until Mode A are activated. With these buttons you can directly use the depending
diagnosis OBD modes. Depending on the selected OBD mode the user interface will be
changed.

Change size buttons

In each OBD mode you can adapt the used text size of the table and reset the displayed
values. This can be done by using the following buttons:

Icon Meaning

Increases text size

Decreases text size

Reset text size to default (12 pt)

295
8.12. HMI Control OBD

Clean table row entries of displayed values

8.12.1.1 Mode 1 requestCurrentPowertrainDiagnosticData

This service is used to get access to current exhaust relevant data (current emission-related
data values). These data covers analog and digital input and output values and status infor-
mation about the system. In a first step the supported Parameter IDs (PIDs) are detected
using the PIDs 00, 20, 40 and so on. Now information which measurement data are provided
by the ECU is available. Afterwards this data can be read once or cyclically.

• A small green checkmark indicates that this PID is supported by the ECU.
• A small circle with a white line indicates that this PID is NOT supported by the ECU
• The user can select the required PIDs by activating the associated checkboxes
• The selection can be done for each single PID or by using the option in the section
Check

– all: All PIDs will be selected

– Uncheck all: All PIDs will be deselected

– supported: Only supported PIDs will be selected

– user defined: Select single PIDs by mouse click

These options are also available from the context menu of table row PID.

To read the selected PIDs cyclically you can use the option Cyclic. In the input field next to
the check box you can edit the cyclic time in milliseconds (ms).
Reading cyclically will be started by using the button Get PID values. The caption of the
button will change to Stop. Pressing the button again stops cyclic reading.

296
8.12. HMI Control OBD

• Get PID values: Read selected PIDs

• Show checked only: Displays only selected PIDs

• Show All: Displays all PIDs

• user defined: Select single PIDs by mouse click

Each detected OBD control unit is displayed in a separate tab. If several ECUs are available
each one is displayed in an own tab. The caption of the tab includes the address of the ECU.

If a tab of an ECU is selected i.e. the tab gets visible - only the data from this ECU is read
and the data list of the ECU is refreshed.

Summary tab

The tab Summary contains an aggregation of all selected PIDs of all available OBD control
units.

If the tab Summary is selected the data of the selected PIDs from all ECU is read and the
data lists are refreshed with the new values.

If a specific PID is provided by more than one ECU and this PID is selected in several tabs
this can cause a problem during data analysis because the PID value is ambiguous.
Such problems are indicated in the Summary tab by a red exclamation mark and orange
text color. If a PID is only available for on ECU this is indicated by a small green checkmark.

8.12.1.2 Mode 2 requestPowertrainFreezeFrameData

A Freeze Frame is a kind of data structure which is stored in the ECU. A Freeze Frame con-
tains a data or data collections which are stored after a failure was detected by the vehicle.
The stored data are equivalent to the Current Data at the moment the failure occurred. At
first information which data were stored in each Freeze Frame are read via the depending
PIDs. Afterwards the stored information can be read group wise. Each failure causes its own
Freeze Frame. The number of Freeze Frames depends on the memory size of the ECU.
OBD Freeze Frame contains measurement information at the moment the failure occurs.
This information is stored in the depending ECUs.
Manufacture Freeze Frame is a Freeze Frame which is used by manufacturer to store
manufacturer specific information.

8.12.1.3 Mode 3 requestEmissionRelatedPowertrainDTC

DTCs or Diagnostic Trouble Codes are specific error codes which describe a certain mal-
function or failure.

297
8.12. HMI Control OBD

Mode 3 allows reading DTCs from the ECU. The DTCs and the depending descriptions are
specified in ISO 15031-6.

Using the button Get DTC Info the stored DTCs are displayed in a table. If the ECU did
not return any DTCs, this will be indicated by the text No emission-related DTC stored in the
Value column.

DTCs can also be read cyclically. For reading DTCs cyclically the option Cyclic has to be
enabled. Next to the Cyclic checkbox the cycle time can be set in milliseconds (ms).

8.12.1.4 Mode 4 clearResetEmissionRelatedDiagnosticInformation

Mode 4 clears all stored OBD related information like OBD-II emissions related diagnostic
trouble codes, OBD-II emissions related freeze frame data and OBD-II emissions related
diagnostic tests status.

8.12.1.5 Mode 5 requestOxygenSensorMonitoringTestResults

Mode 5 provides test results of Oxygen Sensor tests. Further information can be read by
using Mode 6. Mode 5 exclusively provides information which tests are supported by a
certain sensor bank. This mode is not supported by Diagnostics on CAN. Instead of that
Mode 6 is used. By using Mode 5 only one sensor location should respond. In case of a
second sensor location this problem will be indicated by a red exclamation mark.
With the combo box Select Test-ID the Test-ID is selected. Using a certain Test-ID (iden-
tification) specific oxygen sensor values can be read (e.g. Rich to lean sensor threshold
voltage constant). The Test-IDs are specified in ISO 15031-5.4.

8.12.1.6 Mode 6 requestOnBoardMonitTestResForNonContinMonitSystems

Some internal ECU tests like catalytic converter tests are only executed at a certain time or
cyclic. Mode 6 provides information which test:

• has not started yet

• is not finished or

• is finished

If a test has finished and results are available Mode 6 can be used to read these results
from the ECU. The parameters for this service are OEM specific. The ODX data for Mode 6
represents just a template. To be able to use manufacturer specific functionality, it might be
necessary to make adjustments in the database.

298
8.12. HMI Control OBD

8.12.1.7 Mode 7 requestEmissionRelatedDTCsDetectedDuringDrivingCycle

Mode 7 delivers information about tests, which were executed in the current test-drive or the
last complete driving cycle. Thus the DTCs from the ECU will be read out. They must not be
stored already.

The handling is equivalent to Mode 3.

8.12.1.8 Mode 8 controlOfOnBoardDevice

This service is used to subdue the control for the Onboard system, a test or a component to
the extern test tool. Possible Requests:

• Switch on

• Switch off

• Execute for ’n’ seconds

The parameters for this service are OEM specific. The ODX data for Mode 6 represents just
a template. To be able to use manufacturer specific functionality, it might be necessary to
make adjustments in the database.

8.12.1.9 Mode 9 requestVehicleInformation

Mode 9 provides different Vehicle and ECU data. For example Vehicle Identification Number
or Calibration Identifications.
By pressing the single buttons the following data from the table will be shown:

• VIN: Vehicle Identification Number

• CALID: Calibration Identifications

• CVN: Calibration Verification Numbers

• IPT: In use performance tracking values

• ECU: ECU Name

The combo box also includes additional data, which can be requested. Select a value, which
shall be requested from this combo box.

299
8.12. HMI Control OBD

8.12.1.10 Mode A requestEmissionRelatedDTCsWithPermanentStatus

Mode A is very similar to Mode 3 and Mode 7.

Mode A especially stores the permanent DTCs that occurred at any time during any drive-
cycle.
Using the button Get DTC Info the stored DTCs are displayed in a table. If the ECU did
not return any DTCs, this will be indicated by the text No emission-related DTC stored in the
Value column.

DTCs can also be read cyclically. For reading DTCs cyclically the option Cyclic has to be
enabled. Next to the Cyclic checkbox the cycle time can be set in milliseconds (ms).

8.12.2 Configuration of the HMI Control OBD

The look and behavior of the HMI Control in Execution Mode is controlled by the settings
provided by its Configurator.
For information how to work with the Configurator of an HMI Control see chapter Configura-
tion of HMI Controls.

The image below shows the Configurator window with the Common Settings tab selected.

300
8.12. HMI Control OBD

It contains the following tabs:

• Common Settings: Settings that control the look and behavior of the HMI Control (de-
scribed below)

The following buttons are available:

• OK : Saves the current configuration and closes the Configurator

• Cancel: Changes are discarded and the Configurator is closed

• Help: Opens the appropriate chapter in the Monaco help

The table below describes all properties of the tab Common Settings and their value range .
Default values are represented in bold letters.

301
8.12. HMI Control OBD

Property Default Description

Group / Value /
Property Value
Range
Gen- OBD/ any Name of the HMI Control that will be displayed in its
eral/Caption character frame.
string This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
Gen- true/ false Switches visualization of a border frame between on
eral/Show and off.
Frame This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
General/ None/ Defines the behavior at program start. It is possible
Startup Start Vi- to start only monitoring or to write a Trace file addi-
Behavior sual Trace tionally
/ Start This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
Visual & rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
File Trace
General/ true/ false Confirm before deleting DTCs in Mode 4
Mode4
confirma-
tion
Configure true/ false Switches visualization of the Configure button be-
Button / tween on and off
Visible This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
Logging/ No/ Yes When this option is enabled, the Enable Logging
Show checkbox will be displayed in the user interface of the
logging individual modes.
checkbox Checking the checkbox will create a CSV-
File with an current timestamp in direc-
tory: ProgramData\Softing\Diagnostic Tool
Set\Version\[Project]\Traces\OBD logging.
This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.

302
8.13. HMI Control OTX

8.13 HMI Control OTX

General Information

Description The HMI Control OTX provides a graphical user interface to

execute OTX scripts.

Features

• Simple execution of complex procedures created by us-

ing OTX scripts

Classification Communication HMI Control

License Basic Monaco License
Reports not supported

8.13.1 Using the HMI Control OTX

The user interface of the HMI Control OTX is split into two areas, the Script Selection and
Properties Area and the Result Display Area.

Use the splitter bar between Script Selection and Properties Area and the Result Display
Area to adjust the size of the areas to your needs. The Result Display Area can be hidden

303
8.13. HMI Control OTX

completely using the button on the right next to the splitter bar.

Script Selection and Properties Area

The Script Selection and Properties area consists of the OTX Script Selector on the upper
left and the OTX Properties area on the upper right.

• OTX Script Selector

The OTX Script Selector offers a tree with all the OTX projects and scripts available in
the OTX folder of the loaded DTS Project.

The tree presents OTX Scripts, OTX Binary Scripts and OTX projects. Only executable
OTX scripts (including binary scripts) that contain a main procedure are shown.

The Library folder additionally contains scripts that are provided in the OTX script
library (located in /DTSProjects/Globals/OTX folder). This library contains scripts that
can be used commonly by multiple DTS projects.

Note: The visibility of the OTX scripts in the tree (including the Library branch) can
be restricted for a special Audience when the Property Audience in the Configurator
of the HMI Control is set to this Audience.

• OTX Properties Area

The OTX Properties area offers the Settings and the Description tab

The Settings tab lists the available In parameters of the selected script in the tree.
The column Parameter contains the name of the OTX parameter.
The column Direction indicates the direction the parameter is passed to the script. IN
is used for an In parameter, that is passed to the script.
The column Type shows the DataType of the OTX parameter.
The column Value shows the value of the OTX input parameter. If available, the default
value is taken from the OTX script.
Double-click the cell to modify the value. Modified parameters are indicated by a green
text color. Use Reset to default from the context menu of the parameter to reset the
default value.

The parameter values of simple data types (Integer, Float, Boolean, String, ByteField)
can be edited. The parameter values of complex data types (List, Maps) cannot be

304
8.13. HMI Control OTX

edited (e.g. items cannot be added to lists). The values of items of complex data types
can be edited if they have a simple data type (e.g. item of a list can be edited).

The Description tab shows a description for the selection in the OTX Script Selector.
The description content is taken from the OTX project and its elements.

Script Execution

To execute a selected OTX script press the button Execute.

A selected OTX script is also executed when the Return key is presses or when the element
of the OTX Script tree that represents the OTX Script name is double-clicked.

When a script is running, the caption of the Execute button will change to Stop allowing
interrupting the OTX script execution before it is finished.

The button Execute is disabled when no OTX Script is selected in the tree or when a main
method is not available in the selected OTX Script/Project.

Result Display Area

The Results Display Area may contain several tabs. On each tab a list with the results of the
corresponding OTX script execution is displayed.

• Process Value Tab

The Process Value tab contains information about the INOUT and the OUT parameters
of the executed OTX Script.

The Parameter column displays the name of the INOUT or OUT parameters of the
selected OTX Script.

The Direction column displays the direction the parameter is used for, i.e. IN for input
parameters of the OTX script, OUT for output parameters and INOUT for parameters
that serve as input and output for an OTX Script.

The Type column shows the parameter data type, i.e. Integer, Float, String... .

The Value column displays the value of the parameter.

The values displayed will be cleared when an OTX script is started und updated when
the value gets available:
IN parameters at start, INOUT parameters at start and when the script has been fin-
ished and OUT parameters at the end of script execution.

305
8.13. HMI Control OTX

• Open Screen Tab

If the selected OTX Script contains Open Screens a new tab will be added in the
Results Display Area. The name of the tab is the name of the Open Screen Variable.
Each tab contains the parameters for one Open Screen.

The Parameter column displays the name of the OpenScreen parameter.

The Direction column displays the direction the Open Screen parameters are used for,
i.e. IN for output parameters of the OTX script, OUT for input parameters and INOUT
for parameters that serve as input and output for an OTX Script.

The Type column shows the Open Screen parameter data type, i.e. Integer, Float,
String... .

The Value column displays the value of the Open Screen parameter.

The Open Screen parameter values displayed will be cleared when an OTX script is
started und displayed at the end of script execution.
The OTX HMI Control will not process Open Screen Variables that are used for the
direction IN.

If the Results Display Area is not visible use the button on the bottom-right to display it.

8.13.2 Configuration of the HMI Control OTX

The look and behavior of the HMI Control in Execution Mode is controlled by the settings
provided by its Configurator.
For information how to work with the Configurator of an HMI Control see chapter Configura-
tion of HMI Controls.

The image below shows the Configurator window with the Common Settings tab selected.

306
8.13. HMI Control OTX

It contains the following tabs:

• Common Settings: Settings that control the look and behavior of the HMI Control (de-
scribed below)

The following buttons are available:

• OK : Saves the current configuration and closes the Configurator

• Cancel: Changes are discarded and the Configurator is closed

• Help: Opens the appropriate chapter in the Monaco help

The table below describes all properties of the tab Common Settings and their value range .
Default values are represented in bold letters.

Property Default Description

Group / Value /
Property Value
Range

307
8.14. HMI Control Recorder

Gen- OTX/ any Name of the HMI Control that will be displayed in its
eral/Caption character frame.
string This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
Gen- true/ false Switches visualization of a border frame between on
eral/Show and off.
Frame
Gen- true/ false If set to true, the folder Library containing the Global
eral/Show OTX scripts is displayed in the OTX tree. If false, the
Library in folder Library and the contained Global OTX scripts
OTX tree are hidden.
OTX scripts that shall be accessible not only for one
project can be added to the Library of Global OTX
scripts using the tab Libraries in the System Config-
urator.
Gen- <All This property allows selecting the Audiences defined
eral/Audienceaudiences>/ in the OTX scripts of the the current DTS Project and
<Audiences in the Global OTX Library, if it is activated (property
defined in Show Library in OTX tree has to be set to true).
the OTX
projects Only scripts that match the selected Audience are
of the cur- displayed in the HMI Control.
rent DTS By default the setting All audiences is selected.
Project and
in the OTX
Library>
Config- false/true Enables or disables the Configure Button in the HMI
ure But- Control.
ton/Visible This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.

8.14 HMI Control Recorder

General Information

308
8.14. HMI Control Recorder

Description The HMI Control Recorder is designed to record and display

measurement data once or cyclically.
Different view types (chart, oscilloscope and gauge view) can
be selected to visualize the data. Measured data can be saved
to a file.

The HMI Control offers an additional view, the Actuator View,

that allows sending parameters to an ECU.

Services may be configured during runtime and can be added

simply and fast using Drag and Drop from the Service Tree,
from the Service Table HMI Control or from other Recorder
views.
Alias names for service parameters are supported.
Classification Measurement HMI Control
License HMI Library Extension required
Reports supported
Pre and Post Actions supported

8.14.1 Using the HMI Control Recorder

The user interface of the Recorder HMI Control can contain multiple graphical elements
(Views) to display measured data.
The alignment of the Views is done automatically.

The Recorder HMI Control is shown in the image below.

309
8.14. HMI Control Recorder

It provides a toolbar with the following items:

ICON ACTION DESCRIPTION

Open Opens a dialog which enables the user to
select the measurement data.
Save Saves the current measurement.

Remove Measure- Removes all measurement data

ment
Remove All Removes all measurement data and all
views from the container area
Home Erases all measurement data and reloads
the configuration of the HMI Control from
the Monaco configuration file.
Take configuration Changes to ”configuration” mode but keeps
the current configuration of the HMI Control
(views, settings) and measurement data.
Stop Stops data acquisition mode.

Single Measure- Starts a single measurement.

ment
Continuous Mea- Starts continuous data acquisition using the
surement cycle time specified in the box on the right.
Cycle Time Cycle time for continuous data acquisition.
Using the arrows of the control the cycle
time can be quickly modified in these steps:
0/1/2/5/10/50/100/200/500/1000/2000/...
/9000/10000/20000/.../3600000.
Autostop continuous Limits the time (in seconds) a continuous
measurement measurement is running before it is auto-
matically stopped. Please check mark to
activate this option.

Below the toolbar a slider control is placed. When analyzing the data it allows selecting the

310
8.14. HMI Control Recorder

acquisition time (see chapter Analyzing the Data).

8.14.1.1 Views
A View always reflects the current measurement data and the current configuration.

It is updated whenever one of the following events occurs:

• new measurement data available

• general/parameter/view configuration changed

• global cursor position changed

The parameters are displayed with Short Name or Long Name depending on the current
configuration.

Adding a View

To add a new View drag and drop a service that reads measurement data from the Service
Tree, from a Service Table HMI Control or a parameter from another Recorder View into the
View Container.

To add a new parameter to an existing View drag and drop a service into an existing View.
You also may drag and drop a parameter from one Recorder View to another.

If the value of a parameter cannot be displayed by a View (e.g. a text in a Scope View) the
values will be ignored (not displayed).

Configuration of a View

To open the configuration dialog of a View right-click the title bar of the View and select
Configure View from the context menu. It allows adapting the appearance of the View to
the user’s requirements.

Removing a View

To remove a View right-click the title bar of the View and select Remove View from the
context menu. A View is also removed from the container when its last parameter has been
removed.

View Types

The following Views are available:

• Scope View

311
8.14. HMI Control Recorder

• Chart View

• Gauge View

• Actuator View

8.14.1.2 Scope View

The image below shows the Scope View.

User Interface

The Scope View is able to plot several measured values in a strip chart. Its use is recom-
mended for analyzing the characteristics of a recorded signal.

The Scope View is split into two areas: A Parameter List on the left side and the Strip
Chart on the right side. The border line between the areas can be moved using the mouse.

Parameter List

On the left side of the Scope View a list shows all parameters that are displayed in this view.
Each parameter has a leading checkbox. If the checkbox is check-marked the parameter will
be plotted in the strip chart on the right. In front of a parameter a colored box displays the
color of the associated plot in the chart.
If the option Show Alias Name in the View Configurator is set to true then the Alias name will
be displayed instead of the parameter name.

The plot of the selected parameter is highlighted as a bold line in the Strip Chart.

By right-clicking on a parameter a context menu with the following items is displayed:

• The menu item Copy Cell to Clipboard will copy only the content of the selected cell
to the Clipboard.

312
8.14. HMI Control Recorder

• The menu item Copy Line to Clipboard will copy your selection to the Clipboard.

• The menu item Copy All to Clipboard will copy the whole content of the selected list
to the Clipboard.

• Configure Parameter: The Parameter Configuration Dialog will open.

• Configure Service: The Services Configuration Dialog will open.

• Configure View: The View Configurator will open (see description below).

• Remove Parameter: The parameter will be removed from the view. You also may
remove a selected parameter using the <DEL> button of your keyboard.

Strip Chart

On the right side a strip chart with plots of the measured values of one or more parameters
is displayed.
The y-axis represents the value of the parameter, the x-axis represents the time elapsed
from the start of the measurement. To zoom into the y-axis and x-axis you may use the
zoom handles placed on the corresponding axis.

The unit displayed next to the y-axis is only displayed if a unit is available and all parameters
to be plotted have the same unit.

The color and line style of the plotted graphs are as specified in the parameter configuration
dialog.

Ranges

The ranges defined in the parameter configuration dialog will be displayed with the appropri-
ate colors in the strip chart only if one parameter is checked in the parameter list and when
the property Show Ranges is set to true.

Scaling

The scaling of the strip chart can be done automatically or not: If auto scale is set to all
or each, the min./max. of the y-axis is set according to the min./max. value of all parame-
ters being plotted with a percentage surcharge of -10/+10. If auto scale is set to false, the
min./max. of the y-axis is set to the min./max. scale as specified in the parameter configura-
tion dialog. If there is more than one parameter being plotted the overall min./max. value is
used for configuration setting all.

Using the Cursor

The strip chart provides a cursor that can be adjusted using the mouse. Click on the cursor
and drag it to the desired position. Release the mouse button. The cursor will be placed

313
8.14. HMI Control Recorder

to the next time value on the x-axis for that a measurement is available. For the selected
parameter the x/y value of the measured value at the cursor position is displayed in the top
center area of the strip chart.

The global cursor will be synchronized with the position of the cursor in the plots if cursor
synchronization is activated in the parameter configuration dialog (Sync. cursor property).
During recording or when no data is available the cursor will be hidden.

Scope View Configurator

To open the configuration dialog of of the Scope View right-click the title bar of the View and
select Configure View from the context menu. It allows adapting the appearance of the
View to the user’s requirements.

The image below shows the Scope View Configuration dialog with the Common Settings tab
opened.

The following table shows an overview of all Properties and their values of the Scope View
Configuration.
Default values are represented in bold letters.

314
8.14. HMI Control Recorder

Property Default Description

Group / Value /
Property Value
Range
Gen- Scope Caption to be displayed in the view.
eral/Caption View/any
character
string
Gen- all/each/false Determines how auto scaling is working.
eral/Auto all: autoscaling is applied on all parameters
Scale each: autoscaling is applied on each parameters
separately, i.e. the plot of each parameter value is
stretched to fit the maximum plotting height.
false: no autoscaling is applied

General/ RGB(255,255,255)
RGB value of the color used for the chart back-
Background white/any ground. Format: RGB(X,Y,Z). A double-click on the
Color color row will let pop up a color selection dialog. The se-
lected color is shown in a colored square in front of
the property name.
General/ RGB(0,0,0) RGB value of the color used for the grid. Format:
Grid Color black/any RGB(X,Y,Z). A double-click on the row will let pop up
color a color selection dialog. The selected color is shown
in a colored square in front of the property name.
Gen- None, Appearance of the grid lines
eral/Grid Horizontal,
type Vertical,
Both
Gen- true/false Determines if the cursor shall be synchronized with
eral/Sync. the global cursor.
cursor
Gen- true/false Shows the Alias name instead of the parameter
eral/Show name.
Alias
Name
X-Axis/ 5/numeric Determines the desired number of major tic marks
Major tics value for the axis. The control will force the tic delta to be
within a specific power of ten and will space the tics
at the closest natural interval (multiplies of 1, 2 or 5)
depending on the range of the axis. (1 - 20).

315
8.14. HMI Control Recorder

X-Axis/ 1/numeric Determines the number of minor tic marks drawn be-
Minor tics value tween major tic marks. (0 - 10).
X-Axis/ 15/numeric Determines the spacing between the axis and the tic
Label value in labels. It is a unit less scale. (-50 to +50).
offset the range
of -50 to
+50
X-Axis/ Horizontal/Vertical
Determines the text orientation for the tic labels.
Label
orientation
X-Axis/ Right/Left/Center
Determines the text alignment for the tic labels.
Label
alignment
X-Axis/ 10/1...100 The Default Span determines the time span shown
Default (seconds) on the X-axis when no measurement data is avail-
Span able.

Y-Axis/ 5/numeric Determines the desired number of major tic marks

Major tics value for the axis. The control will force the tic delta to be
within a specific power of ten and will space the tics
at the closest natural interval (multiplies of 1, 2 or 5)
depending on the range of the axis. (1 - 20).
Y-Axis/ 1/numeric Determines the number of minor tic marks drawn be-
Minor tics value tween major tic marks. (0 - 10).
Y-Axis/ 15/numeric Determines the spacing between the axis and the tic
Label value in labels. It is a unit less scale. (-50 to +50).
offset the range
of -50 to
+50
Y-Axis/ Horizontal/Vertical
Determines the text orientation for the tic labels.
Label
orientation
Y-Axis/ Right/Left/Center
Determines the text alignment for the tic labels.
Label
alignment
Plot 90, 70 Determines the position of the bottom edge of the
area/Bottom - 100 plot are relative to the enclosing strip chart control.
percent
Plot 10, 0 - 30 Determines the position of the left edge of the plot
area/Left percent are relative to the enclosing strip chart control.

316
8.14. HMI Control Recorder

The button OK applies, the Cancel button discards the changes.

8.14.1.3 Chart View

The image below shows the Chart View.

User Interface

The Chart View displays the measurement data in a table that has the following columns:

• the name of the Diagnostic Service

• the name of the ECU

• the name of the parameter

• the Alias name defined in the Configurator of the parameter

• the value itself

• the unit of the value

It shows just one value at a specific time selected by the slider of the HMI Control.
When the HMI Control is recording the last value measured is displayed, in all other cases
the value selected by the global cursor is displayed.
By right clicking on a parameter a context menu with the following items is displayed:

• The menu item Copy Cell to Clipboard will copy only the content of the selected cell to
the Clipboard.

• The menu item Copy Line to Clipboard will copy your selection to the Clipboard.

• The menu item Copy All to Clipboard will copy the whole content of the selected list to
the Clipboard.

• Configure Parameter : The Parameter Configuration Dialog will open.

• Configure Service: The Services Configuration Dialog will open.

317
8.14. HMI Control Recorder

• Configure View: The View Configurator will open (see description below).

• Remove Parameter : The parameter will be removed from the view. You also may
remove a selected parameter using the <DEL> button of your keyboard.

Chart View Configurator

By right clicking on the title bar of the Chart View window a context menu with the following
items will open:

• Configure View: The Chart View Configurator will open.

• Remove View: The view will be removed from the container.

The following table shows an overview of all Properties and their values of the Chart View
Configuration.
Default values are represented in bold letters.

Property Default Description

Group / Value /
Property Value
Range
Gen- Chart Caption to be displayed in the view.
eral/Caption View/any
character
string
Gen- true/false Shows a column with the Diagnostic Service name.
eral/Show
Service
Name
Gen- true/false Shows a column with the ECU name.
eral/Show
ECU Name
Gen- true/false Shows a column with the Parameter name.
eral/Show
Parameter
Name

The button OK applies, the Cancel button discards the changes.

318
8.14. HMI Control Recorder

8.14.1.4 Gauge View

The image below shows the Gauge View.

User Interface

The Gauge View visualizes measured data using gauges. It shows just one value at a
specific time selected by the slider of the HMI Control.
For each parameter a gauge is displayed that contains the following information:

• the name of parameter or the Alias name (depending on setting Show Alias Name in
the View Configurator)

• the value itself as a gauge and also as text on the top of the gauge following the
parameter name

• the unit of the value appended in square brackets to the value of the parameter
• the ranges, if available

If more than the maximum number of gauges per page have to be displayed, additional
pages are created. You may browse the pages using the arrow buttons on top of the view.

After measurement stopped, the gauge shows just one value at the specific time that was
selected by the slider of the HMI Control.

During recording the last value measured is displayed, in all other cases the value selected
by the global cursor is shown.

By right clicking on a gauge a context menu with the following items is displayed:

• Configure Parameter : The Parameter Configuration Dialog will open.

319
8.14. HMI Control Recorder

• Configure Service: The Services Configuration Dialog will open.

• Configure View: The View Configurator will open (see description below).

• Remove Parameter : The parameter will be removed from the view. You also may
remove a selected parameter using the <DEL> button of your keyboard.

Ranges

The ranges defined in the Parameter Configuration dialog will be displayed with the appropri-
ate colors in the gauge if the property Show Ranges in the Parameter Configuration dialog
is set to true.

Scaling

The scaling of the gauge can be done automatically or not:

If auto scale is enabled the min./max. value is set according to the min./max. value of all
values being available for this parameter with a percentage surcharge of -10/+10.
If auto scale is disabled the min./max. value is set to the min./max. scale as specified in the
parameter configuration dialog.

Gauge View Configurator

By right clicking on the title bar of the gauge window a context menu with the following items
will open:

• Configure View: The Gauge View Configurator will open.

• Remove View: The view will be removed from the container.

The following table shows an overview of all Properties and their values of the Gauge View
Configurator.
Default values are represented in bold letters.

Property Default Description

Group / Value /
Property Value
Range
Gen- Gauge Caption to be displayed in the view.
eral/Caption View/any
character
string

320
8.14. HMI Control Recorder

General/ 3/numeric Number of gauges that are displayed in parallel, ad-

Number of value ditional gauges will be shown in the next page.
gauges per
page
Gen- true/false Shows the Alias name instead of the parameter
eral/Show name.
Alias
Name
Axis/Auto true/false The scaling of the gauge can be done automatically
Scale or not:
If auto scale is enabled the scale of the gauge is auto-
matically adjusted to minimum and maximum values
of the recorded data.

If auto scale is disabled the scale of the gauge is ad-

justed to the Minimum and Maximum Scale value as
specified in the parameter configuration dialog.
Axis/ 4/numeric Specifies the number of tic marks of the axis.
Number of value
tic marks

The button OK applies, the Cancel button discards the changes.

8.14.1.5 Actuator View

The image below shows the Actuator View.

User Interface

The Actuator View lists services and their request parameters. Their values can be set by
the user.
The services have to be executed manually by the user.

The Actuator View displays the services with adjustable request parameters in a table that
has the following columns:

321
8.14. HMI Control Recorder

• Diagnostic Service

This column contains:

– a color icon assigned to the diagnostic service

– a checkbox to enable or disable the execution of the diagnostic service

– the name of the Diagnostic Service

• ECU

This column contains the name of the ECU. The column may be hidden by the option
Show ECU Name in the Configurator of the View.

• Request Param

This column contains the name of the Request Parameter. The column may be hidden
by the option Show Parameter Name in the Configurator of the View.

• Alias

This column contains the Alias name.

• Value

This column contains the value of the parameter. Enter or select the value for the
Request Parameter in this column.

• Unit
This column contains the unit of the parameter. The column may be hidden by the
option Show unit in the Configurator of the View.

The services of the Actuator View can only be transmitted when recording is active. To
change the value of a parameter, double-click on its entry in the Value column. Enter a value
or select one from the drop-down list.

Press the Transmit button for transmitting the check-marked services. If the transmission of
a service failed the associated line is marked-up in red color.

The default values of the parameters of the check-marked services are restored when the
button Reload is pressed.

Each parameter has a context menu with the following items:

322
8.14. HMI Control Recorder

• The menu item Copy Cell to Clipboard will copy only the content of the selected cell to
the Clipboard.

• The menu item Copy Line to Clipboard will copy your selection to the Clipboard.

• The menu item Copy All to Clipboard will copy the whole content of the selected list to
the Clipboard.

• Configure Parameter : The Parameter Configuration Dialog will open.

• Configure View: The Configurator of the view will open (see description below).

• Remove Parameter : The parameter will be removed from the view. You also may
remove a selected parameter using the <DEL> button of your keyboard.

Drag and Drop of Request Parameters from an Actuator View into other View Types

The Recorder HMI Control supports Drag and Drop of services and their request parameters
to other View types like Scope, Chart or Gauge Views. This allows visualizing the values of
parameters that act as an actuator in these Views. A <P> prefix in front of the parameter
name indicates that this is a request parameter of a service.

Please note, that not all data types used for a request parameter can be shown in any View
type, e.g . a text cannot be visualized in a Scope or Gauge view. If a data type is not
supported, the parameter name will be shown in red color and the notification datatype not
supported will be appended to the parameter name.

Actuator View Configuration

Right-clicking on the title bar of the Actuator window will open a context menu with the fol-
lowing items:

• Configure View: The Actuator View Configurator will open.

• Remove View: The view will be removed from the container.

The following table shows an overview of all properties and their values of the Actuator View
Configurator.
Default values are represented in bold letters.

Property Default Description

Group / Value /
Property Value
Range

323
8.14. HMI Control Recorder

Gen- Actuator Caption to be displayed in the view.

eral/Caption View/any
character
string
Gen- true/false Shows a column with the ECU name.
eral/Show
ECU Name
Gen- true/false Shows a column with the Parameter name.
eral/Show
Parameter
Name
Gen- true/false Shows a column with the unit of the value.
eral/Show
unit

The button OK applies, the Cancel button discards the changes.

8.14.1.6 Service Configuration

New services may be added by Drag and Drop from the Service Tree or from a Service Table
HMI Control.

To add a service with new parameters, pick the appropriate service from the Service Tree or
from a Service Table HMI Control.

Drag and drop it to the View Container.

When you select a free area in the View Container a small menu will open, allowing selecting
the target for the parameters of the service:

• Scope View: the parameters will be shown in a new Scope View.

• Chart View: the parameters will be shown in a new Chart View.

• Gauge View: the parameters will be shown in a new Gauge View.

• Actuator View: the parameters will be shown in a new Actuator View.

• All existing views: the parameters will added to all existing Views.

324
8.14. HMI Control Recorder

Drag and drop of multiple services or a complete Functional Class is also supported.

When you drop the service into an existing view, its parameters will be added to this view.

The HMI Control Recorder will preselect the response parameters and show an additional
service configuration dialog only if necessary.

Service configuration while adding a service from the Service Tree

When you hold the CTRL key during Drag and Drop a service configuration dialog will pop
up.

In this dialog the request parameter values (section Params) can be set and the response
parameters to be shown (section Symbolic Responses) may be selected.

The image below shows the Service Configuration dialog when a service is dragged with the
CTRL key pressed.

The dialog allows configuration of

• the request parameter in the section Params

325
8.14. HMI Control Recorder

• the response parameters in the section Symbolic Responses: Check the response
parameters you want to have displayed in the View.

The following buttons are provided:

• Save: The configuration of the displayed service is saved and the next service will be
displayed in case multiple serices have been selected. Otherwise the Configurator is
closed.

• Cancel: The configuration the displayed service is aborted and the next service will be
displayed in case multiple serices have been selected. Otherwise the Configurator is
closed.

• Abort: The current and all services following in the queue are aborted.

Click Save to add the selected parameters to the View.

Service Configuration of Parameters Shown in a View

The services of parameter that are already existing in a view, can be configured in the View
Configuration.

To open the configuration dialog click on a parameter and open its context menu. Select
Configure View.

In the View Configuration dialog open the tab Services.

326
8.14. HMI Control Recorder

Select a parameter on the left. The configuration options of the associated service are shown
on the right.

In section Symbolic Responses the response parameters that will be displayed in the View
can be checked.
In section Params the request parameters that shall be added to a report of the HMI Control
can be selected.

Click OK to save the changes to the View.

8.14.1.7 Parameter Configuration

To change the setting of a parameter in a View open the context menu of the parameter and
select Configure Parameter.
The changes will be applied to all Views containing this parameter.
The image below shows the Parameter Configuration dialog.

327
8.14. HMI Control Recorder

The following table shows an overview of all Properties and their values of the Parameter
Configuration dialog.
Default values are represented in bold letters.

Property Default Description

Group / Value /
Property Value
Range
General/ Logical Name of the Logical Link (read only)
Logical Link
Link Name Name from
database
General/ Service Name of the Diagnostic Service that provides the pa-
Service name from rameter (read only).
Name database
General/ Parameter Name of the Parameter (read only).
Parameter name from
Name database
General/ ASAM data Data type of the parameter (read only)
Parameter type
Data Type
Gen- Unit set Unit of the parameter (read only), taken from the
eral/Unit in the database, else empty string (read only).
database
Gen- any color RGB value of the color used for the parameter. For-
eral/Color mat: RGB(X,Y,Z). A double-click on the row will let
pop up a color selection dialog. The selected color
is shown in a colored square in front of the property
name.
Gen- Solid, Line style
eral/Line Dash, Dot,
style Dash Dot,
Dash Dot
Dot
Gen- any text An alternative name for the parameter (can be freely
eral/Alias defined).
Name
numeric Value used to scale the display, taken from the
Scale/Minimum
value database if available, else -10.

328
8.14. HMI Control Recorder

numeric Value used to scale the display, taken from the

value
Scale/Maximum database if available, else +10.
false, true Defines if the ranges configured below shall be ap-
Ranges/Show plied in the views
Ranges
0, 0 ... 100 Sets the number of ranges. For each range a block
Ranges/Number with the properties Lower Limit, Upper Limit and
of Ranges Color is added in the lines below.
0, Min Sets the lower limit of the range.
Ranges/RangeValue ...
[range Max Value
number]
Lower
Limit
0, Min Set the upper limit of the range.
Ranges/RangeValue ...
[range Max Value
number]
Upper
Limit
black, Set the color of the range.
Ranges/RangeAny Color
[range (color box)
number]
Color

The button OK applies, the Cancel button discards the changes.

8.14.1.8 Recording
The Recorder HMI Control supports two recording modes:

• Single Measurement

• Continuous Measurement

Single Measurement

Using the button Single the data acquisition can be performed manually. When the button
is pressed the first time Recording starts. Previously recorded data that was not saved yet
will get lost. The button will be grayed during data acquisition. The services in the Views are

329
8.14. HMI Control Recorder

executed once. The returned data will be displayed in the Views. After all data acquisition
services have been executed the button will become active again allowing performing the
next data acquisition cycle.

Continuous Measurement

The button Continuous performs data acquisition automatically with a fixed cycle time.
The cycle time can be adjusted in the Cycle Time control in steps of seconds. When the
Cycle Time is set to zero data acquisition is performed as fast as possible.

Recording is started by pressing the button. Previously recorded data that was not saved yet
will get lost. The button is disabled during data acquisition. The services in the Views are
executed cyclically. The returned data will be continuously updated in the Views.

The Autostop continuous mesurement option allows limiting the time continuous mea-
surement is running. Enable the checkbox in front of the counter to activate the option.
Enter the time in hours:minutes:seconds the continuous measurement shall run. After the
measurement has been started the counter will count down to zero.
After this time elapsed, the data acquisition is stopped and the Save dialog will pop up
allowing to save the measured data.

Stop Measurement

To stop recording press the Stop button.

Pre- and PostActions

If Pre- and PostActions are enabled in the Configurator of the HMI Control, Pre-Actions are
executed before a Single Measurement or a Continuous Measurement is started and the
Post-Actions are sent after the measurement has stopped.

Save data

When you press the Save button, an active recording is stopped and the recorded data
with the corresponding configuration of the HMI Control can be saved.
By default the Save dialog opens the folder defined in the Global Default Path dialog.

The configuration of the HMI Control will be saved to an RME file, the measurement data will
be saved to a binary RMX file.
If you want to copy the data to another location, make sure you copy both files.
The default file name will have the format: yyyy mm dd hh mm ss.rme respectively

330
8.14. HMI Control Recorder

yyyy mm dd hh mm ss.rmx.

Saving an interval with measurement data

When the Recorder HMI Control contains a Scope View, this view can be used to select a
certain interval in the measurement.
For this, the Scope View provides two slider controls on the X-axis that allow zooming the
plot.
Use the left slider to zoom the left edge of the plot and the right slider to zoom the right edge
of the plot until the desired time interval is shown in the view.
Then right click on the view and click Save visible interval to save the measurement data
now shown in the view.
All measurement data acquired by the Recorder HMI Control is saved even when the corre-
sponding parameters are not configured in the Scope View but in other views.
The scroll handles do not specify the area to be saved. They just serve as controls for
zooming the interval into the visible plot area.

Please note, zooming with the sliders on the y-Axis does not affect the saved data.

8.14.1.9 Analyzing the data

To analyze previously recorded acquisition data recording has to be stopped first.
You may either analyze the data that has just been recorded or use the data that was saved
to a Monaco Recorder file previously.
In this case use the Open button to load the file.

Note: When you load the file the current Recorder configuration will be overwritten and
existing acquisition data will get lost.

Below the toolbar the time when the acquisition was started and how long it took is displayed.

Use the slider to navigate through the recording cycle. On the right the exact time on the
position of the slider is shown. In this control a specific time may be entered causing the
slider to jump to this time value. When the slider is released or a value has been entered in
the time edit control it will always jump to the closest time value for which an acquisition was
performed.

In the Views the measured values at the slider position are displayed:
In a Chart and Gauge View the value is displayed as text or a numeric value with a unit (if
available).
In a Scope View a cursor is shown in the strip chart and the corresponding x and y value as
text on top of the chart.

331
8.14. HMI Control Recorder

8.14.2 Configuration of the HMI Control Recorder

The look and behavior of the HMI Control in Execution Mode is controlled by the settings
provided by its Configurator.
For information how to work with the Configurator of an HMI Control see chapter Configura-
tion of HMI Controls.

The image below shows the Configurator window with the Common Settings tab selected.

It contains the following tabs:

• Common Settings: Settings that control the look and behavior of the HMI Control (de-
scribed below)

The following buttons are available:

• OK : Saves the current configuration and closes the Configurator

• Cancel: Changes are discarded and the Configurator is closed

• Edit: Opens the Pre and Post Action Editor.

332
8.14. HMI Control Recorder

Pre- and Post Actions can be specified for a HMI Control type in a DTS Project, i.e. for
all Recoder HMI Controls in all workspaces of a DTS Project. Whenever a the execu-
tion of the HMI Control is started the Pre-Actions defined in the Pre- and Post Action
Editor are executed. When the execution is stopped, the Post-Actions are executed.
This applies when the Property Execute Pre- and Post Actions is set to true.

• Help: Opens the appropriate chapter in the Monaco help

The table below describes all properties of the tab Common Settings and their value range .
Default values are represented in bold letters.

Property Default Description

Group / Value /
Property Value
Range
Gen- Recorder/ Name of the HMI Control that will be displayed in its
eral/Caption any char- frame.
acter string
Gen- true/ false Switches visualization of a border frame between on
eral/Show and off.
Frame
General/ true/false Shows the LongNames or ShortNames of the Ser-
Show vices taken from the database
Long-
Names
Gen- sec./min. time scale of the measured values
eral/Unit
(t)
General/ false/true defines if communication shall be started automati-
Auto Start cally
Communi- This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
cation rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
General/ false/true If set to true, a continuous measurement is started
Autostart right after the HMI Control has become active (e.g.
Contin- after the loading of a workspace or switching from
uous Configuration into Execution Mode, etc.).
Measure-
ment

333
8.15. HMI Control Service Table

Config- false/true Enables or disables the Configure Button in the HMI

ure But- Control.
ton/Visible This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
Pre/Post true/false Enables the execution of the Pre- and Post Actions
Ac- defined in the Pre and Post Action Editor. If set to
tions/Execute true, the execution of the Pre- and PostActions is en-
Pre- and abled.
PostAc- If false, Pre- and Post Actions are ignored.
tions
Pre/Post false/true Allows Alias Names to be configured in the Se-
Ac- quence Tree of theServices/ComPrimitives tab in the
tions/Show Pre and Post Action Editor.
Alias
Name
Pre/Post true/false Displays the Variants in the Services/ComPrimitives
Ac- tab of the Pre and Post Action Editor.
tions/Show
LogicalL-
inks on
Variants
Pre/Post None/ServiceID
Sets the format of the Identifier prefix for the services
Ac- ServiceID shown in the Services/ComPrimitives tab of the Pre
tions/Show and DataID and Post Action Editor.
Identifier

8.15 HMI Control Service Table

General Information

334
8.15. HMI Control Service Table

Description The HMI Control Service Table merges the features of the
Data Display and the IO Control HMI Controls into one HMI
Control.
The former HMI Controls IO Control and Data Display are dis-
continued, but still supported in already existing workspaces.
Inserting new instances of them in a workspace is not possible
any more.

Displays measurement values read from ECUs once or cycli-

cally.
Services may be activated and deactivated during runtime.
The sampling rate can be configured individually.
Services can be added simply and fast using Drag and Drop
from the Service Tree. Alias names for service parameters are
supported.

Functional requests are not supported.

Classification Measurement HMI Control
License HMI Library Extension required
Reports supported
Pre and Post Actions supported

8.15.1 Using the HMI Control Service Table

The HMI Control Service Table shows a list of services or parameters. The values of the
parameters are retrieved from one or more ECUs.

It replaces the former Data Display and IO Control HMI Controls. These HMI
controls are still supported when they already exist in a workspace but they can-
not be added any more.

There are two main views available

• Service Mode In Service Mode the services and their parameters are displayed in a
tree structure, the Service List.

• Parameter Mode In Parameter Mode the parameters and their values are displayed in
the Parameter List.

335
8.15. HMI Control Service Table

The two modes display the same data in different views. Modifying an item in one view is
also reflected immediately in the other view.

The image below shows the user interface of the HMI Control Service Table.

Toolbar

Button/Tool (Keyboard Shortcut) Remarks

336
8.15. HMI Control Service Table

Start Start/Stop button. Starts retrieving measure-

ment data from the ECUs.
Stop The icon changes to the Stop icon when the
measurement was started.

If the execution of Pre- and PostActions is en-

abled, the Pre Actions are executed when the
Start button is pressed but before the measure-
ment services are started.

Stops retrieving measurement data.

Measurement is also stopped when Monaco ex-
ecution is stopped or when Monaco is switched
to Configuration Mode.

If the execution of Pre- and PostActions is en-

abled, the Post Actions are executed after mea-
surement has stopped, i.e. when the Stop but-
tons is pressed or when the execution of a Single
Shot measurement has finished.
Cycle Time Control Sets the cycle time for Cyclic/Synchronous Ac-
quisition Mode.

The Cycle Time can be varied in the range of 0

to 60000 ms. Default is 1000 ms.
Acquisition
Mode Single shot / Synchronuous
Single shot / Asynchronuous
Cyclic / Synchronuous (default setting)
Cyclic / Asynchronuous

Expand all Service Nodes Shows the response and its parameters of each
(Alt++) Service node by expanding each service node

Collapse all Service Nodes Collapses all Service nodes. The response and
(Alt+-) its parameters of each Service node will be hid-
den.

337
8.15. HMI Control Service Table

Toggle Checkmark (Space) Checks resp. unchecks the selected service

node(s). An unchecked service will not be ex-
ecuted.

Select all lines (Ctrl+A) Selects all rows in the Service Table

Add Comment (Alt+M) Adds a comment row before the selected service
node.

Remove (Del) Removes the selected comment or the selected

service nodes including their parameters from
the Service Table

Move item up (Alt+P) Moves the selected service node(s) up in the ta-
ble

Move item down (Alt+N) Moves the selected service node(s)down in the
table

Clear measured values (Alt+L) Clears the values displayed by the last run.
View mode switch Allows selecting the View Mode.
Use the drop down box to select the View Mode.
The view mode selection is stored in the Monaco
workspace file.
Configure Button (Ctrl+C) Opens the HMI Control Configurator

Column Handling

The Service Table HMI Control supports customizing the visibility of the columns in the views.

By default not all columns are shown in order not to overload the view. But the user may
define what columns are important for his use case and unhide additional columns or hide
existing columns in the view.

Simply right-click somewhere on the table head and select the entry Column Visibility. The

338
8.15. HMI Control Service Table

sub items allow checking the columns to be displayed in the view.

To resize the column width to the size of the largest column content double-click on the right
column devider in the header row.

Copying selected list items

You can content of the Service List or Parameter List to the Windows Clipboard using the
following commands available in the context menu of the list areas.

Copy Cell Copies the content of the cell where the context
menu was opened
Copy Copies the content of all selected rows. The con-
tent of each row will be separated by a CR LF. A
Tab is printed for an empty cell.
Copy All Copies the content of the whole list. The content
of each row will be separated by a CR LF. A Tab
is printed for an empty cell.

Keyboard Handling

Key Function
Shift+Arrow Up/Down Selects the items above/beneath the selected
item in the Service List.
Ctrl+A Selects all items in the Service List.
+ Expands the next level of a selected item in the
Service List.
* Expands the all sublevels of a selected item in
the Service List.
- Expands the all sublevels of a selected item in
the Service List.
Application Key or Shift+F10 Opens the context menu of the selected item.
Ctrl+C Copies the selected item to the Windows Clip-
board.

339
8.15. HMI Control Service Table

8.15.1.1 Service Mode

In Service Mode the services and jobs with their response parameters are displayed in a
hierarchical list.
The view is divided into the Service List and the Configuration Pane.

On the top level the Name of the Service or job is shown.

A service is indicated by the symbol .
A checkbox allows marking the service for execution. Services that are check-marked will
be executed when the Start button in the tool bar is pressed. Checking services during
execution is not supported.

A service has an individual Start button that allows executing the service manually. The
service will be executed once per click even when a cyclic measurement is executing. The
state of the checkbox will be ignored for manual execution.
The service can also be executed by double-clicking it, using the entry Transmit Service
from the context menu or by selecting it and pressing the Return or Enter key.

The button in front of the service allows expanding the service to the response level that
shows the positive responses with the selected response parameters on the next level.

The Service List

The Service List shows the configured services and jobs that are used to retrieve measure-
ment data from the ECUs.

The following columns are available:

Column Remarks

340
8.15. HMI Control Service Table

Name This column shows the comment or name of the

service, the response or the response parame-
ter. The name shown depends on the settings
of the Properties Show Long Names and Show
Alias Names in the Configurator.

Show Alias Names: When set to true an Alias

name will be shown instead of the Service long
or Short Name. The Alias Name will be set to the
Long Name of the Service by default. To change
the Alias Name select Configure Service Alias
from the context menu.

Show Long Names: This property is set to false

by default to show the Long Name of the ser-
vices. When set to false the Short Names of the
services will be displayed.
The column is always visible and cannot be hid-
den.
Value This column shows the value of the response pa-
rameter of the last service execution.
The column is always visible and cannot be hid-
den.
Unit This column shows the unit of the parameter.
The column is visible by default and can be hid-
den using the context menu on the column head.
Datatype This column shows the data type of the parame-
ter.
The column is hidden by default and can be
made visible using the context menu on the col-
umn head.
Cycle Time This column shows the cycle time in millisec-
onds the service is executed to retrieve the value
of the parameter.
The Cycle Time can be varied in the range of 0
to 60000 ms. Default is 1000 ms.
The column is visible by default and can be hid-
den using the context menu on the column head.

341
8.15. HMI Control Service Table

Logical Link This column shows the Logical Link the service
is associated to.
It is only available for a service row.
The column is visible by default and can be hid-
den using the context menu on the column head.
PDU This column shows the PDU of the service re-
quest.
The column is hidden by default and can be
made visible using the context menu on the col-
umn head.
Validity This column shows, if the value is valid, e.g. not
out of the range defined in the database.

Validity may contain the following messages:

Value not available: The value is not available
in range.
Value not defined: The value is not defined in
range.
Value not initialized: The value is not set and
no default is available.
Value not valid : The value is not valid.
Value OK : The value is in range.
Coded to physical Value failed: Transforma-
tion from coded to physical value failed.

The column is hidden by default and can be

made visible using the context menu on the col-
umn head.
Execution State The Execution State informs about the result of
the last execution of a service, a response or a
parameter.
The column is visible by default and can be hid-
den using the context menu on the column head.

You may hide or show columns by clicking on the column head and selecting the appropriate
column in the context menu entry Column Visibility.

The Service Configuration Pane

On the bottom of the HMI Control the Service Configuration Pane can be displayed. If is not

342
8.15. HMI Control Service Table

visible at the moment press the button at the right bottom corner or the HMI Control.

The Service Configuration Pane shows all the parameters of the currently selected service
in the Service List.

Selecting the Response Parameters shown in the Service List

Check/uncheck the response parameters in the section Symbolic Responses you want to
have displayed in the Service List.

Press the Apply button on the right or press Alt+Y to apply the changes. To discard the
modifications click the Cancel button.

Modifying Request Parameters

To modify a request parameter of a service double-click or press F2 when the request pa-
rameter is selected in the Params section.
Press enter to accept the modification and leave the editing mode. Press ESC to discard the
changes.

343
8.15. HMI Control Service Table

A changed value will be highlighted in green color.

For details see Configuration of Services and ComPrimitives.

Press the Apply button on the right or press Alt+Y to apply the changes. To discard the
modifications click the Cancel button.

Use the horizontal splitter bar between the Configuration Pane and the Service List to adjust
the size of the Configuration Pane. To hide the Service Configuration Pane press the
button on the top-right corner of the configuration area.

All changes can be stored in the Monaco workspace file.

Adding Services and Jobs

To add services to the list Drag and Drop them from the Service Tree or from another Service
Table HMI Control into the list while measurement is stopped.

When a Service is dragged and dropped from another Service Table HMI Con-
trol, the configuration of the activated parameters and the service Alias name of
the original Service Table HMI Control is transferred exactly to the new one.

To drag an item from a Service Table HMI Control on another Layout please first
drag the items to the tab header of the target layout. This will switch to the target
layout where you can drop the items into the target Service Table HMI Control.

A marker indicates the position where the item will be inserted when it is dropped.

When holding down the CTRL key during drag and drop of a service a dialog will be shown
allowing to select the response parameters to be used.

To remove a service or job select it and press the Remove Comments and Services button
in the toolbar or the Delete button on the keyboard. All selected services will be removed
including their parameters.

Adding Comments

To add a comment to a service or job, select it and press the Add Comment button. This will
add an empty row before the service row.
Drag and Drop of comments from another Service Table HMI Control is also supported.

To edit a comment double-click the first cell of the comment row or press <F2>. Press

344
8.15. HMI Control Service Table

<Enter> or click outside the comment field to take over the changes.

To remove a comment select it and press the Remove Comments and Services button
in the toolbar or the Delete button on the keyboard. All comments and associated services
will be removed.

A comment can only be added, removed or changed when measurement is disabled and
only one comment is selected.

Sorting and Re-Arranging items in the list

Comments and Service nodes can be moved in the list when measurement is stopped.

To move the items you can use Drag and Drop or the Move Up and Move Down
buttons on the tool bar.

Only top level items, i.e. services, jobs and comments can be used to drag an entry in the
list. A marker indicates the position where the item will be inserted when it is dropped.
The whole content of a service node (including responses and parameters) will be moved.

Multiple items can be dragged and dropped at once by holding down the CTRL key when
selecting them.

The order of the items in the list is stored in the workspace file.

Starting and Stopping the Measurement

To execute a single entry in the service list once use the Start button in front of the
service name in the list.

Click the Start button on the tool bar to start the data acquisition from the ECUs. Only
services and jobs that have a check mark will be processed.

While data acquisition is running the caption of the button changes from Start to Stop.

Depending on the selected acquisition mode only one measurement or a cyclic measure-
ment is started.

• Single shot / Synchronous: All checked services in the list are executed once and
one after the other in the order they appear in the list.

• Single shot / Asynchronous All checked services in the list are executed once and
almost simultaneously i.e. all services are executed as fast as possible.

345
8.15. HMI Control Service Table

• Cyclic / Synchronous All checked services in the list are executed cyclically one after
the other in the order they appear in the list. The cycle time specified in the tool bar. If
the ECU responses take longer than the cycle time, the cycle ends when the last ECU
sent its response.

• Cyclic / Asynchronous All checked services in the list are executed cyclically using
the individual cycle time of each service specified in column Cycle Time in the service
list.

Note: If a huge amount of services is executed asynchronously on one Logical Link an

error message with error text The number of elements 256 has reached the limit for the
LogicalLink may occur. This is a limitation of the system. The number of services on a
Logical Link that are simultaneously open is limited.

In this case please use the Synchronous execution mode instead.

The status of the check box cannot be changed during run time.

When Autostart Measurement is activated in the Configurator, measurement starts automat-

ically when Monaco execution is activated.

If Pre- and PostActions are enabled in the Configurator of the HMI Control, Pre-Actions
are executed before the measurement services are sent, the Post-Actions are sent after
measurement has stopped.

Monitoring the Values

To show the value of a parameter you have to expand the tree of a service item until the
parameters of the positive response are displayed.
After the service has been executed the value is interpreted and shown in the column Value.
Its unit is displayed in the Unit column.
In case the ECU sent a negative response or there was an error, the column Value will be
empty.

Negative Response

When the ECU responds with a Negative Response, no values will be displayed for the
parameters of this service.
Additionally an response item for the negative response will be inserted. This item will con-
tain the parameters of the negative response in order to display the reponse code for the
negative response.

To clear all values shown in the list, press the Clear button on the tool bar of the HMI
Control. The values are also cleared when the Clear All button on the Monaco tool bar is

346
8.15. HMI Control Service Table

clicked.
Clearing is only supported when no measurement is running.

8.15.1.2 Parameter Mode

In Parameter Mode only the response parameters and their values are shown.

The Parameter List

The Parameter List shows the response parameters and their values.

The following columns are available:

Column Remarks

347
8.15. HMI Control Service Table

Parameter Name This column shows the comment or parameter

name.

The name shown depends on the settings of the

following Properties in the Configurator:

Show Alias Names: When set to true an Alias

name will be shown instead of the service or pa-
rameter Long or Short Name. The Alias Name
will be set according to the setting of Show Long
Names property, i.e. if Show Long Names is set
to true, the Long Name of the service or param-
eter is set as default Alias name.
Double-clicking the cell with the service or pa-
rameter name or choosing the entry Configure
Service Alias/Configure Parameter Alias from
the context menu of the cell allows entering a
name of your choice.
Press Enter to accept the modifications, press
ESC to discard any changes.

Show Long Names: This property is set to false

by default and is used to show the Long Name of
the services and parameters. When set to false
the Short Names will be displayed.

Show Identifier : This property allows adding the

service identifier (SID) and the data identifier
(DID) as prefix in brackets to the service name
([<SID> <DID>] <service name>).

The column is always visible and cannot be hid-

den.
Value This column shows the value of the response pa-
rameter of the last service execution.
The column is always visible and cannot be hid-
den.
Unit This column shows the unit of the parameter.
The column is visible by default and can be hid-
den using the context menu on the column head.

348
8.15. HMI Control Service Table

Data Type This column shows the data type of the parame-
ter.
The column is hidden by default and can be
made visible using the context menu on the col-
umn head.
Service This column shows the associated service of the
parameter.
The column is hidden by default and can be
made visible using the context menu on the col-
umn head.
Logical Link This column shows the Logical Link associated
to the service of the parameter.
The column is hidden by default and can be
made visible using the context menu on the col-
umn head.
Validity This column shows, if the value is valid, e.g. not
out of the range defined in the database.
The column is hidden by default and can be
made visible using the context menu on the col-
umn head.
For details see the description of the columns in
Service Mode.
Execution State The Execution State informs about the result of
the last execution of a service, a response or a
parameter.
The column is hidden by default and can be
made visible using the context menu on the col-
umn head.
For details see the description of the columns in
Service Mode.

When a single parameter in the list is selected you can use the Go to Service from the
context menu to switch to the Service List and highlight the associated service there.

Sorting and Re-Arranging items in the list

By default the sorting of the parameters and comments is according to the order in the
Service List.

Parameters and comments can be rearranged in the list by Drag and Drop or the Move Up

349
8.15. HMI Control Service Table

and Down buttons while measurement is stopped.

When one or more parameters or comments are selected and they are dragged over the
list the insert marker indicates the position where the items will be inserted when they are
dropped.

The button Default Order appears behind the column head of the Parameter Name as
soon as the default order was modified. When you press the button the default order is
re-established. The button is not visible when the default order is active.

When the default sorting was modified, any new services, response parameters or com-
ments that are added to the Service List will be appended to the end of the Parameter List.

Starting and Stopping the Measurement

In Parameter Mode only the Start button from the tool bar is available.
Pressing the Start button will start the measurement for all parameters checked in the Ser-
vice List. The selected Acquisition Mode (Single shot/Cyclic with the selected Cycle Time)
will be applied.
During measurement the Start button will change to a Stop button allowing to interrupt a
cyclic measurement at any time.

8.15.1.3 Execution States

The Execution State informs about the result of the last execution of a service, a response
or a parameter.

The following Execution States may be displayed:

Execution States for Services

Execution State for Service Description

ALL POSITIVE In case of an execution state eALL POSITIVE,
the result contains only positive responses.
ALL FAILED No response received.
ALL NEGATIVE In case of an execution state eALL NEGATIVE,
all addressed ECUs returned a negative re-
sponse.
ALL INVALID RESPONSE In case of an execution state
eALL INVALID RESPONSE, none of the
addressed ECUs did respond with a response
matching to a data base template.

350
8.15. HMI Control Service Table

FAILED In case of an execution state eFAILED, at least

one of the addressed ECUs did not respond.
NEGATIVE In case of an execution state eNEGATIVE, all
addressed ECUs did respond and at least one
of the addressed ECUs returned a negative re-
sponse.
INVALID RESPONSE In case of an execution state eIN-
VALID RESPONSE, at least one response
of the addressed ECUs did not match a data
base template and no ECU failed to respond.
CANCELED DURING EXECUTION In case of an execution state eCAN-
CELED DURING EXECUTION, the corre-
sponding communication primitive has been
cancelled after execution had already started.
CANCELED FROM QUEUE In case of an execution state eCAN-
CELED FROM QUEUE, the corresponding
communication primitive was cancelled and
removed from the queue.

Execution States for Responses

Excution State for Reponses Description

acknowledged Indicates a positive response.
not acknowledged Indicates a negative response.

Execution States for Parameters

Excution State for Parameters Description

OK in case the parameter has no error.
error description Error description, e.g. in case of interpretation
error.

351
8.15. HMI Control Service Table

8.15.2 Configuration of the HMI Control Service Table

The Configurator Settings control the behavior of the HMI Control Service Table in Execution
Mode.

The Configurator contains the following tabs:

• Common Settings

The following buttons are available:

• OK : Saves the current configuration and closes the Configurator

• Cancel: Changes are discarded and the Configurator is closed

• Edit: Opens the Pre and Post Action Editor.

Pre- and Post Actions can be specified for a HMI Control type in a DTS Project, i.e.
for all Service Table HMI Controls in all workspaces of a DTS Project. Whenever a
the execution of the HMI Control is started the Pre Actions defined in the Pre and
Post Action Editor are executed. When the execution is stopped, the Post Actions are
executed.
This applies when the Property Execute Pre- and Post Actions is set to true.

• Help: Opens the appropriate chapter in the Monaco help

8.15.2.1 Common Settings

The image below shows the dialog window Service Table - Configurator with the Common
Settings tab opened.

352
8.15. HMI Control Service Table

The following table shows an overview of all Properties and their values of the tab Common
Settings. Default values are represented in bold letters.

Property Default Value / Description

Group / Prop- Value Range
erty
Gen- Service Ta- Name of the HMI Control that will be displayed in its
eral/Caption ble/any charac- frame.
ter string
General/Show true/false If true, the border frame of the HMI Control is dis-
Frame played else no border frame is displayed.
General/Show true/false If true, Long Names are displayed, if false Short
LongNames Names are shown.
General/Show false/true If true, the Alias Names are displayed, if false, the
Alias Names Long or Short Names according to the setting Show
Long Names are displayed.
General/Show None/ServiceID/ServiceID
Sets the format of the Identifier, that will be used as
Identifier and DataID prefix to the name of the service.
Gen- false/true If true, the measurement starts automatically when
eral/Autostart Monaco enters Execution Mode (Execution active).
Measurement

353
8.16. HMI Control Soft Key

Gen- true/false If true, the communication with the ECU is started

eral/Autostart (if the communication has not been started already)
Communication when an associated service is executed. If the ser-
vice belongs to a Base Variant a VariantIdentificatio-
nAndSelection ComPrimitive will be executed.
Configure But- true/false Sets the visibility of the Configure button
ton/Visible
Pre/Post Ac- true/false Enables the execution of the Pre- and Post Actions
tions/Execute defined in the Pre and Post Action Editor. If set to
Pre- and true, the execution of the Pre- and PostActions is en-
PostActions abled. The Pre-Actions are started when the Start
button is pressed and the Post-Actions are executed
when the Stop buttons is pressed or when the Single
Shot has finished.
If false, Pre- and Post Actions are ignored.
Pre/Post Ac- true/false Displays the Variants in the Services/ComPrimitives
tions/Show tab of the Pre and Post Action Editor.
LogicalLinks on
Variants

8.16 HMI Control Soft Key

General Information

Description
The HMI Control Soft Key allows executing sequences of ser-
vices, jobs or OTX scripts using up to four buttons that can be
configured by the user

Up to four buttons that will trigger the corresponding se-

quences can be configured by the user.

They allow accessing frequently used functions like DTC read-

ing, ECU identification, ECU reset, etc.
Classification Function HMI Control
License HMI Library Extension required
Reports not supported

354
8.16. HMI Control Soft Key

8.16.1 Using the HMI Control SoftKey

For frequently used tasks like ECU identification, ECU reset, etc. the HMI Control Softkey is
a good selection.

The HMI Control Softkey allows executing sequences of services and ComPrimitives. Since
in some cases more than one Diagnostic Service or ComPrimitive is necessary to perform a
complete task (first readDTCs and then clearDTCs).

The figure below shows the user interface of the HMI Control Soft Key with the Process
Values list enabled. If the Sequence is executed the resulting data is shown by the display
box Process Values.

Buttons

Sequence Buttons
Up to four Sequence buttons can be enabled for a Soft Key HMI Control. A Sequence button
starts a series of Diagnostic Services, OTX scripts or ComPrimitives. See chapter Designing
Sequences for details.

Configure
Using the Configurator of the HMI Control a button Configure can be inserted in the user
interface to get direct access to the Configurator in Execution Mode during runtime. This is
not a default setting.

Process Values

The complete communication is visualized in the Process Values list. The content of the
windows scrolls with every communication event. The PDU of the request of the sent Di-
agnostic Service is displayed (see figure above). The PDU of the Response is also shown.
Furthermore the Response is shown on a symbolic level. Additionally, colors are used to
inform the user about Warnings (green) or Errors (red). Messages sent from the ECU are

355
8.16. HMI Control Soft Key

displayed in blue characters, messages sent from the HMI Control to the ECU are displayed
in black characters.

The button Clear allows clearing the content of the Process Values list.

Scroll bars appear automatically for the ProcessValues list if the number of entries exceeds
the visible area.

ShortName
Shows the Short Name of the object in the database.

Value
Shows the Value of the object.

Unit
Shows the Unit of the Value, if available.

RangeInfo
When a range information is available in the ODX database, this column shows information
about the validity of the value.

The following values may be displayed:

Value OK : The value is within a valid range.
Value not valid: The value is in an invalid area.
Value not defined: The value is in an area, which is marked in a specification (e.g. as
reserved).
Value not available: The value is in a currently invalid area. The value usually is presented by
the ECU but can currently not be performed due to e.g. initialisation or temporary problems.

If internal scale contraints are available in the database they are added to the RangeInfo in
brackets.

Rows with a RangeInfo other than Value OK are printed in red.

Error
Shows error messages.

Using only the Buttons

The Process Values list can be hidden by the property Show Process Values in the Com-
mon Settings of the HMI Control Configurator.
In this case only the buttons are shown.

356
8.16. HMI Control Soft Key

Icons next to the buttons on the right are indicating the execution result. They have the
following meaning:

Icon Description

The sequence was executed without any error.

Warning (e.g. a Diagnostic Service of the se-

quence was rejected by the ECU).

Error (e.g. an error occured during execution of

a Diagnostic Service of the sequence)

8.16.2 Configuration of the HMI Control SoftKey

The look and behavior of the HMI Control in Execution Mode is controlled by the settings
provided by its Configurator.
For information how to work with the Configurator of an HMI Control see chapter Configura-

357
8.16. HMI Control Soft Key

tion of HMI Controls.

The image below shows the Configurator window with the Common Settings tab selected.

It contains the following tabs:

• Common Settings: Settings that control the look and behavior of the HMI Control (de-
scribed below)

• Filters: Settings for filtering Logical Links that are not required

• Sequence tabs: Configuration interface for creating sequences of services and Com-
Primitives

The tabs on the right Services, ComPrimitives and Configuration are used for designing the
sequences.

• Services: For detailed information about the tab Services please see chapter Config-
uration of Services and ComPrimitives

• ComPrimitives: For detailed information about the tab ComPrimitives please see chap-
ter Configuration of Services and ComPrimitives

• Configuration: The usage of the tab Configuration is the same as described in chapter
Configuration of Services and ComPrimitives

• Otx: For detailed information about the tab Otx please see chapter Designing Se-
quences of Services, ComPrimitives and OTX Scripts

358
8.16. HMI Control Soft Key

• Otx Configuration: The usage of the tab Otx Configuration is the same as described in
chapter Configuration of OTX Scripts

The following buttons are available:

• OK : Saves the current configuration and closes the Configurator

• Cancel: Changes are discarded and the Configurator is closed

• Help: Opens the appropriate chapter in the Monaco help

The table below describes all properties of the tab Common Settings and their value range .
Default values are represented in bold letters.

Property Default Description

Group / Value /
Property Value
Range
Gen- Soft Key/ Name of the HMI Control that will be displayed in its
eral/Caption any char- frame.
acter string This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
Gen- true/ false Switches visualization of a border frame between on
eral/Show and off.
Frame This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
Gen- true/false) Switches visualization of DiagnosticServices in the
eral/Show display box Database of the user interface between
Services on and off
Gen- true/ false Switches visualization of LongName of data object in
eral/Show the user interface between on and off
Long-
Names
Gen- true/false Switches auto clear of displayed data in the list box
eral/Auto Process Values of the user interface between on and
clear out- off; auto clear takes place before the next Sequence
put window is send.
Gen- true/false Determines if the list box Process Values is displayed
eral/Show in the user interface. Otherwise the execution state
Process is visualized via icons.
Values

359
8.16. HMI Control Soft Key

Gen- true/false Determines if execution marks (icons) are displayed,

eral/Show if the Show Process Values is set to false
Execution
Marks
Gen- true/false switches visualization of LogicalLinks on ECUVari-
eral/Show ants in tab Filters, Services and ComPrimitives of the
LogicalL- Configurator between on and off
inks on
Variants
Gen- true/false Data of the request will be suppressed
eral/Only
show Re-
sponse
Data
Gen- None/Start If one of the options Start Sequence 1..4 is selected,
eral/Startup Sequence the sequence defined in the appropriate Sequence
Behavior 1/Start tab of the Soft Key HMI Control is started automati-
Sequence cally when Monaco starts execution.
2/Start
Sequence Execution is started automatically when the option
3/Start Start automatically after loading in the Workspace
Sequence Options dialog is activated and a workspace is
4 loaded in Execution Mode or Monaco switches from
Configuration Mode to Execution Mode. In Execution
Mode execution can be started manually when the
execution has been stopped before by pressing the
Start button, F5 or using the menu entry Start from
the Execution menu.

This property cannot be changed when the Configu-

rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.

360
8.16. HMI Control Soft Key

Gen- false/true If set to true and the communication has not been
eral/Auto started already, executing a service or HEX service
Start Com- will cause Monaco to perform a StartCommunication
munication ComPrimitive before sending the service. If the ser-
vice belongs to a Base Variant a VariantIdentificatio-
nAndSelection ComPrimitive will be additionally exe-
cuted before sending the service.

If set to false, the communication will not be started

automatically. The StartCommunication and VariantI-
dentificationAndSelection ComPrimitive have to be
performed manually before sending the service.
Gen- false/true If set to true, the configuration dialog Configure
eral/Configure service before execution will open when a SoftKey
service button is pressed allowing to configure the service
before parameters before the service respectively the se-
execution quence is executed.

The configuration dialog has the name of the pressed

Soft Key button and looks similar to the configuration
dialog of the HMI control. The tab on the left shows
the services of the sequence that can be configured.

On the right the associated configuration options can

be selected.

Click OK to start the execution using the modifyed

parameters. Cancel will execute the sequence dis-
carding all changes.
Gen- true/false If set to true, the folder Library containing the Global
eral/Show OTX scripts is displayed in the OTX tree. If false, the
Library in folder Library and the contained Global OTX scripts
Otx tree are hidden.
OTX scripts that shall be accessible not only for one
project can be added to the Library of Global OTX
scripts using the tab Libraries in the System Config-
urator.
Sequence true/false switches visualization of the button between on and
1 Button ... off
Sequence
4 But-
ton/visible

361
8.17. HMI Control Symbolic Trace

Sequence Sequence caption of the button

1 Button ... 1/any
Sequence character
4 But- string
ton/Caption
Sequence Stop/any caption of the button after it was pressed in the Exe-
1 Button character cution Mode
... Se- string
quence 4
Button/Run
Caption
Sequence true/false determines if the Sequence should be sent frequently
1 Button ...
Sequence
4 But-
ton/frequent
Sequence 1000/any possibility to change the sample time (cyclic sending
1 Button ... positive of a Sequence)
Sequence number
4 But-
ton/sampling
time(ms)
Config- false/true Enables or disables the Configure Button in the HMI
ure But- Control.
ton/visible This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.

8.17 HMI Control Symbolic Trace

General Information

362
8.17. HMI Control Symbolic Trace

Description The HMI Control Symbolic Trace displays any communication

from Hex-Level up to symbolics including ASAM MCD-3 API
primitives. It displays the communication of all HMI Controls of
all Layouts as a central monitoring tool for one Physical Inter-
face Link.
The information displayed in this HMI Control can be traced to
files and analyzed offline as well.

Features

• Analysis of diagnostic communication at application level

in symbolic notation

• Recording of communication in a file for later analysis in

the Analytics application. Analytics is part of the DTS
Base System.

• The HMI Control allows copying content directly from the

recording window.

• The output can be paused to be analyzed during trace

recording.

• The output window offers extensive configuration op-

tions.

Classification Communication HMI Control

License Basic Monaco License
Reports not supported

8.17.1 Using the HMI Control Symbolic Trace

The HMI Control Symbolic Trace allows analyzing, tracing and recording the diagnostic com-
munication with interpreted data in symbolic notation.

Features

• The ECU communication can be recorded to a file for later analysis in Analytics.
Analytics is part of the DTS Base System.

• The content of the Output Area may be copied to the Windows clipboard.

363
8.17. HMI Control Symbolic Trace

• Time Stamps can be configured to be shown in absolute or relative notation.

• Output can be paused to be analyzed during communication.
• Tracing can be configured to be started automatically as soon as the workspace was
loaded.

The user interface of the HMI Control Symbolic Trace consists of a toolbar and an Output
Area for monitoring the communication.

The Output Area contains different columns, where the monitored data is interpreted and
displayed.
Output View

The trace window displays the following columns:

Event
Displays the Event type.
This column is hidden by default. It has to be anabled by setting the property Visible
columns/Show Event column to true.

Logical Link
Displays the Logical Link that caused the trace event.

Message Identifier

The second column of the trace window displays the message identifier (e.g. CAN Identifier )
of each sent Request and the corresponding Response. The CAN identifiers are displayed
in hexadecimal format.

Depending on the setting of the property Map CANID to the message identifier may have
different representations.

Time Stamp

This column displays the absolute Time (in ms). The time stamp usually is generated by the
diagnostic interface. For this reason the starttime cannot be determined exactly.

364
8.17. HMI Control Symbolic Trace

It can be used for matching events in the symbolic trace to events in the bus trace that uses
the same time base.
The time stamp is always displayed in a decimal format.

Description

This column displays the item name of each event. For services additionally the Service
Identifier (SID) and the Data Identifier (DID) are shown. For requests and responses the
PDU and the parameters contained are shown.
Items that are sent by the tester are marked with black color and the corresponding items
that are received are marked with blue color.

Value

Interpreted value of the element that is shown in the Description column. If an interpretation
is possible, as e.g. for a service parameter, the value will be displayed after interpretation
took place.

RangeInfo

When a range information is available in the ODX database, this column shows information
about the validity of the value. The Configuration property Show Rangeinfo column deter-
mines if the column RangeInfo is shown or hidden.

The following values may be displayed:

Value OK : The value is within a valid range.
Value not valid: The value is in an invalid area.
Value not defined: The value is in an area, which is marked in a specification (e.g. as
reserved).
Value not available: The value is in a currently invalid area. The value usually is presented by
the ECU but can currently not be performed due to e.g. initialisation or temporary problems.

If internal scale contraints are available in the database they are added to the RangeInfo in
brackets.

The content of the Output Area or part of it may be copied to the Windows clipboard. Please

stop the output view before by clicking the button .

Select one or more trace lines and right-click them to show a context menu.
Note: You may select multiple lines by holding down the CTRL key while clicking on them.
Form the context menu select:

• Copy Cell to copy the content of the right-clicked cell in the selected line.

• Copy to copy all of the selected lines

365
8.17. HMI Control Symbolic Trace

• Select All to select the whole content of the output view.

Note: You may also use CTRL+C to copy the selected lines.

Toolbar

The second part of the user interface of the HMI Control Symbolic Trace is the Toolbar. The
table below gives an overview about the elements of the toolbar.

Button Description

Starts monitoring on the corresponding Physical Interface Link -> output

starts; precondition for trace file recording

Stops monitoring on the corresponding Physical Interface Link

Starts tracing to a previously defined trace file. If no trace file was defined
before a default trace file is used.

Stops tracing to the trace file.

Pauses tracing to the trace file.

Stops the output and enables scrolling; enables the user to scroll back to
displayed bus events which are already out of the visible area of the Output
Area.

Continues the output and disables scrolling

Clears the Output Area.

Button Opens the Configurator of the HMI Control in Execution Mode.

Config-
ure...

366
8.17. HMI Control Symbolic Trace

8.17.2 Configuration of the HMI Control Symbolic Trace

The look and behavior of the HMI Control in Execution Mode is controlled by the settings
provided by its Configurator.

For information how to work with the Configurator of an HMI Control see chapter Configura-
tion of HMI Controls.

The image below shows the Configurator window with the Common Settings tab selected.

367
8.17. HMI Control Symbolic Trace

It contains the following tabs:

• Common Settings: Settings that control the look and behavior of the HMI Control (de-
scribed below)

• Filters: Settings for filtering Logical Links that are not required

The following buttons are available:

• OK : Saves the current configuration and closes the Configurator

• Cancel: Changes are discarded and the Configurator is closed

• Help: Opens the appropriate chapter in the Monaco help

The table below describes all properties of the tab Common Settings and their value range .
Default values are represented in bold letters.

Property Default Description

Group / Value /
Property Value
Range
Gen- Symbolic Name of the HMI Control that will be displayed in its
eral/Caption Trace/ any frame.
character This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
string rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
Gen- true/ false Switches visualization of a border frame between on
eral/Show and off.
Frame
Gen- CAN1/ Determines the PhysicalInterfaceLink, which is used
eral/PhysicalInterfaceLink
depends for communication
on the
configura-
tion of the
used Inter-
face (e.g.
EDICusb2)

368
8.17. HMI Control Symbolic Trace

Gen- <Name Sets the configurable part (see <trace file name>
eral/TraceFile of the below) of of the trace file name.
name Physial The name of the trace file has the following format:
Interface <timestamp> <trace file name>.xpvt
Link e.g. The format of <timestamp> is yyyy-mm-ddThh-mi-
CAN1>/ ss (yyyy=year, mm=month, dd=day, hh=hour in 24h
any string format, mi=minutes, ss=seconds).

Changing the trace file name in Execution Mode is

allowed. The change is applied when the trace file is
opened for the next trace file recording. The file name
for the current trace recording will keep the former
naming until it is closed.

The trace file will be stored in the folder Symbolic-

Trace located in the traces folder of the current DTS
project. The content can be viewed using the Ana-
lytics application.
Gen- None / Defines the behavior when Monaco execution is
eral/Startup Start Vi- started.
Behavior sual Trace
/ Start None: The visual trace or the file trace are not started
Visual & automatically.
File Trace Start Visual Trace: The HMI Control starts tracing
the diagnostic communication and displays the trace
events in the Display Area.
Start Visual & File Trace: The HMI Control starts
to trace the diagnostic communication. The trace
events are displayed in the Display Area and written
to a trace file.

Visible false/ true The column Event will be displayed.

Columns/Show
Event col-
umn
Visible true/ false The column LogicalLink will be displayed.
Columns/Show
LogicalLink
column

369
8.17. HMI Control Symbolic Trace

Visible true/ false The column Timestamp will be displayed.

Columns/Show
Timestamp
column
Visible true/ false The column CanID (hex) will be displayed.
Columns/Show
ID column
Visible false/true The column Unit will be displayed.
Columns/Show
Unit col-
umn
Visible false/true The column RangeInfo will be displayed.
Columns/Show
Rangeinfo
column
Content true/ false The Request Parameter will be displayed
Presenta- This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
tion/Show rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
request
parameter
Content true/ false The Request PDU will be displayed
Presenta- This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
tion/Show rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
request
PDU
Content true/ false The Response Parameter will be displayed
Presenta- This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
tion/Show rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
response
parameter
Content true/ false The Response PDU will be displayed
Presenta- This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
tion/Show rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
response
PDU
Content true/false The Ecu Name will be displayed
Presenta- This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
tion/Show rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
Ecu Name

370
8.17. HMI Control Symbolic Trace

Content true/ false The Variant Name will be displayed

Presenta- This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
tion/Show rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
ECU Vari-
ant name
Content true/ false The Service Name will be displayed
Presenta- This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
tion/Show rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
Service
name
Content true/ false LogicalLink events will be displayed
Presenta- This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
tion/Show rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
LogicalLink
events
Content true/ false ComPrimitive events will be displayed
Presenta- This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
tion/Show rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
ComPrimi-
tive events
Content ID/ECU
Presenta- name/ECU The option determines how the message sender is
tion/Map name and displayed by the HMI Control.
CANID to ID
ID: Shows the request/response CAN-ID when trac-
Note: ing on CAN.
This option
is only ECU name: Shows the Short Name of ECU Base
available Variant, Protocol or Functional Group instead of the
when trac- CAN Identifier. The ECU name is identified using the
ing on database.
CAN. ECU name and ID: Shows both, the CAN Identifier
and the Short Name of ECU Base Variant, Protocol
or Functional Group.

371
8.18. HMI Control Toggle Sequences

Content ECU ad-

Presenta- dress/ECU This option determines how the message sender is
tion/Map name/ECU displayed by the HMI Control.
ECU ad- name and
dress to address ECU address:
Shows the ECU address when tracing on K-Line.
Note:
This option ECU name: Shows the Short Name of ECU Base
is only Variant, Protocol or Functional Group instead of the
available ECU address. The ECU name is identified using the
when trac- database.
ing on ECU name and address: Shows both, the ECU ad-
K-Line. dress and the Short Name of ECU Base Variant, Pro-
tocol or Functional Group.

Config- false/true Enables or disables the Configure button in the HMI

ure But- Control.
ton/visible This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.

8.18 HMI Control Toggle Sequences

General Information

Description The HMI Control Toggle Sequences is used for sending

services defined in the sequences Set and Release. The
sequences may contain services, ComPrimitives and OTX
scripts.
The HMI Control allows defining pre- and post actions for a
test, e.g. enable or disable bus idle mode before or after pro-
gramming operation.
The toggle position can be indicated by different colors.
Classification Control HMI Control
License HMI Library Extension required
Reports not supported

372
8.18. HMI Control Toggle Sequences

8.18.1 Using the HMI Control Toggle Sequences

The user interface of the HMI Control Toggle Sequences presents a button in the Monaco
Layout.

By pressing the button, the assigned Set sequence is executed. The button stays in the
state pressed.

By pressing the button again, the assigned Release sequence is executed. The button stays
in the state released.

The Configurator of the HMI Control can be opened in Execution mode by a right-
click on the button. The Configuration of the button (e.g. the Set and Release
sequence) may be modified without changing to Configuration Mode. A Interface
Designer license is not required in this case.

8.18.2 Configuration of the HMI Control Toggle Sequences

The Configurator Settings control the behavior of the HMI Control Toggles Sequences in
Execution Mode.
For information how to work with the Configurator of an HMI Control see chapter Configura-
tion of HMI Controls.

The HMI Control Toggles Sequences allows accessing the Configurator while Monaco is in
Execution Mode. To open the Configurator, right-click on the button in the Monaco Layout.

The image below shows the Configurator window with the Common Settings tab selected.

It contains the following tabs:

373
8.18. HMI Control Toggle Sequences

• Common Settings: Settings that control the look and behavior of the HMI Control (de-
scribed below)

• Filters: Settings for filtering Logical Links that are not required

• Sequence tabs: Configuration interface for creating sequences of services and Com-
Primitives

The tabs on the right Services, ComPrimitives and Configuration are used for designing the
sequences.

• Services: For detailed information about the tab Services please see chapter Config-
uration of Services and ComPrimitives

• ComPrimitives: For detailed information about the tab ComPrimitives please see chap-
ter Configuration of Services and ComPrimitives

• Configuration: The usage of the tab Configuration is the same as described in chapter
Configuration of Services and ComPrimitives

• Otx: For detailed information about the tab Otx please see chapter Designing Se-
quences of Services, ComPrimitives and OTX Scripts

• Otx Configuration: The usage of the tab Otx Configuration is the same as described in
chapter Configuration of OTX Scripts

The following buttons are available:

• OK : Saves the current configuration and closes the Configurator

• Cancel: Changes are discarded and the Configurator is closed

• Help: Opens the appropriate chapter in the Monaco help

The table below describes all properties of the tab Common Settings and their value range .
Default values are represented in bold letters.

Property Default Description

Group / Value /
Property Value
Range

374
8.18. HMI Control Toggle Sequences

Gen- true/ false Shows LongNames in the Services selection trees of

eral/Show the Configurator
Long-
Names
Gen- true/false Shows Logical Links on Variants in the Services se-
eral/Show lection trees of the Configurator
LogicalL-
inks on
Variants
Gen- false/true The communication starts automatically, if the com-
eral/Auto munication has not been started already. If the ser-
Start Com- vice belongs to a Base Variant a VariantIdentificatio-
munication nAndSelection ComPrimitive will be executed.
Gen- true/ false If set to true, the folder Library containing the Global
eral/Show OTX scripts is displayed in the OTX tree. If false, the
Library in folder Library and the contained Global OTX scripts
OTX tree are hidden.
OTX scripts that shall be accessible not only for one
project can be added to the Library of Global OTX
scripts using the tab Libraries in the System Config-
urator.
Not Set/any Caption of the Toggle Button when it is in the state
Pressed string released.
But-
ton/Caption
Not true/false true: When the Toggle Sequences button is pressed
Pressed for the first time the button is locked and the Set Se-
But- quence is executed. After the second click the button
ton/Keep is released and the Release Sequence is executed.
Pressed
false: When the Toggle Sequences button is pressed
for the first time the button must be held down by the
mouse cursor otherwise the button is released imme-
diately. The Set Sequence is executed. If the mouse
cursor is moved away from the button it is released
and the Release Sequence is executed.
Not false/true If true, the Set Sequence is executed cyclically.
Pressed
But-
ton/Frequent

375
8.19. HMI Control Tool Quick Test

Not 1000/numerical
Time interval for the cyclic execution of the Set Se-
Pressed value quence if option Frequent is set to true
But-
ton/Sampling
time(ms)
Not RGB(0,0,0)/other
Color of the button text in state released.
Pressed color
But-
ton/Color
of Caption
Not RGB(240,240,240)/other
Color of the button surface in state released.
Pressed color
But-
ton/Color
of Button
Pressed Release/any Caption of the Toggle Button when it is in the state
But- string set
ton/Caption
Pressed RGB(0,0,0)/other
Color of the button text in state set
But- color
ton/Color
of Caption
Pressed RGB(240,240,240)/other
Color of the button surface in state set
But- color
ton/Color
of Button

8.19 HMI Control Tool Quick Test

General Information

Description The HMI Control Tool Quick Test is designed to read certain in-
formation (e.g. identification data, Diagnostic Trouble Codes)
from one or more ECUs.

Classification Function HMI Control

License HMI Library Extension required
Reports supported

376
8.19. HMI Control Tool Quick Test

Application Guideline supported

(AGL)
This HMI Control only works with ODX data that was created
according to the Softing Authoring Guidelines. It requires spe-
cial services that have to match with the Softing Authoring
Guidelines.

If the ODX data of the customer does not fulfill this require-
ment, Softing offers the Application Guideline (AGL) technol-
ogy that allows using customer specific ODX data without cre-
ating customer specific software variants of DTS Monaco.

Application Guidelines are files that are able to create a map-

ping between the functionalities supported by DTS Monaco
(as reading DTCs, Coding, ECU Identification) and the cus-
tomer specific ODX data, that was created according to the
Authoring Guidelines of the customer.

If you want to work with this HMI Control using customer spe-
cific ODX data, contact Softing to get assistance in setting up
such an AGL interface.

8.19.1 Using the HMI Control Tool Quick Test

During a Quick Test run the following tasks are executed:

1. Open Logical Link

2. Start Communication

3. Variant Identification and Selection

4. Read ECU Identification

5. Read error memory (depending on the settings offered by the Quick Test toolbar)

6. Execution of several services (depending on the settings offered by the Quick Test
toolbar)

7. Stop Communication

8. Close Logical Link

377
8.19. HMI Control Tool Quick Test

The order of processing for an ECU can be defined in the ECU Order Configuration. See
chapter Setting the ECU Sequence Order.

The graphical user interface is split into four main windows:

• Quick Test Toolbar - Execution and Configuration Area

• ECUs Window

• ECU Identification Window

• Errors and Environment Data Windows

The Errors and Environment Data Window can be hidden using the button.

The size of the windows can be modified using the splitter bars between the windows.

Use the button to hide the ECU Identification or Environment Data window. To show
them again click the buttons.

All windows support multi-selection for the entries in their tables.

Configuration of a Quick Test Run using the Toolbar

The scope of actions and data read during a Quick Test run can be configured using the
Quick Test Toolbar.

378
8.19. HMI Control Tool Quick Test

There is a large number of DTS read options and also some options that write their results
only into the report.

Starting a Quicktest

Use the button Start to start the Quick Test run. While the Quick Test is running, the button
changes its caption Stop, allowing interrupting the current run.

Generating a Report

To generate a report use the Monaco Report feature.

The report contains the following data:

• VIN (if available)

• ODO (if available)

• Number of ECUs

• Table with all ECUs and the content as shown in the ECUs list of the HMI Control with
all available columns, independent of their visibility settings.

• for each ECU

– ECU Identification Data as a list of all identification values read.

– DTCs as a list of DTCs with their Environment Data and Additional Data with all
available columns, independent of their visibility settings.

– Coding strings as a list of all coding services with service name and the coding
string.

– Additional Services defined in the Sequence Editor (Services with request and
response parameters and the execution state)

– Error messages for this ECU, if available.

379
8.19. HMI Control Tool Quick Test

Changing the Text Size

The value in the field Text Size determines the text size used for displaying the content in
the windows (Default is 12).

Opening the Configurator in Execution Mode

When the Property Configure Button/visible is set to true in the Configurator the Configure
button will be displayed in the HMI Control.

The button Configure gives the user access to the Configuration Settings and the Sequence
Editor in Execution Mode.

Because not every setting can be changed during execution mode some settings are not
available.

8.19.1.1 Execution and Configuration of a Tool Quick Test

The toolbar of the HMI Control Tool Quick Test offers several configuration options that de-
termine what scope of data is retrieved from the ECUs during a Quick Test run.

Run Modes

Different modes offered by the Quicktest HMI Control define the steps and services that are
performed during a Quick Test run:

Select the appropriate run mode from the Mode drop-down list:

• Read ECU Identification only

This mode only reads ECU identification data. The other options offered by the toolbar
are disabled.

• Read data (default selection)

The data of all ECUs is read by applying the settings of the other options offered in the
toolbar.

• Clear errors
Executing this mode clears all errors found in the last Quick Test run. The other options
offered by the toolbar are disabled.

• Clear errors, read data

When using this mode, all DTCs for all ECUs are cleared and then the data of all ECUs
is read based on the settings of the other options offered by the toolbar.

380
8.19. HMI Control Tool Quick Test

Cyclic execution

The QuickTest can also be executed cyclically. This applies to all Quick Test modes.
The cyclic time is saved, but the state of the cyclic checkbox is not saved in the workspace.

DTC specific Read Options

When the selected run mode includes reading data, the following DTC modes are available:

DTC mode Description

None No DTCs are read
Confirmed DTCs Only confirmed DTCs are read
Supported DTCs Services for reading Supported Diagnostic Trouble Codes are
executed during a Quick Test run.
Test Not Completed Services for reading Diagnostic Trouble Codes which have the
status Test not complete are executed during a Quick Test run.

381
8.19. HMI Control Tool Quick Test

Runtime Filters Only DTCs that apply to the settings of the Runtime Filter
checkboxes are read.
Selecting this item, enables the Runtime Filter checkboxes,
allowing the configuration of individual filters that are applied
during runtime of the Quick Test.
This item is only available when the configuration option Show
Runtime filter is enabled in the Configurator of the HMI Con-
trol.

Runtime Filters are only available for Logical Links that make
use of the UDS protocol. They are used to request only DTCs
that match the checked filter options. The filter options refer to
the Status bit definitions described in the ISO 15765-3 specifi-
cation.

The following filter options are available for UDS links:

• Test failed

• Test failed this monitoring cycle

• Pending DTC

• Confirmed DTC

• Test not completed since last clear

• Test failed since last clear

• Test not completed this monitoring cycle

• Warning indicator requested

• Edit hex: Allows entering a hex number representing the

status of the individual check boxes of the runtime filters.
Entering a value will set the check boxes of the runtime
filter accordingly.
When you check or uncheck individual runtime filter op-
tions this will also be reflected in the hex value of this
field.

When using a Runtime Filter, only the services that request

the selected DTC types are sent to the ECU whereas using
the Display Filter does request all DTCs from the ECU and
filters after receiving the DTCs.
The Runtime Filter may be used to reduce load in some cases
382
by omitting to request DTCs that are not required.

The Runtime Filter settings are only displayed if the property

Show Runtime filter is set to true in the Configurator of the
8.19. HMI Control Tool Quick Test

Environment data When checked, services for reading Environment Data along
with the DTCs are executed during the Quick Test run.

Additional Read Options

Further actions may be executed during the Quick Test run when one of the following options
is selected.
The results of these services are not presented in the user interface of the HMI Control but
will be written to the report.

Read option Description

Coding strings Services which are used for reading the coding data are exe-
cuted during a Quick Test run

Additional Services Additional Services are executed during a Quick Test run.
They have to be set in the Sequence Editor as Additional Ser-
vices.

The options offered by the toolbar can be hidden using the button. In case they are
hidden, use the button next to the Mode selection menu to show them.

Starting a Quicktest

The button Start button starts the Quick Test run. While the Quick Test is running the button
gets the caption Stop, allowing interrupting the current run.

8.19.1.2 ECUs Window

This window displays basic information on the ECUs and their test state. Some columns
may be hidden by settings in the Configurator of the HMI Control.
The ECU window title shows the number of ECUs in brackets.

383
8.19. HMI Control Tool Quick Test

COLUMN DESCRIPTION CAN

BE
HID-
DEN
ECU Short Name of the ECU. This column shows all ECUs that No
pass the Logical Link filter and that are not part of the Not
Handled group in the ECU Sequence Order.
Errors Number of Errors (Diagnostic Trouble Codes) for this ECU Yes
found after a Quick Test run.
When no DTCs were found 0 is displayed. The cell is empty
when the number of DTCs could not be read from the ECU.
During a Clear Errors run, the cell in the Errors column dis-
plays - when the DTCs were deleted successfully.
Link Short Name of a Logical Link Yes
ECU-Variant Name of the ECU Variant detected during a Quick Test run. Yes
If no ECU-Variant was detected, the column will be empty.

384
8.19. HMI Control Tool Quick Test

Status Status of the communication (e.g. error messages) Yes

The Status column may contain the following messages:

• The cell will be empty when the ECU was not yet pro-
cessed.

• The Status will be running, when the ECU is currently

processed during a Quick Test run.

• The cell will show the error text of the last error when an
error occurred.

• The Status will be finished, when the has been pro-

cessed without an error.

• The Status will be ECU is not tested when the ECU is

part of an alternative group and the ECU is not tested
because another ECU of the group was detected suc-
cessfully.

• The Status will be Variant not found when the ECU was
tested but no Variant was detected.

Note: The Status column shows only the error text of the last
error. Double click the row of an ECU in the ECUs list or press
Enter to open a message box showing all error texts for this
ECU.

The ECU column provides additional controls:

• Test State indicated by a colored square

• Processing Mode indicated by a parallel or serial icon

• Checkbox to include/exclude the selected ECU from the Quick Test

Test State Icon

The Test State is represented by a colored square:

ICON REMARKS

385
8.19. HMI Control Tool Quick Test

Test completed with no error during communication. When a Negative

Response (7F) was received for one or more of the sent services this is
also rated as OK.
Test completed without matching variant. No variant was detected.
Communication was established with the Base Variant.
Test failed with communication error (e.g. P2 Timeout). No variant was
detected. No communication was established with the Base Variant.
Errors during Test. A communication error occurred (e.g. P2 Time out)
after an ECU Variant was detected.
Errors during Test. A communication error (e.g. P2 Time out) after
the communication was established with the Base Variant (i.e. no ECU
Variant was detected).
ECU has not been tested yet, ECU was not tested (double CAN IDs),
Variant of an ECU was not found (double CAN IDs).
Communication with the ECU is running.

Processing Mode Icon

The Processing Mode is represented by the following icons:

ICON REMARKS
The ECU will be processed in parallel with others.

The ECU will be processed after parallel processing of all other ECUs
was finished. ECUs that are marked for serial processing are stored in
the Monaco Workspace file.
The ECU will be processed mandatory in serial order. The Processing
Mode cannot be changed in the ECU window. ECUs that are marked
for serial processing are stored in the Monaco Workspace file.

To switch an ECU from parallel to serial processing and vice versa use the entries Serial or

386
8.19. HMI Control Tool Quick Test

Parallel in the context menu of the ECU entry.

ECU Checkbox

Use the checkbox to remove one or more ECUs from the Quick Test by unchecking them.
When an ECU is disabled, its text in the ECU table is shown in gray color. Unchecked ECUs
will not be processed during a Quick Test. New ECUs will be checked by default.

Use the <SPACE> key to enable/disable the selected ECU using the keyboard.

Disabled ECUs are stored in the Monaco Workspace file.

ECU Context Menu

For every ECU a context menu is available by clicking with the right mouse key on its row in
the table.

ICON REMARKS
Copy Cell to Copies only the content of the selected cell to the Clipboard.
clipboard
Copy Line to Copies the selected line to the Clipboard. You may also use CTRL+C
clipboard to copy your selection to the Clipboard.
Copy All to clip- Copies the whole content of the control to the Clipboard.
board
Select All Selects all ECUs in the table
Enable Adds the selected ECU to the Quick Test if it was disabled.
Use the SPACE key to enable or disable the selected ECUs with the
keyboard.
Disable Removes the selected ECU from the Quick Test if it was enabled.
Use the SPACE key to enable or disable the selected ECUs with the
keyboard.
Serial Select the ECU for serial processing.
Parallel Select the ECU for parallel processing.

387
8.19. HMI Control Tool Quick Test

Open in Layout Opens a new temporary Monaco Layout with a Diagnostic Services,
Variant Coding, DTC or Flash Programming HMI Control (according
to the selected sub item) with the Short Name of the selected ECU.
The Logical Link Filter of this new HMI Control is set to only show
the selected Logical Link (ECU). Communication for this Logical Link
is started immediately.

Once the new Layout is created, a right-click on its tab headline will
enable you to remove the Layout again.

To use this option, the corresponding Properties Options/Open in Diag-

nostic Services Layout, Options/Open in Variant Coding Layout, Op-
tions/Open in DTC Layout and Options/Open in Flash Programming
Layout in the Common Settings tab of the Configurator has to be set to
true.

Hide unidentified ECUs Checkbox

Hides all ECUs where no communication could be established (e.g. all ECUs with red or
gray status icons).

8.19.1.3 ECU Identification Window

The ECU Identification window displays the identification data read from the selected ECU
in the ECUs window. The selected ECU is shown in brackets after the ECU Identification
window title.

COLUMN DESCRIPTION CAN

BE
HID-
DEN
Identification Short or Long Name of the parameter of a identification ser- No
Parameter vice (depends in the setting of the Show LongNames option in
the Configurator).
Value Value returned by the identification service No

The ECU Identification Window can be hidden using the button. To unhide it, use the

388
8.19. HMI Control Tool Quick Test

button on the top right of the ECU Window.

8.19.1.4 Errors and Environment Data Windows

Errors Window

This window displays all properties of a Diagnostic Trouble Code. The content of this window
refers to the selected ECU in the ECUs Window.
The selected ECU is shown in brackets after the Errors window title.

COLUMN DESCRIPTION CAN

BE
HID-
DEN
DTC Decimal value (e.g. SAE/ISO) of the Diagnostic Trouble Code No
DTC (hex) Hexadecimal value of the Diagnostic Trouble Code Yes
Fault Symptom Error text of the Diagnostic Trouble Code Yes
DTC Level DTC Level of the Diagnostic Trouble Code Yes
Status Status of the Diagnostic Trouble Code Yes
Status Byte Number of the Diagnostic Trouble Code in hex Yes
(hex)
Readiness Value of the Readiness flag in the Status Byte Yes
MIL Value of the MIL flag in the Status Byte Yes
Stored Value of the Stored flag in the Status Byte Yes

Active Value of the Active flag in the Status Byte Yes

To sort the list alphabetically for a column, click on the column header.

A DTC is shown in red color when no environment data is available.

The Negative Response Code from the ECU when reading environment data is
displayed in the Environment Data window and also written to the Report of the
HMI Control.

Environment Data Window

The Environment Data Window shows the DTC Environment Data and the DTC Additional
Information in two separate tabs for the selected DTC in the Errors window. The selected

389
8.19. HMI Control Tool Quick Test

DTC is shown in brackets after the Environment Data window title.

The Environment Data Window can be hidden using the button on the top right of the
Error Window. To unhide it, use the button on the top right of the Error Window.

Tab DTC Environment Data

The tab DTC Environment Data contains the Environment Data of the selected DTC in the
Errors window.

COLUMN DESCRIPTION CAN

BE
HID-
DEN
Environment Short or Long Name of the Parameter (depending on the set- No
Parameter ting of the Show LongNames property in the Configurator).
Value Value of the Parameter No
Unit Unit of the Parameter No
RangeInfo When a range information is available in the ODX database, Yes
this column shows information about the validity of the value.
The configuration property Display Column RangeInfo deter-
mines if the column RangeInfo is shown or hidden.

The following values may be displayed:

Value OK : The value is within a valid range.
Value not valid: The value is in an invalid area.
Value not defined: The value is in an area, which is marked in
a specification (e.g. as reserved).
Value not available: The value is in a currently invalid area.
The value usually is presented by the ECU but can currently
not be performed due to e.g. initialization or temporary prob-
lems.

If internal scale constraints are available in the database they

are added to the RangeInfo in brackets.

Rows with a RangeInfo other than Value OK are printed in red.

Raw Value Non-interpreted raw value of the Environment Parameter in Yes
(hex) hexadecimal format.
The configuration property Display Column Raw value (hex)
determines if the column Raw value (hex) is shown or hidden.
Only available for ODX databases (SMR, SRD and SOD
database format).

390
8.19. HMI Control Tool Quick Test

To sort the list alphabetically for a column, click on the column header.

Tab DTC Additional Information

The tab DTC Additional Information contains the available SDGs (Special Data Groups) for
one selected Diagnostic Trouble Code selected in the Errors window.

COLUMN DESCRIPTION CAN

BE
HID-
DEN
Name The Short Name or Long Name of the SDG caption is dis- No
played
Value Value of the Parameter No
Description Description of the SDG caption No

To sort the list alphabetically for a column, click on the column header.

8.19.2 Configuration of the HMI Control Tool Quick Test

The Configurator Settings control the behavior of the HMI Control Tool Quick Test in Execu-
tion Mode.

It contains the following tabs:

• Common Settings
• Filters

The following buttons are available:

• OK : Saves the current configuration and closes the Configurator

• Cancel: Changes are discarded and the Configurator is closed
• Edit: Opens the Sequence Editor
• Help: Opens the appropriate chapter in the Monaco help

391
8.19. HMI Control Tool Quick Test

8.19.2.1 Common Settings

The image below shows the dialog window Tool Quick Test - Configurator with the Common
Settings tab opened.

392
8.19. HMI Control Tool Quick Test

393
8.19. HMI Control Tool Quick Test

The table below gives an overview of all Properties and their values of the tab Common
Settings of the HMI Control Configurator. Default values are represented by bold letters.

Property Default Value / Description

Group / Prop- Value Range
erty
Gen- Tool Quick Name of the HMI Control that will be displayed in its
eral/Caption Test/any char- frame.
acter string This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
General/Show true/false If true, the border frame of the HMI Control is dis-
Frame played else no border frame is displayed.
This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
General/Show true/ false If true, FunctionalClasses (including Services) are
Functional- displayed in the database browser of the Sequence
Classes Editor.
General/Show true/ false If true, Long Names are displayed in the user inter-
LongNames face and the Sequence Editor, if false, Short Names
are shown.
General/Show true/false If true, Logical Links of Variants are displayed in the
LogicalLinks on Filters tab of the Configurator.
Variants This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
General/Show true/false If true, the ECU Identification window is displayed, if
ECU Identifica- false it is hidden.
tion Window
General/Show true/false If true, the Result Window is displayed, if false it is
Result Window hidden.
General/Show true/ false If set to true, the folder Library containing the Global
Library in OTX OTX scripts is displayed in the OTX tree of the Se-
tree quence Editor. If false, the folder Library and the
contained Global OTX scripts are hidden.
OTX scripts that shall be accessible not only for one
project can be added to the Library of Global OTX
scripts using the tab Libraries in the System Config-
urator.

394
8.19. HMI Control Tool Quick Test

Op- 7/any positive Maximum parallel links that will be executed.

tions/Maximum number
parallel Links
Options/Show ServiceID/None/ServiceID
Determines if a Service Id with or withour Data Id is
Service Identi- and DataID shown in front of a displayed service.
fier
Options/Set true/false If a Quick Test is executed and the checkbox Hide
Temporary unidentified ECUs is activated afterwards, the lists of
Filter Logical Links displayed is reduced in all HMI Controls
which are part of the current configuration to those
which were identified before. This behavior takes
place if the option Set temporary Filter is set to true.
If this option is set to false only the list of ECUs in the
Quick Test is reduced to those which were identified.
Options/Open false/true Enables the menu item Diagnostic Services in the
in Diagnos- context menu entry Open in Layout of the selected
tic Services ECU in the ECUs window.
Layout
Options/Open false/true Enables the menu item Variant Coding in the context
in Variant Cod- menu entry Open in Layout of the selected ECU in
ing Layout the ECUs window.
Options/Open false/true Enables the menu item DTC in the context menu en-
in DTC Layout try Open in Layout of the selected ECU in the ECUs
window.
Options/Open false/true Enables the menu item Flash Programming in the
in Flash Pro- context menu entry Open in Layout of the selected
gramming Lay- ECU in the ECUs window.
out
Options/Show false/true Shows the runtime filter check boxes in the user in-
Runtime Filter terface.

Errors Win- true/false If true, the column DTC (hex) is displayed in the Er-
dow/Show rors window, if false it is hidden.
Column DTC
(hex)
Errors Win- false/true If true, the column DTC Level is displayed in the Er-
dow/Show rors window, if false it is hidden.
Column DTC
Level

395
8.19. HMI Control Tool Quick Test

Errors Win- true/false If true, the column Fault Symptom is displayed in the
dow/Show Errors window, if false it is hidden.
Column Fault
Symptom
Errors Win- true/false If true, the column Status is displayed in the Errors
dow/Show window, if false it is hidden.
Column Status
Errors Win- true/false If true, the column Status Byte (hex) is displayed in
dow/Show the Errors window, if false it is hidden.
Column Status
Byte (hex)
Errors Win- true/false If true, the column Readiness is displayed in the Er-
dow/Show rors window, if false it is hidden.
Column Readi-
ness
Errors Win- true/false If true, the column MIL is displayed in the Errors win-
dow/Show dow, if false it is hidden.
Column MIL
Errors Win- true/false If true, the column Stored is displayed in the Errors
dow/Show window, if false it is hidden.
Column Stored
Errors Win- true/false If true, the column Active is displayed in the Errors
dow/Show window, if false it is hidden.
Column Active
EnvData Win- true/false If true, the column RangeInfo is displayed in the En-
dow/Show Col- vironment Data window, if false it is hidden.
umn RangeInfo
EnvData Win- true/false If true, the column Raw value (hex) is displayed in the
dow/Show Col- Environment Data window, if false it is hidden.
umn Raw value
(hex)
Configure But- false/true Enables or disables the Configure Button in the HMI
ton/visible Control.
This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
Show/Hide true/false If true, the button that shows or hides the ECU Iden-
Buttons tification window is displayed, if false it is hidden.
for/ECU Identi- This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
fication Window rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.

396
8.19. HMI Control Tool Quick Test

Show/Hide true/false If true, the button that shows or hides the Result win-
Buttons dow is displayed, if false it is hidden.
for/Result This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
Window rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.
Show/Hide true/false If true, the button that shows or hides the Environ-
Buttons ment Data window is displayed, if false it is hidden.
for/EnvData This property cannot be changed when the Configu-
Window rator is opened while Monaco is in Execution Mode.

For general information about the tab Common Settings please have a look at chapter Com-
mon Settings.

8.19.2.2 Filters
The Filters tab allows controlling the Logical Links shown in the ECUs Window of the HMI
Control.

It has the following layout:

397
8.19. HMI Control Tool Quick Test

The Filters tab lists all Logical Links of the current DTS project.

The following table gives an overview of all properties and their values in the tab Filters.
Default values are represented by bold letters.

PROPERTY VALUES DESCRIPTION

LogicalLink filter off/on on: enables Logical Link filtering,
off: every Logical Link of the cur-
rent DTS project is listed
LogicalLink fil- pass/reject pass: this Logical Link will be
ter/Link Name listed;
reject: this Logical Link will not be
listed

For detailed information please have a look at the chapter Using Filters.

8.19.2.3 Tool Quick Test Sequence Editor

The Tool Quick Test Sequence Editor has three main areas:

• Sequence Area:
The Sequence Area shows the configured sequence in a tree, structured by nodes.

• Operation Area:
The Operation Area offers a list of services, Java jobs, OTX scripts and ComPrimitives
that can be added to the sequence using Drag and Drop or by the context menu of its
items.

• Detail Area:
The Detail Area shows detailed information about the selected service in the Sequence
Area or Operation Area.
Use the button to show the details in a larger window.

The Tool Quick Test Sequence Editor is used to define services that are executed before
and after the configured data is read from the ECUs.

The configured data is read in the MainAction of each ECU. The Additional Services section
can be used to insert special services that will report their responses in the report (e.g. read
odometer).

The Tool Quick Test Sequence Editor handles the following two configuration types:

• Read Data

398
8.19. HMI Control Tool Quick Test

• Clear Errors

The Sequence Tree has two sections:

• Handled: active ECUs that are handled

• Not Handled: ECUs that have been excluded in the ECU Sequence order dialog

The Sequence Tree of the Sequence Editor uses the order defined in the ECU Sequence
Order Configuration dialog.

Actions may be defined per ECU.

• PreAction: Actions that are executed before the Read Data/Clear Error actions
• Additional Services: Services for reading data from the ECU that has to be docu-
mented in the report. Only services that are associated with the current ECU may be
added. If you tag a service as Read Odometer or Read VIN the Odometer and/or the
VIN field in the report header will be filled with the return value of the service. You have

399
8.20. HMI Control Variant Coding

to select the response parameter that contains the Odometer/VIN value in the dialog
that pops up after you selected the appropriate item from the context menu. Only one
service in the whole sequence may be tagged this way.

• PostAction: Actions that are executed after the Read Data/Clear Error actions

Adding Services to the Configuration

Drag and drop services, ComPrimitives or OTX scripts from the Operations window on the
upper right side to the Sequence Tree.

Parameter Configuration

The parameters of services selected in the Sequence Tree may be configured in the Detail
window on the bottom right corner.
The DisplayName is the name that is shown in the Sequence tree. The initial DisplayName
is automatically generated. This ensures that the DisplayName does not match any other
Display Mame of a service, ComPrimitive or job with the same Short Name that is already
contained in the ECU.

Configuration for Multiple ECUs

When a service, ComPrimitive or job is used by several ECUs, the configuration can be
made for all these ECUs in one step using a wizard.

Right-click the the service, ComPrimitive or job and select Configure for multiple ECUs...
from the context menu.

The next dialog allows selecting all ECUs that shall be configured by the wizard.
The Display Name and Short Name is used to find all occurrences of the selected service,
ComPrimitive or job in the available ECus. Click Next>.

Now configure the service, ComPrimitive or job and click Close to apply the configuration to
all selected ECUs.

8.20 HMI Control Variant Coding

General Information

In the automotive electronics industry the term Variant Coding describes a procedure that
allows adapting ECU software to a vehicle-specific (optional components, equipments and
instrumentation) or a localization specific (e.g. country) environment. Variant Coding of an
ECU is typically performed during vehicle or ECU production, in the aftermarket (upgrading

400
8.20. HMI Control Variant Coding

vehicle equipment) and in a service environment (replacement of defective parts or equip-

ment).

The following use cases are typically Variant Coding domains:

• Adjustment of an ECU according to a specific vehicle environment

• Country specific configuration

• Setting of a specific characteristic

• Enabling/Disabling of optional features

For example the component Door covers the function central locking, electric window lift
and so on. There are vehicle models with or without an electric window lift, but with a central
locking function. These features can be enabled, disabled or configured in the Variant Coding
process.

Description The HMI Control VariantCoding is designed to perform ECU

coding. It also manages different configuration files contain-
ing coding information. It offers complete access to the cod-
ing services and their parameters allowing modifications of the
coding information in the ECU. The HMI Control supports dis-
playing and handling of internal and external codings as well
as default codings.

The HMI Control VariantCoding supports the ECU Configu-

ration (ODX-E) feature as well as the coding using services
(ODX-D) in connection with the AGL interface.

The ECU Configuration (ODX-E) was introduced in the ASAM

ODX-2D specification Version 2.2.0 and in ASAM MCD-3D
specification Version 3.0.0. This specification describes the
whole process for the Variant Coding of an ECU.

To work with the Variant Coding HMI Control, the ODX data of
the DTS project has to meet some requirements. For details
see chapter ODX Data Requirements.

See chapter Coding Terms to get an explanation of the terms

used in the field of Variant Coding.
Classification Function
License HMI Library Extension required
Reports supported
Pre and Post Actions supported

401
8.20. HMI Control Variant Coding

Application Guideline supported

(AGL)
This HMI Control only works with ODX data that was created
according to the Softing Authoring Guidelines. It requires spe-
cial services that have to match with the Softing Authoring
Guidelines.

If the ODX data of the customer does not fulfill this require-
ment, Softing offers the Application Guideline (AGL) technol-
ogy that allows using customer specific ODX data without cre-
ating customer specific software variants of DTS Monaco.

Application Guidelines are files that are able to create a map-

ping between the functionalities supported by DTS Monaco
(as reading DTCs, Coding, ECU Identification) and the cus-
tomer specific ODX data, that was created according to the
Authoring Guidelines of the customer.

If you want to work with this HMI Control using customer spe-
cific ODX data, contact Softing to get assistance in setting up
such an AGL interface.

8.20.1 Coding Terms

Description
Term
Coding Service Functions (e.g. electric window lift, central locking, ... ) can
be grouped together. The term Coding Service is used for all
coding information that is grouped in one diagnostic service.
Coding Information is:

• Coding String

• Default Coding String

• Coding Parameter

• Predefined Coding Parameter value

An ECU can support multiple Coding Services.

402
8.20. HMI Control Variant Coding

Coding Parameter A Coding Parameter is the physical representation of a func-

tion (e.g. electric window lift) in the Coding String. A Coding
String may contain several functions which are grouped to-
gether. For each function one ore more Coding Parameter s
exist.
At Runtime the Coding Parameter has only one value (Coding
Parameter Value). For example, in case of a texttable there
are several predefined Coding Parameters where one of them
can be chosen at runtime.
Coding Parameter Value A Coding Parameter Value is the physical representation value
(e.g. texttable, numeric, string, ...) used to enable, disable or
configure a function.
Predefined Coding Pa- Predefined Coding Parameter Values are predefined Coding
rameter Value Parameter Values (e.g. numeric values) which are defined by
the vehicle system supplier.
Default Coding Parame- A Default Coding Parameter Value is the default value for a
ter Value Coding Parameter Value. This value is stored in the database.
Coding String A Coding String is the binary data representation of all the
Coding Parameters of a Coding Service. All functions of a
Coding Service are binary coded in a Coding String.
Default Coding String A Default Coding String is a predefined Coding String from the
vehicle manufacturer. It represents a predefined functionality
for a Coding Service.

8.20.2 ODX Data Requirements

ECU Configuration

The ODX standard contains a special element ECU Configuration for the variant coding use
case.
The VariantCoding HMI control contains complete support for this kind of ODX data if it is
authored in the ODX data for an ECU / ECU Variant.

Using Write/Read Service Pairs

Traditionally, the Variant Coding functionality is authored by using a pair of Write and Read
Services, where the Coding Parameters in the request of the Write Service have the same
naming and type as the Coding Parameters in the response of the Read Service.

Usage of service pairs for Variant Coding is also supported in the VariantCoding HMI control

403
8.20. HMI Control Variant Coding

using an internal mechanism called Application Guidelines.

DTS8 Monaco is delivered with a default Application Guideline for Variant Coding (file
name ”@softing.agl”) that relies on the following ODX attributes to be set:

• All Variant Coding Write Services have to be part of a functional class called Variant-
CodingWrite.

• All Variant Coding Read Services have to be part of a functional class called Variant-
CodingRead.

• All Coding Parameters for Write and Read Services (in contrast to e.g. the Data Iden-
tifier for the service or Tester ID) must have the semantic CODINGDATA set for the
parameter.

• The Coding Parameters for the identical functionality in the Write and Read services
must have the same ODX Short Name.

• The association of the Read Service to the related Write Service must be authored by
using a related service reference from the write service to the according read service
with the relation type CODINGREAD.

Items for Variant Coding used in the Application Guideline file

Function: OPTION VARCODING

Value Range:
WRITESYMBOLIC READSYMBOLIC: Use symbolic coding services to write and read Cod-
ing Strings.
WRITEDUMP READSYMBOLIC: Use dump coding services to write and symbolic coding
services to read Coding Strings.
WRITESYMBOLIC READDUMP: Use symbolic coding services to write and dump coding
services to read Coding Strings.
WRITEDUMP READDUMP: Use dump coding services to write and read Coding Strings.
WRITE READ ECU CONFIG: Use ECU Config to write and read Coding Strings.

A Symbolic Coding Service is the Coding Service that has one or more interpreted parame-
ters for the Coding String.
A Dump Coding Service is the Coding Service that has only one Parameter of type Bytefield
for the Coding String.

Function: WRITE VARCODING

Identification criteria of the symbolic write coding services and their relevant parameters for
the Coding String.

Function: WRITE READ VARCODING RELATION

404
8.20. HMI Control Variant Coding

Identification criteria to get the related symbolic read coding service for a symbolic write
coding service and their relevant parameters for the Coding String.

Function: WRITE WRITEDUMP VARCODING RELATION

Identification criteria to get the related dump write coding service for a symbolic write coding
service and their relevant parameters for the Coding String.

Function: READ READDUMP VARCODING RELATION

Identification criteria to get the related dump read coding service for a symbolic read coding
service and their relevant parameters for the Coding String.

If you have problems matching your ODX data to the requirements of the Monaco HMI Con-
trols please contact Softing for support.

8.20.3 Using the HMI Control Variant Coding

The image below shows the user interface of the HMI Control VariantCoding.

The user interface is divided into the following areas:

Coding Service Selection Area
Coding Sets Area
Coding Service Editor
Execution Area

Button Configure:

This button opens the Configurator of the HMI Control.

The button is only visible if it has been activated in the HMI Control Configurator.

405
8.20. HMI Control Variant Coding

8.20.3.1 Coding Service Selection Area

The Coding Service Selection Area provides controls for selecting the ECU and its Coding
Services.

Initialization

The initialization mode defines how the Coding Service will be initialized.

The following modes are available:

• ECU: An ECU has to be connected to the system. The current coding information is
retrieved from the ECU and displayed in the Coding Service Editor.

• Default (offline): No ECU is required. The current coding strings are taken from the
database. They may be changed and saved into a file and be written to the ECU later
on.

• None: Coding Services are retrieved from the database but no current coding strings
are set. A connection to the ECU is established but no coding information is retrieved.

ECU field

The ECU field lists all ECUs available for coding.

Select an ECU from the list. You also may search for a special ECU by typing the first letters
of an ECU name in the field. All ECUs with a name that matches the entered string are listed
below the ECU field.

You may preselect an ECU that is automatically set when Monaco enters Execution Mode
using the configuration option Default ECU.
By default a selected ECU will be connected automatically. This may be changed by the
option Connect selected ECU automatically in the Configurator.

Connect and Disconnect Buttons

When the button Connect is pressed, a connection to the ECU is established. A Variant
Identification and Selection is executed.
The button Disconnect closes the connection to the ECU.
The buttons are only active for the initialization modes ECU and None.

Coding Services

List of Coding Services available for the selected ECU.

By default, the first Coding Service is read when an ECU is selected.

You may search for special Coding Services by typing a part of the Coding Services identifier.

406
8.20. HMI Control Variant Coding

All Coding Services with a name that fits the entered string are listed below the Coding
Services field.

In front of the Coding Service name additional information as specified in the configuration
setting Options/Show Service Identifier may be displayed, e.g. the Service ID or the Data
ID.

If a value of a Coding Parameter was changed, the Coding Services name will change its
color to green. This allows the user checking if all changed Coding Services are written to
the ECU. A Coding Service is changed when the Current Coding String is different from the
Original Coding String.

Set to default Button

A Coding Service can have default values. This button sets the default values from the
database for the currently selected Coding Service or for all Coding Services. In case there
are modified values the user will be asked to discard the changes or to cancel the operation.

If the button next to it on the right is set to Current Coding Services only the currently selected
Coding Service will be set to its default values. When All Coding Services is selected all
Coding Services will be set to their defaults.

The Set to default button is only available in the Coding Parameters and Predefined Coding
Parameters Values tabs and when an ECU has been selected.

Reset Button

This button allows resetting Coding Services to their original state (just as after the selection
of the ECU by the user).

The button is only available when ECU is selected as Initialization Mode.

If the button on the right is set to Current Coding Service only the currently selected Coding
Service will be reset. When the option All Coding Services is selected all Coding Services
will be reset.

8.20.3.2 Coding Sets Area

Load Button

Loads a Coding Set for the selected ECU from a file.

The following file formats are supported:

• ECX (ECU Coding Exchange)

407
8.20. HMI Control Variant Coding

When the file has been loaded, the Codings Sets that match for the selected ECU are filtered
and shown in the list of Coding Sets.

Coding Set Drop-down List

The combo box Coding set is used to select an appropriate Coding Set for the selected ECU
from the loaded Coding Set file.
By default no Coding Set is selected and <No coding set> is shown.

A Coding Set printed in green color indicates a changed Coding Set. A Coding Set is
changed when the Current Coding String is different from the Coding String in the loaded
Coding Set.

When a Coding Set is loaded, it is checked if the name of the used Coding Service and the
length of the Coding String matches to the currently used Coding String. If the check fails,
a warning dialog containing the name of the Coding Service which causes the problem is
displayed.

If the Coding Set does not match to the ECU Variant of the ECU a dialog will pop up allowing
loading the Coding Set anyway.

Loading another Coding Set from a file will discard all changes. If loading the new Coding
Set causes modifications of Coding Services to get lost, a dialog with a warning will pop up
in this case. Click Discard to confirm that any local changes shall be discarded.

Comment Field

Shows the comment of a Coding Set for ECX files.

Save Button

Use the Save button to save the Coding Sets.

The scope of Codings Sets to be saved is selected by one of the following options using the
button next to the Save button:

• All Coding Services: This option saves the values for all Coding Services as a Coding
Set

• Changed Coding Services: This option only saves all currently changed Coding Ser-
vices (Current Coding Strings) as a Codings Set to the target file

• Current Coding Service: This option only saves the currently selected Coding Service
as Coding Set to the target file

408
8.20. HMI Control Variant Coding

• Manual selection: When the Save button is pressed, the Manual selection dialog pops
up listing all Coding Services and allowing manual selection.

This option saves only the selected Coding Services as Coding Set to the target file.

When the Save button is pressed a small dialog will pop up.

Please select where to save the Coding Set: In the currently loaded file or in a new file.
Enter the name of the Coding Set and optionally add a comment.

In case a new file shall be created, click the ... button to select the path and the file name.
The Save a coding set dialog will be displayed. Select the directory and the file name for the
new Coding Set file.

The file will be stored using the ECX (the ECU Coding Exchange) file format.
Click Save to close the file selection dialog.

Click OK in the Save coding set dialog to create the new file.

The new file and the new Coding Set will be loaded automatically closing an already loaded

409
8.20. HMI Control Variant Coding

file.

Delete Button

Use the Delete button to remove a Coding Set from the source file. The Coding Set has to
be selected in the Coding Set combo box before it can be removed. A warning will pop up to
confirm the removal of the Coding Set.

When the Coding Set has been deleted it is also removed from the Coding Set combo box.
In case the Coding Set was the last one in the file the whole file is deleted.

8.20.3.3 Coding Service Editor

The Coding Service Editor lists the parameters of a Coding String and enables the user to
change them.

The parameters of a Coding Service are shown in two different views:

• as a table with the symbolic Coding Parameter Values of the Coding String
• as Byte Strings in hexadecimal or decimal format displaying the whole Coding String
read from the ECU and the currently changed Coding String

Coding Parameter Editor

The Coding Parameters of a Coding String are visualized in a symbolic form in the Coding
Parameter list consisting of three tabs:

• Coding Parameter tab:

This tab handles internal coding strings (e.g. detailed coding strings from an ODX-D
file of an ODX project). All features of the Variant Coding HMI Control are available.
The list contains detailed information, e.g. name, Coding Parameter value, bit and byte
position, etc.

Name (column sortable): Name of the Coding Parameter.

Value: Value of the Coding Parameter. Edit the value by double-clicking the appropri-
ate cell.
Original Value: Value of the Coding Parameter set in the ECU before Coding.
Description (column sortable): Description of the Coding Parameter.
Byte (column sortable): Byte position of the Coding Parameter.
Bit (column sortable): Bit position of the Coding Parameter.

410
8.20. HMI Control Variant Coding

Bit length: Bit length of the Coding Parameter.

Unit: Unit of the Coding Parameter.

• Default Coding String tab:

This tab handles the default coding strings present in the database e.g. buffer cod-
ing strings from an ODX-E file of an ODX project. The list contains only information
regarding the Default Coding String and the Key.
In this case the list is behaving differently than the list in the Coding Parameter tab or
the list in the Predefined Coding Parameter Values tab:
Upon selection of a default name the selected default string is set as the current coding
string overwriting the modifications up to that point. The user will be informed if the
current coding string has been modified and will be asked to accept or deny applying
the default string.

Name (column sortable): Name of the Default Coding String

Key: Key (according to ODX-E specification)
Rule (column sortable): Rule (according to ODX-E specification).
Description (column sortable): Description of the Default Coding String.

• Predefined Coding Parameter Values tab:

This tab handles Predefined Coding Parameter Values, e.g. buffer coding strings from
an ODX-E file of an ODX project.
All features of the VariantCoding HMI Control are available. The list contains detailed
information, e.g. name, Coding Parameter value, bit and byte position, etc.

The Coding Parameter list displays the content of the coding string. Each Coding Parameter
occupies one line in the list showing the Coding Parameter name, its Coding Parameter
value, bit and byte position, bit length, type, etc.

The columns available in the view may be configured in the Common Settings tab of the HMI
Control Configurator.

Double-clicking a row in the table enables the user to edit the Coding Parameter value of the
selected parameter (Coding Parameter).
Each modification is also reflected in the Byte sequence of the Current Coding field below
the table.

The sorting of the Coding Parameter values in a list can be set to alphabetical using the
Configuration Setting Options/Sort texttable entries automatically.

411
8.20. HMI Control Variant Coding

By default the Coding Parameter value are shown in the order they have been entered in the
database.

Coding Parameters are by default sorted by their byte and bit positions respectively, but most
columns can be used to sort the entire list according to the values in the column by clicking
the header of the column.

The following issues are indicated in the table:

INDICATION DESCRIPTION
Text color of the row is The Coding Parameter was correctly read and the current
black value matches the original value.
Coding Parameter value The Coding Parameter was read but the value is invalid be-
shows <invalid> cause it cannot be interpreted.
Coding Parameter value The Coding Parameter was read but its value is not available
shows <not available> e.g. because the Coding Service could not be read or no de-
fault value exists.
Text color of the row is The Coding Parameter is correctly read and the current value
green is different to the original value.

When the value of a Coding Parameter has been modified this is indicated by a green text
color for that row in the table. A modified Coding Parameter can be reset to its original value
using the entry Set to original in the context menu of the parameter.

A Coding Parameter is labeled as invalid when the entered value is not valid (e.g. a value
which is set by the External Coding or entered manually for the Current Coding String).

A Coding Parameter is labeled as not available when no value is available (e.g. a negative
response was received, no default value available in the database, no response from ECU,
...).

Coding String Editor

A Coding String may also be modified directly in its byte representation that is provided in
the field Current Coding.

Beneath the Coding Parameter list two fields are displaying the original and current Coding
Strings as byte sequence.

• Original Coding String (Read from ECU field or Default Coding or Empty Coding)

The upper field contains the original Coding String:

412
8.20. HMI Control Variant Coding

In case Initialization Mode was set to ECU the field is labeled Read from ECU and
shows the Coding String read from the ECU.
In case of Initialization Mode Defaults(offline) the field is labeled Default Coding and
shows the default Coding String.
If Initialization Mode was None the field is labeled Empty Coding and does not display
a Coding String.

The original Coding String cannot be changed by the user. The field also shows errors
in case the Coding String could not be read from the ECU or when there is no default
value available.

• Current Coding String

The Current Coding field shows the modified coding string. Initially, this field is set to
the Original Coding String, but when the user changes parameter values, this control
will contain a modified Coding String.
Changed bytes are highlighted in green color in both fields.

The current coding string can only be edited directly, if the configuration option Op-
tions/Allow Editing Current Coding String in the Configurator is set to true.

However, the changes will not take place immediately, the user has to press the Set
coding string button (the green check sign) to confirm the changes. By pressing the
button the changes made in the Current Coding string will be applied to the selected
Coding Service and the Coding Parameter value in the Coding Parameter list is up-
dated.

The green check sign will only be enabled when the Current Coding string was
changed.

Changes made directly in the Current Coding string may be discarded by pressing the
red cross button. This will not affect changes made via the Coding Parameter list.
The red cross sign will only be available when the Current Coding string was changed

413
8.20. HMI Control Variant Coding

directly in the Current Coding field.

The Current Coding String field allows pasting coding strings using the
context menu or the shortcut CTRL+V.
The pasted strings may have the following hexadecimal formats:

– 0001FFFA

– 0x00 0x01 0xFF 0xFA

– $00 $01 $FF $FA

– 0x05,FF

To paste or convert strings in decimal format, set the format button on the
right of the input field to Dec by clicking on the button. Select Dec. The
button caption changes to d.

To enter a decimal coding string, use three numerical digits per byte: e.g.
000,015,001,170.

By clicking the check sign on the right the pasted string is analyzed and
converted in the format used by the HMI Control.

You may copy Coding Service information from the Coding Service editor to the Windows
Clipboard for use in other applications.

1. Select the item you want to copy. You may select multiple items by holding down the
CTRL key during selection of the items.

2. Right-click the selected item to show a context menu.

The menu item Copy will copy your selection to the Clipboard.
The menu item Copy cell will copy only the content of the selected cell to the Clipboard.
The menu item Copy all will copy the whole content of the selected list to the Clipboard.
You may also use CTRL+C to copy your selection to the Clipboard.

3. In the Clipboard all items from a row will be separated by Tabs.

414
8.20. HMI Control Variant Coding

8.20.3.4 Execution Area

The Execution Area contains elements to start and manage the coding process.

Do Coding Button

This button triggers the coding of the services for the currently selected ECU. The coding
process is visualized by a progress bar.

The button is disabled as long as the coding strings have not been changed.
If the configuration option Write all Coding Services is set to true the button will be always
enabled. When this configuration option is enabled, all Coding Services will be read from the
ECU before they are written back.

Sequence Buttons

The HMI Control Variant Coding allows the configuration of up to 4 sequence buttons (see
Common Settings).
By default these sequence buttons are disabled in the Configurator of the HMI Control. When
enabled, they are located next to the Do Coding button in the Transmit preconfigured group
box.

The Sequence Buttons allow to trigger a predefined series of Services and ComPrimitives
by pressing a button. As long as a sequence is executed all other buttons are disabled. A
progress bar visualizes how much of the sequence has been executed.

The sequence of services is defined in the tabs Sequence 1 ... Sequence 4 in the Config-
urator of the HMI Control. To use services of ECU variants you should set the configurator
setting Show Logical Link on Variants to true. This will show all additional services and COM
Primitives defined for ECU Variants.

Pre- and Post Actions

If the execution of Pre- and Post Actions in the Configurator of the HMI Control is enabled,
the Pre-Actions are executed every time before coding data is written.
Post-Actions are executed after the coding data has been written.

Reading coding data or executing Sequences with the Sequence buttons do not trigger the
Pre- and Post Actions.

When the HMI Control property Read after Write is set, the Post-Action is executed after
the coding data has been written and before the coding data is read.

415
8.20. HMI Control Variant Coding

8.20.4 Configuration of the HMI Control Variant Coding

The Configurator Settings control the behavior of the HMI Control VariantCoding in Execution
Mode.

The Configurator contains the following tabs:

• Common Settings

• Filters

• Sequence Tabs

The following buttons are available:

• OK : Saves the current configuration and closes the Configurator

• Cancel: Changes are discarded and the Configurator is closed

• Edit: Opens the Pre and Post Action Editor.

Pre- and Post Actions can be specified for a HMI Control type in a DTS Project, i.e.
for all Variant Coding HMI Controls in all workspaces of a DTS Project. Whenever a
the execution of the HMI Control is started the Pre-Actions defined in the Pre- and
Post Action Editor are executed. When the execution is stopped, the Post-Actions are
executed.
This applies when the Property Execute Pre- and Post Actions is set to true.

• Help: Opens the appropriate chapter in the Monaco help

8.20.4.1 Common Settings

The image below shows the dialog window VariantCoding - Configurator with the Common
Settings tab opened.

416
8.20. HMI Control Variant Coding

The following table shows an overview of all Properties and their values of the tab Common
Settings. Default values are represented in bold letters.

VALUES DESCRIPTION
PROPERTY
GROUP /
PROPERTY
Gen- VariantCoding/anyName of the HMI Control that will be displayed in its
eral/Caption character string surrounding frame.
General/Show true/false Switches visualization of the frame of the HMI Control
Frame between on and off
General/Show true/false allows the user to select long name or short name
LongNames usage in the control

417
8.20. HMI Control Variant Coding

Gen- first Logical Sets the default ECU shown in the Configuration
eral/Default Link obtained Area. Double-click to show the list of available Base
ECU by the MCD Variants.
System/any
Logical Link
available in the
database
Gen- true/false If true, Monaco automatically will connect to the ECU
eral/Connect and perform a Variant Identification and Selection,
selected ECU when a new ECU is selected by the user.
automatically
General/Show false/true Displays the Base Variants and all Variants in the
Logical Links ECU list of the HMI Control and in the Services tab
on Variants of the Configurator.

Options/Allow true/false allows the editing of the current coding string directly
Editing Current in the edit control
Coding String
Options/Write false/true If disabled (false), only the Coding Services that have
all Coding Ser- changed (highlighted in green color) are written to the
vices ECU.
If enabled (true), the button Do Coding is always en-
abled if a current Coding String exists. All Coding
Services are written to the ECU no matter if the cod-
ing string has changed or not.
Options/Show false/true If enabled a dialog will be displayed to confirm the
dialog after loss of changes when another Coding Services is se-
changing Cod- lected.
ing Service
Options/Show None/Service Determines how the prefix in the Coding Service field
Service Identi- ID, Data ID, is arranged:
fier Service ID and
Data ID None: no prefix for the Coding Service (e.g. ”Test-
Service”)
Service ID: only 2 digit Service Identifier as prefix
(e.g. ”[2E] TestService”)
Data ID: only 4 digit Data Identifier as prefix (e.g.
”[1C00] TestService”)
Service ID and Data ID: Service Identifier followed
by Data Identifier as prefix (e.g. ”[2E 1C00] TestSer-
vice”)

418
8.20. HMI Control Variant Coding

Options/Sort true/false Sorts the list of available Coding Parameter Values

texttable entries alphabetically. If set to false, the values are displayed
automatically in the order found in the database.
Options/Read true/false If true, the Service for reading a Coding String is exe-
Coding Ser- cuted immedialtelly after the Write service has been
vices after executed.
Write
Re- false/true If true, unread Coding Services are read before the
port/Retrieve Variant Coding report is generated.
unread coding During Coding
services

419
8.20. HMI Control Variant Coding

With Seg- This option sets

ment Number the order the
First/Segment are written to
Number Only, the ECU. It
Without Seg- has no effect
ment Number as long as the
First, None option Write
based on Seg-
ment Number
is set to false.
Segment num-
ber only: Only
that have a
segment num-
ber are written
when the button
Do Coding is
pressed. with
segment num-
ber are handled
in increasing
order.
Without seg-
ment number
first: that have
a segment
number are
written before
without seg-
ment number.
with segment
number are
handled in
increasing
order.
With segment
first: that have
no segment
number are
written before
with segment
number are
written. with
segment num-
ber are handled 420
in increasing
order.
None: no spe-
8.20. HMI Control Variant Coding

List Prop- true/false If true, the Unit column in the Coding Service Editor
erties/Show is displayed.
Unit
List Proper- true/false If true, the Byte column in the Coding Service Editor
ties/Show Byte is displayed.
Position
List Proper- true/false If true, the Bit column in the Coding Service Editor is
ties/Show Bit displayed.
Position
List Proper- true/false If true, the Bit length column in the Coding Service
ties/Show Bit Editor is displayed.
Length
List Prop- true/false If true, the Rule column in the Coding Service Editor
erties/Show is displayed. The column is only available when an
Rule ODX-E database is used.
List Prop- true/false If true, the Original Meaning column in the Coding
erties/Show Service Editor is displayed.
Original Value
Sequence false/true Enables the Sequence button for Sequence <n>
<n> But-
ton/visible
Sequence Sequence Name of the Sequence button for Sequence <n>
<n> But- <n>/any char-
ton/Caption acter string
Configure But- true/false Sets the visibility of the Configure button
ton/Visible
Pre/Post Ac- true/false Enables the execution of the Pre- and Post Actions
tions/Execute defined in the Pre and Post Action Editor. If set to
Pre- and true, the execution of the Pre- and PostActions is en-
PostActions abled.
If false, Pre- and Post Actions are ignored.
Pre/Post Ac- false/true Allows Alias Names to be configured in the Se-
tions/Show quence Tree of theServices/ComPrimitives tab in the
Alias Name Pre and Post Action Editor.
Pre/Post Ac- None/ServiceID Sets the format of the Identifier prefix for the services
tions/Show ServiceID and shown in the Services/ComPrimitives tab of the Pre
Identifier DataID and Post Action Editor.

421
8.20. HMI Control Variant Coding

For general explanations of the tab Common Settings please have a look at chapter Com-
mon Settings.

8.20.4.2 Filters
The Filters tab allows controlling the Logical Links (ECUs) shown in the ECU list of the HMI
Control.

The Filters tab lists all Logical Links of the current DTS project.

The following table gives an overview of all properties and their values of the tab Filters.
Default values are represented by bold letters.

PROPERTY VALUES DESCRIPTION

LogicalLink filter off/on on: enables Logical Link filtering,
off: every Logical Link of the cur-
rent DTS project is listed in the
ECU list of the HMI Control
LogicalLink fil- pass/reject pass: this Logical Link will be
ter/Link Name listed in the ECU list of the HMI
Control;
reject: this Logical Link will not be
listed

The Filters cannot be set during runtime (Execution Mode).

8.20.4.3 Sequence Tabs

The Configurator of the HMI Control Variant Coding provides tabs for creating four Se-
quences.

See Sequence tabs for more information about creating Sequences.

On the right side of the Configurator dialog the following three tabs are provided for designing
a Sequence:

• Services

The Services tab offers the services of all ECUs that may be added to a sequence.
Expand the tree and select a service. Use the arrow button pointing to the left to move

422
 the service to your sequence. Select the service in the Sequence tab and open the
Configuration tab on the right to configure the service. For more detailed information
about the tab Services please have a look at chapter Designing Sequences of Ser-
vices, ComPrimitives and OTX Scripts.

• ComPrimitives

The ComPrimitives tab offers the ComPrimitives of all ECUs that may be added to a
sequence. Expand the tree and select a ComPrimitive. Use the arrow button pointing
to the left to move the service to your sequence. Select the ComPrimitive in the Se-
quence tab and open the Configuration tab on the right to configure the ComPrimitive.
The structure of the tab ComPrimitives is the same as described in chapter Designing
Sequences of Services, ComPrimitives and OTX Scripts.

• Configuration

The structure of the tab Configuration is the same as described in chapter Configura-
tion of Services and ComPrimitives.

For general information about the Configurator of an HMI Control please have a look at
chapter Configuration of HMI Controls

9 Reports
With DTS Release 11 the former Monaco Snapshots are replaced by a general Reporting
feature.

Using Reports

The Reporting feature allows generating one summarizing Report of the state of several HMI
Controls.
A Report documents the work done with several HMI Controls. It allows sending the report
to someone else for e.g. analyzing a problem.

The Monaco report presents well formatted information to the user about the HMI controls
used in a Monaco workspace.

HMI Controls that are currently executing a cyclic operation (e.g. cyclically trans-
mitting services) are excluded from the report.

Generating and Configuration of a Report

Use the <F8> key, the Report button or the menu entry Save report in the Execution

423
9.1. Report Dialog

menu to trigger a new report. A report only for the selected HMI Control can be created
using the entry Save report for selected control in the Execution menu or by pressing the
<Shift+F8> keys.

The Report dialog will open allowing the configuration of the scope of information that shall
be included in the report file.

The generation of a Report is independent of the Logical Link state and supported even
when an HMI Control is executing any service cyclically.

The following HMI Controls contribute information to the Monaco report:

• DTC
• Diagnostic Services
• Flash
• OBD (not implemented yet)
• Recorder
• Variant Coding
• Tool Quick Test
• ECU Identification
• Service Table

9.1 Report Dialog

The Report Dialog requires entering the following data:

• User Information

If user information is already available, the following fields will be filled automatically.
You are free to modify this data. Modifications are saved, so the updated user informa-
tion is available the next time.
The default user information can be entered or modified in the Monaco Options dialog
available in the Tools menu.

– Name: User name

– Company: Company name

– Phone: User phone number

424
9.1. Report Dialog

– Department: Department in the company

• Comment: Allows entering a comment, e.g. to describe the content of the report

• Path: Path where the report file will be stored

By default the path of the currently loaded project is proposed. Use the Browse Direc-
tory button to select another folder.

• Content: A list of all active layouts containing HMI Controls that support reporting.
Active layouts are the Layouts that are started when Monaco execution is started. Use
Configure Workspace from the Configuration menu to define the scope of Layouts that
will be started with Monaco.

If a report only for the selected HMI Control was requested, the content tree will only
contain the selected HMI Control and its Layout.

Use the checkboxes in front of the Layout and HMI Control names to select the HMI
Controls that shall be included in the report.
To select all HMI Controls, check Select All. Disabling Select All will remove all HMI
Controls from the Report.

425
9.1. Report Dialog

The user and company name, the phone number and department will be taken from the
global Monaco user settings if available. The global Monaco user settings can be modified
in the Options dialog available from the Tools menu.
In case these items are modified in the Report dialog, also the global Monaco user settings
get updated.

When the checkbox Add Identification Data is enabled, identification data of the ECUs
used by the selected HMI Controls is added to the report.
The ECU Identification data of these ECUs is read using the configuration of the first ECU
Identification HMI Control found in the workspace. The Logical Link filter settings of this HMI
Control are ignored. If no ECU Identification HMI Control is present in the workspace this
option is disabled.

The report dialog offers the following buttons:

• Save: Saves the user information entered in the report dialog and saves the report file.
A dialogs informs the user when the report has been generated. The file name of the

426
9.2. Report File

report is generated automatically.

• Cancel: Closes the dialog without saving anything and without creating a report.

• Help: Opens the help section for generating Monaco reports.

9.2 Report File

The report is available as XML and HTML file. Both files are generated at the same time.
The files are saved to the folder specified in the field Path of the Report dialog.

A XSLT style sheet file is provided with DTS Monaco.

Report file content

Content of a report file:

• Softing logo

• User Info

– Author/user name

– Company

– Phone

– Department

– Comment (Description)

• Project Info

– DTS Project name

– VIT

– Tool

– Tool Version

– Create date and time

• The HMI Control section lists the HMI Controls and the information from the ECUs and
their errors. The first item in this section is the ECU Identification data provided by the
ECU Identification HMI Control.

427
The report can also contain information about services and parameters from Pre- and Post
Actions when they have been tagged as Documentation Services in the Pre- and Post Action
Editor. For details see chapter Pre- and Post Actions in Reports.

XML format report file

The XML format report file consists of a header and a HMI Control section.
The header contains the user information, the date the report was created, the comment and
the creation tool information.
To view the content, you can use a text or XML editor.

HTML format report file

The HTML file can be directly displayed by an Internet browser. Double-click the HTML file
in the folder you selected in the report dialog.
10 General Monaco Application Settings
The following settings are used to customize DTS Monaco according to the user’s specific
requirements.

• Application Options

• Column Handling

10.1 Application Options

To open the Monaco application options configuration select the item Options... from the
Tools menu.

The options are not saved to the specific workspace file; they are valid for the Monaco
application itself and apply to all workspace files.

Import HMI Control/Layout(s)

This tabs offers the setting Allow import of inconsistent HMIControl/Layouts that applies
to the Import of Layouts and the Import of an HMI Control.
The setting is disabled by default and prevents importing Monaco Layout Configuration Ex-
change and Monaco HMI Control Exchange files that are causing conflicts with the target
workspace.

428
10.1. Application Options

If enabled the Layouts and HMI Controls are imported anyway leaving it up to the user to fix
the problems.

Global default paths

Use the buttons Restore default path to reset the directory to the default path defined by the
Monaco application.

• HMI Control reports: Path used for saving HMI Control Reports

• Exchange files: Path for saving Monaco Layout Exchange and Monaco HMI Control
Exchange or Coding Exchange ECX files.

The default path for the reports and Layout and HMI Control Exchange files is the Report
folder of the current DTS Project .

User info

This dialog page contains user information that will be used for initializing appropriate fields
of dialogs that require user information (e.g. Reports).
The information is not saved within a workspace file. It will be saved by Monaco for all
workspaces that are used by the current Windows user.

• Name: user name

• Company: company name

• Phone: user phone number

• Department: department in the company

OTX log level

This dialog page sets the log level of the OTX Runtime.
The following log levels are available:

• Errors only

• Info

• Debug

This setting is synchronized with the setting in OTX Studio.

The OTX Runtime trace files are written to the folder \ProgramData\Softing\Diagnostic Tool
Set\<Version>\<DTS Edition>\Traces\ .

429
10.2. Column Handling

10.2 Column Handling

The setting affects all HMI Controls using lists except the Bus Trace and Symbolic Trace HMI
Controls.

There are two options available:

Absolute: The size of every column can be arranged without affecting the neighbor columns.
If columns get out of the visible area of the list a scroll bar will appear.

Relative: All columns are always in the visible area of the list. If the size of one column is
changed the neighbor column to the right will also change its size in order to fit in the visible
area of the list.
11 Tracing Options
DTS Monaco provides 3 different options to trace data.

• Reports
The content of an HMI Control can be stored into an HTML or XML-based Report file.
For more information about Reports please see chapter Reports.

• Bus Trace
The low-level communication on the bus can be stored into a trace file. This is done
with help of the HMI Control ”Bus Trace”. For more information about this HMI Control
please refer to chapter HMI Control Bus Trace.

• Symbolic Trace
All ASAM MCD-3 ComPrimitives, which are sent via a Logical Link can be stored
into a trace file. This is done with help of the HMI Control ”Symbolic Trace”. For more
information about this HMI Control please refer to chapter HMI Control Symbolic Trace.

12 Keyboard Support
Many features of Monaco can be controlled using the keyboard.

Press the Alt key to display the shortcut keys as underlined characters in the
menus and dialogs that have to be used together with the Alt key to activate a
function.

General Navigation Practices

Use the Arrow keys to move to the next/previous item.

Use the Tab key to move to the next item.

430
Press Enter or Space to activate the selected button or menu item.

Navigation in the user interface area of Monaco

To go to the Constant Layout press CTRL+1.

To go to the Status Message Area press CTRL+2.
To go to the Layout Area press CTRL+3.
To go to the Configuration Bar press CTRL+4.
To go to the Property Sheet press CTRL+6.

Navigation between HMI Controls within a Layout

Use the following keys to navigate within a Layout from one HMI Control to another:

• CTRL+Tab or F6 to move the focus to next HMI Control

• CTRL+Shift+Tab or Shift+F6 to move the focus to previous HMI Control
• CTRL+Home to move the focus to first HMI Control
• CTRL+End to move the focus to last HMI Control

HMI Controls are ordered starting on the top-left corner, from left to right and top to bottom
(i.e. following the common reading direction for an English text).

The currently selected HMI Control is marked by a thin dotted frame line.
Press F1 to open the related chapter in the integrated help of Monaco.

Using keys within an HMI Control

Use the Tab and Arrow keys to move the focus between the individual controls of an HMI
Control.

Press CTRL+F to enter a search string into a search field of the selected HMI Control.

13 Support
When you have problems or questions please contact Softing Automotive Support at sup-
[email protected].

To open a support ticket the following information is required in most cases:

• Your complete contact data (your full name, company name and address, country,
department)

• The serial number of the hardware used for licensing (USB dongle, Interface serial
number)

431
 • The version number of your installed DTS software (see System Configurator or
Monaco -> Help -> About)?

• The version of the operating system

• A detailed problem description. If necessary add the DTS project or its database to the
request.

For your convenience you can use the support dialog (Menu Help -> Support) to copy most
of the required data to the clipboard. Or just make a screen shot of the dialog. Take care to
have the hardware used for licensing plugged to your computer.

432